JP7570656B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that changes the display of pictures on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the display of changing pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-074175 A

In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention given to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention given to games.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

The present invention relates to
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A first ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter ;
A second ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means ;
an acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a transition determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state to a special game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state , based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game cycle control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game cycle operation is performed, the game cycle being counted as one game cycle when the game cycle operation is started and the game cycle operation is ended by a notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means;
A gaming machine comprising:
A display means having a display unit;
A first means capable of starting a first special performance in a predetermined area on the display unit based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A second means capable of starting a second special performance in the predetermined area on the display unit based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means;
having
The second means includes a means capable of starting the second special effect in the predetermined area based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means under a situation in which the first special effect is not being executed in the predetermined area,
The second ball entry means can be configured to allow a game ball to enter the ball more easily than the first ball entry means,
The first means is capable of executing a specific effect when starting the first special effect,
The second means is characterized in that the specific performance is executable when the second special performance is started .

The present invention can effectively increase attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. This is an oblique view of the game board unit from the rear side. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the configuration of the inner frame. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. A front view showing the configuration of the back pack unit. FIG. 2A is a front view of the variable display unit, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the variable display unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the variable display unit. FIG. 2 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the variable display unit. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the variable display unit. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a light emission state. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a mounting structure of a light guide plate. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a light emitting portion and a light guide plate. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing various counters. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration related to the pattern display. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a pattern displayed on the variable display unit. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing an arrangement of symbols displayed on a variable display unit. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an overview of a display in a variable display unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of side LEDs. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display control process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for starting fluctuations. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and the expectation of a jackpot. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of presentation in a normal reach that does not support special changes. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of presentation in a normal reach that supports special changes. A flowchart showing processing during fluctuation. 13 is a flowchart showing a light emission and drive control process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for special variable display. This is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation in a normal reach that does not support special changes. This is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation in a normal reach that supports special changes. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a visible range and a boundary portion. 1A is a flowchart showing a light emission restriction process, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between a side LED that is a restriction target and a boundary portion. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a variable display unit according to a second embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each light guide plate and the background; FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the background. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the variable display unit. FIG. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of a variable display unit according to a third embodiment. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of symbols etc. displayed on the inner reel. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the symbol combinations displayed on the inner reels and the types of jackpots. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game number control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for an upper operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of starting fluctuation for the upper operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a control process for a lower operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for starting fluctuation for the lower operating port. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game status and the types of lottery modes and support modes; FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game status and the variable display time. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game status and the lighting/extinguishing of each display unit. FIG. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a display mainly focusing on the outer reel, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a display mainly focusing on the inner reel. 13 is a flowchart showing the display processing for the upper operating port executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a main control process for an upper operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a special control process for an upper operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a display process for a lower operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a main control process for a lower operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing a special control process for a lower operating port. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming device according to a fourth embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the distribution destinations of game balls that reach the distribution mechanism. FIG. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of a sorting mechanism in a non-restricted state, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of a sorting device in a restricted state. (a) is an oblique view of the ball receiving mechanism from above, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the ball receiving mechanism. 1 is a schematic diagram of a gaming device in a non-assisted state. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a gaming device in a support state. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the gaming device. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the gaming device. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the gaming device. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the gaming device. A front view showing a game board unit in a fifth embodiment. This is an oblique view of the game board unit from the front side. 13 is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit showing the lower part of the game area. FIG. This is an oblique view of the ball entry unit from the front side. This is an exploded oblique view of the ball entry unit, showing the front cover removed from the base body. This is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the incoming ball. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the difference in the targets to be guided to the lower crane. FIG. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the lower crane and non-electric accessories. A schematic diagram showing the change in the number of reservations related to the lower operating port. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing display contents on a display screen. A flowchart showing a variable display control process for the first/second variable display area executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. A flowchart showing a variable display control process for the third variable display area executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for a first normal gaming state. A schematic diagram showing the time required for a game ball to move within a ball entry unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for the second and third phases. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of display presentation. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of display presentation. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to a losing result referenced in the first normal gaming state. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of display effects as the game progresses. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of a display screen in the sixth embodiment. (a) A flowchart showing the command response processing for hold display control executed by the MPU of the display control device, and (b) a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a hold display. 4 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process executed by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing a process of setting a reserved command. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the on-hold notice performance executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. A schematic diagram showing the types of hold notice performance. A schematic diagram showing the flow of the hold notice presentation. 13A is a schematic diagram showing the setting values in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. (a) A schematic diagram showing the winning rate of setting suggestions, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an overview of the setting suggestions. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the game board unit and the checklist in the eighth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing positioning lines for a check sheet. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram showing a light guiding function, and FIG. 2B is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration related to the light guiding function. A schematic diagram of the light-emitting effect in the glass unit viewed from the front of the gaming machine. FIG. 108(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 108(b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 108(a). FIG.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as seen from the front side, and Figures 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the components within the game area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 3.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a main machine part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting four long frame materials on all four sides, and is formed into a rectangular frame shape overall. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the game hall, etc.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state in which it can be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connection between the lower frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism, which allows the gaming machine main section 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 (see Figures 3 and 4).

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the gaming machine main part 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end of rotation and the right side as the tip end of rotation when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Fig. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an external shape substantially identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front area of the inner frame 13. A substantially elliptical window section 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20 so that substantially the entire area of a play area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front, and the window section 21 is blocked from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, and both glass panels 23 face each other from the front and rear with the partition in between. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the playing area PE is doubly covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame body 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one, or three or more. However, in consideration of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to use multiple glass panels and have each glass panel face each other at a specified gap from the front to the back. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a panel member made of a transparent synthetic resin instead of the glass panels.

Around the glass unit 22 (more specifically, the window section 21), various light-emitting means such as lamps are provided. For example, a circular illumination section 26 incorporating a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The circular illumination section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 that lights up when an error or other malfunction occurs is provided at the center of the circular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and on the left and right of this are prize ball lamp sections 28 that light up while prize balls are being paid out. In addition, speaker sections 29 that output sound effects and background music according to the game state are provided close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28 (see FIG. 3).

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 that bulge toward the front are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see Figure 2). The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described below while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 34 has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33 and the function of a receiving tray for storing game balls that are fired by the game ball launching mechanism but do not reach the game area PE (see Figure 3) when the game balls are returned to the player.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32 so as to protrude towards the front. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described below. The launch speed of the game ball increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launching handle 41 increases, and the game ball will reach the game area PE when this operation amount is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount. Furthermore, by adjusting this operation amount, the player can selectively hit the game ball into the right route or left route described below.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner, and the receiving portion is divided into left and right by a partition wall to separate the entrance portion of the front door side upper tray passage and the entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage lead to the game ball distribution section described later, and game balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

The rear surface of the front door frame 14 has protruding shafts at its upper and lower ends on the pivot base side. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 5. Figure 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the configuration within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 has been omitted in Figure 5, just like Figure 3.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50, the outer shape of which is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is disposed close to the upper frame part of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame part of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A fascia board is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The fascia board is disposed below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, its lower end part), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the fascia board. Note that a slight clearance may be provided between the fascia board and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference, etc.

Support brackets 71, 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (left side in Figure 5). Although not shown, the support brackets 71, 72 have shafts, and bearings provided on the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shafts, so that the front door frame 14 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotation tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (the vertical frame member described later), and has front door hook members 76 arranged in a scattered manner in its longitudinal direction (vertical direction). The inner frame base body 50 has slits formed to correspond to each front door hook member 76, which are provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 and the hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the front side of the inner frame 13. The front door hook members 76 protruding through the slits are engaged with the front door hook members 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. The locking device 75 also has inner frame hook members 77 that extend to the rear side of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 hook onto hook receiving members 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, locking the gaming machine main part 12 in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

The inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75) is provided with a cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (hook members 76, 77 and interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise), the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A storage recess 51 for storing the game board unit 80 is formed in the center of the inner frame base body 50. The storage recess 51 is recessed toward the rear of the gaming machine to match the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed in place by a manual locking mechanism while fitting into the storage recess 51 from the front of the gaming machine. A roughly rectangular window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the storage recess 51, and the rear structure of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b described later) protrudes from this window hole 52 to the rear of the inner frame 13. Note that almost the entire area of this window hole 52 is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is integrated with a front block 80a formed mainly of a board material made of synthetic resin material, and a rear block 80b provided on the rear side of the front block 80a and having various game components (variable display devices, control devices, movable presentation mechanisms, etc.) described later mounted on a base body 251.

The front block 80a has a play area forming body 310 made of transparent resin, and the above-mentioned play area PE, where the game balls flow down, is formed on the front of the play area forming body 310. As already explained, the play area PE is covered by a glass unit 22 (more specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is arranged so that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front of the play area forming body 310 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, so that the game balls flowing down the play area PE are not lined up front and back at the same point in the play area PE. This prevents balls from clogging the play area PE. Note that the play area forming body 310 is not limited to being made of synthetic resin, and can also be made of wood.

The game board unit 80 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 310) will be described below with reference to Figures 6 and 7. Figure 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and Figure 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as seen from the rear.

The play area forming body 310 has a plurality of openings, large and small, penetrating in the thickness direction (front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, an operating opening unit 83 (operating openings 83a, 83b), a through gate 84, etc. When game balls enter the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a, 83b, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is given to the player based on the detection result. In addition, an outlet 89 is provided at the bottom of the play area forming body 310, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections are discharged from the play area PE through the outlet 89. In the following explanation, to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 89, game balls entering the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b will also be referred to as "winning."

In addition, various game components such as numerous game pins 93 and windmills 94 are arranged in the game area forming body 310 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls. The various configurations of these game pins 93, windmills 94, etc. differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and adjust it so that the above-mentioned general winning hole 81 etc. will win with a moderate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the front block 80a (play area forming body 310), and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached to cover this central opening. Behind this central opening 85, the variable display unit 500 and other components belonging to the rear block 80b are located, and the variable display unit 500 and other components can be seen through the central opening (opening cover 86) from the front of the gaming machine. For ease of explanation, in FIG. 6, the opening cover 86 is shown by a two-dot chain line to show the state in which the variable display unit 500 is visible.

The operating port unit 83 and the through gate 84 are arranged around the central opening 85. The operating port unit 83 has an upper operating port 83a arranged below the variable display unit 500 and a lower operating port 83b arranged below the upper operating port 83a. Of these two operating ports 83a and 83b, the lower operating port 83b is provided with an electric device 91 as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric device 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and can be switched between an open state (assistance state) in which it is possible or easy to enter the lower operating port 83b, and a closed state (non-assistance state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball.

The through gate 84 is located upstream of the lower operating port 83b (more specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 500: the right route), and if a lottery is won when the game ball passes through the through gate 84, the electric device 91 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

When a ball enters the upper operating port 83a, three game balls are dispensed, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 83b, four game balls are dispensed, but the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above.

The variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 82 is formed with a large winning opening through which the game ball can pass, and is provided with an opening/closing body as an opening/closing member (opening/closing means) that opens and closes the large winning opening. The opening/closing body can be switched between an open state (permitting state) in which the game ball can or can easily enter, and a closed state (blocking state) in which the game ball cannot or cannot enter. The opening/closing body is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid or the like) provided on the back side of the game board unit 80, and the opening/closing door is normally kept in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when an internal lottery is won to transition to an opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state) (a large win: when a transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is won).

The opening and closing execution mode is a mode to which the mode will shift if a big win is won. The opening manner of the variable winning device 82 in the opening and closing execution mode is set so that the door is repeatedly opened for a number of rounds (e.g. 16 rounds), with one round being the passage of a predetermined time (e.g. 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (e.g. 10 prizes).

Here, we will provide additional information about the variable display unit 500. The variable display unit 500 is a pattern display device that variably displays (variably displays) patterns when a winning combination is entered into the actuation ports 83a and 83b, and the display content is controlled by a notification/performance control device and a display control device, which will be described later. In the variable display unit 500, patterns are displayed, for example, lined up on the left, center, and right, and these patterns are variably displayed by scrolling, for example, vertically. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of patterns is displayed stationary on a preset pay line, and the game will transition to the opening and closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot).

The play area forming body 310 is provided with a center frame 95 surrounding the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the play area forming body 310 from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the play area forming body 310, so that the gap dimension between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the play area PE from colliding with the variable display unit 500, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the play area PE is roughly divided into the right route that bypasses the variable display unit 500 (more specifically, the center frame 95) from the right side, and the left route that bypasses it from the left side.

The variable winning device 82 and through gate 84 described above are arranged on the right route, and game balls flowing down the left route are prevented from winning the variable winning device 82 or through gate. On the other hand, game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from winning the upper operating port 83a. Therefore, when the electric device 91 of the lower operating port 83b is in high frequency support mode or open/close execution mode, the game can be advantageously played by firing the game ball to the right route, and when it is in low frequency support mode, the game can be advantageously played by firing the game ball to the left route. In other words, the player can advantageously play the game by selecting the right route or left route as the flow path of the game ball depending on the game situation.

A stage section 96 is formed on the upper surface of the frame section that constitutes the lower part of the center frame 95, allowing game balls to roll left and right. Game balls that flow in from an inlet formed in the left frame section of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage section 96 through a warp passage 97 also formed in the center frame 95. The stage section 96 is configured so that game balls that reach the stage section 96 tend to flow relatively easily into the upper operating port 83a; specifically, so that game balls tend to flow into the upper operating port 83a more easily than game balls that do not pass through the stage section 96, which contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game balls on the stage section 96.

In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered by a transparent opening cover 86, and the game ball that reaches the stage portion 96 is restricted from moving toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 500).

The front of the frame portion that constitutes the lower part of the center frame 95 is provided with a first hold lamp portion 98a and a second hold lamp portion 98b. The first hold lamp portion 98a on the left corresponds to the upper actuation port 83a, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the upper actuation port 83a can be held up to four times, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the upper actuation port 83a can be displayed by lighting the first hold lamp portion 98a. The second hold lamp portion 98b on the right corresponds to the lower actuation port 83b, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the lower actuation port 83b can be held up to four times, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the lower actuation port 83b can be displayed by lighting the second hold lamp portion 98b.

The actuation openings 83a, 83b are positioned closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 500). Since a win at the actuation openings 83a, 83b can trigger a transition to a special game state, it is thought that the player will pay attention to whether or not a win will be made at the actuation openings 83a, 83b, and also to the variable display unit 500 to determine whether or not a transition to a special game state will occur. Providing the actuation openings 83a, 83b closer to the variable display unit 500 is a device to concentrate the player's attention on the area around the variable display unit 500.

A play area partitioning member 99 is disposed at the right end of the play area forming body 310, which defines the play area PE together with the guide rail 100 described below. A stopper member against which game balls flying along the guide rail 100 collide and a main display unit 87 are disposed on the play area partitioning member 99. The stopper member is a buffer member disposed near the tip of the guide rail 100, and game balls that collide with the stopper member have their momentum weakened before flowing down the play area PE. In other words, the stopper member is endowed with a force-reducing function that weakens the momentum of the game balls that collide.

Here, we will provide additional information about the main display unit 87. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the play area partition member 99, and a portion of it is positioned so as to face the glass unit 22. This facing portion is provided with a main display section that displays a predetermined image or the like. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to the main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section is controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit comprises a lower operating port display unit that displays the results of a lottery based on winning at the upper operating port 83a, and a lower operating port display unit that displays the results of a lottery based on winning at the lower operating port 83b. In the lower operating port display unit, a winning at the upper operating port 83a is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the stopping of the changing display is clearly displayed as the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the upper operating port 83a. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the upper operating port 83a is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the changing display is stopped in the lower operating port display unit, a specified pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening/closing execution mode is transitioned to.

In the lower operating port display unit, a winning entry into the lower operating port 83b is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 83b. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 83b is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the display stopping in the lower operating port display unit is stopped, a specified pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the mode is switched to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on a winning entry into either of the actuation ports 83a, 83b, a variable display is started in the corresponding actuation port display section, and one game round is played until the specified stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. However, one game round is not limited to the above, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the variable display is performed in that single display area regardless of whether a winning entry into either of the actuation ports 83a, 83b occurs, it is also possible to start the variable display in that single display area and play one game round until the variable display is stopped with the specified stop result displayed.

In addition to the above two display sections, the main display section of the main display unit 87 also has a through gate display section that displays the lottery results based on winning at the through gate 84. The through gate display section displays the changing patterns triggered by winning at the through gate 84, and as a result of the stopping of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning at the through gate 84 is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning at the through gate 84 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role opening state, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the through gate display section, the changing display is stopped, and then the electric role opening state is entered. In the electric role opening state, the electric role 91 provided in the lower operating port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that a game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is reserved up to four times, and the main display section of the main display unit 87 is provided with a reserved number display section that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display sections described above can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and visibility is guaranteed because the game balls are prevented from moving in front of these various display sections.

Referring again to FIG. 5 to explain the configuration of the inner frame 13, below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided that launches game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies the game ball to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby being integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so that it slopes upward toward the game board unit 80. The launch rail 112 is formed with a groove having a roughly V-shaped cross section, and is configured so that the game ball fits into the groove to determine the front-to-rear position of the game ball.

A ball stopper that stops the game balls supplied from the ball sending device 113 in the above-mentioned launch waiting position is located near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is located further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the game board unit 80, or more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100, together with the play area partitioning member 99 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically, the front surface of the board), partitions the play area PE so that the outer shape of the play area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is partitioned and formed by both rails 101 and 102. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 that opens at the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located at the top of the play area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In addition, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the front side of the exit portion 105 of the game board unit 80, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103, preventing game balls that have already reached the game area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

Each of the rails 101, 102 that make up the guide rail 100 is in the shape of an arc centered at approximately the center of the play area PE. For this reason, a game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, i.e., while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated within the game ball. In other words, when a game ball is launched so as to reach the play area PE, the area of the guide passage 103 along the outer rail 102 essentially constitutes a passing area (passing path) through which the game ball passes, and the area along the inner rail 101 is essentially an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board unit 80. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset left and right near the lower edge of the game board unit 80. This brings the rails 100, 112 closer to the lower edge of the game board unit 80, while forming a predetermined gap between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is disposed below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage is molded integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and returns as a foul ball through the guide passage 103, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage through the above-mentioned gap. The foul ball passage leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This prevents interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

A rail cover 107 is provided on the left end of the play area forming body 310 so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled individually during manufacturing and maintenance work, at which time the outer rail 102 may collide with the game table or the like. The rail cover 107 is a component that is installed in consideration of such circumstances, and is provided with a protective function to prevent the outer rail 102 from being deformed due to the above-mentioned factors, etc.

A through hole is formed in the inner frame base body 50 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member 121 is disposed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 are connected to the game ball distribution section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage 122, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

An opening/closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a forward position that closes the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, this biasing force causes each opening/closing member 124 to be in a closed state, thereby preventing game balls from falling out of each passage 122, 123. In contrast, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage are connected, and further, the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage are connected.

Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 50 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8. Figure 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the pivot base end side (right side in Figure 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 at vertical intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. In addition, a plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

As already explained, a window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the storage recess (game board storage section) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is open to the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 stored in the storage recess 51. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back of the game board unit 80 (back block 80b), and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back of the game board unit 80 will be explained.

As already explained, the rear block 80b is attached to the rear of the game board unit 80. The rear block 80b has a roughly box-shaped base body 251 that is open on the front block 80a side, and the front block 80a and the rear block 80b are integrated by fixing this base body 251 to the rear of the game board unit 80.

The front side of the base body 251 is the area for arranging the movable performance mechanism, etc., and the rear side is the area for arranging the control device that controls these various components and the variable display unit 500.

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes from the rear side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned variable display unit 500 (see FIG. 6) and the notification/performance control device 140 for driving the variable display unit 500 are attached to the protruding part. The variable display unit 500 and the notification/performance control device 140 are stacked in the front-to-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) so that the variable display unit 500 is at the front and the notification/performance control device 140 is at the rear.

The notification/performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification/performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and control of the variable display unit 500 according to instructions from the main control device described below, and the notification/performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/performance control device 140, covering the base body 251 from the rear. The main control device unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the rear block 80b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 has a main control board that has the function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and the function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The substrate box 163 comprises a box base (front case body) of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other by a box sealing section 164 as a sealing means so that they cannot be opened, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of box sealing sections 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

The box sealing section 164 can be of any configuration as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that constitutes the box sealing section 164. The sealing process by the box sealing section 164 prevents unauthorized opening after sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been opened once. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the multiple box sealing sections 164. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the stored main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection part between the box sealing section into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is cut. This separates the box base and box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. If the sealing process is then performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the board box 163 being opened is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily detected by looking at the board box 163.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected by the base seal 165 in an unopenable manner. More specifically, the base seal 165 has a locking hole and a locking pin, just like the box seal 164, and the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected inseparably by inserting the locking pin into the locking hole. This makes it easier to know if the board box 163 has been illegally removed.

In the front part of the base body 251, facing the lower part of the back of the game board unit 80, a recovery passage (not shown) is formed that corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a and 83b and gathers in one place downstream. As a result, all game balls that win the general winning opening 81 etc. are configured to collect below the game board unit 80 via the recovery passage. In other words, the base body 251 is given the function of collecting game balls that win in the various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is provided below the game board unit 80, and game balls that have gathered below the game board unit 80 are led into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The outlet 89 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are led into the discharge passage via the outlet 89.

The base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b is also equipped with detection sensors for each of the ball entry sections described above, including a general entry port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the general entry port 81, and an operating port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the operating ports 83a and 83b, and these various detection sensors form a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and each detection sensor outputs detection information (detection signal) to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to Figures 9 and 10. Figure 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 as the main body of the back pack unit 15, and a dispensing mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage panel and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 9, comprises a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to at least surround the variable display unit 500 (see FIG. 10).

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board. The external terminal board is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side through these output terminals. Also, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13 by inserting the latch pins 214 into the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixed levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by abutting against the base portion 211 from behind with the fixed levers 134 inserted into the insertion portions.

The payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is disposed on the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail 222 that gently slopes toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution section 225 provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution section 225 has the function of distributing the game balls dispensed from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that its inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the above-mentioned main body side upper tray passage 122 and front door side upper tray passage, and its outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and front door side lower tray passage.

The discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end from the front and rear. The discharge passage panel has a discharge passage that is open to the rear on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open part of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are stacked one on top of the other, with the payout control device 242 located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board that controls the payout device 224 is housed in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply/launch control device 243 has a power supply/launch control board housed in a board box 246. The power supply/launch control board generates and outputs the specified power required by various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 that constitutes the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive of the ball sending device 113.

The power supply/launch control device 243 is also provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power supply switch 247, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (ON state) and a cut-off state (OFF state).

The pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing various data, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power returns, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. For example, if the power is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement parlor closes, the state before the power outage is stored and retained. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front of the gaming machine by opening the main machine part 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the back of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the main machine part 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, the various switches are difficult to operate when the main machine part 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone who does not have a key for the locking device 75 (e.g., a fraudster) to operate them from the front of the gaming machine.

(Variable display unit 500)
As already explained, in this embodiment, the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the actuation port unit 83 is notified by the variable display unit 500 mounted on the game board unit 80, and the configuration of this variable display unit 500 is characteristic. Hereinafter, the variable display unit 500 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 11 to 14. Fig. 11(a) is a front view of the variable display unit 500, Fig. 11(b) is a perspective view of the variable display unit 500, Fig. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the variable display unit 500, Fig. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the variable display unit 500, and Fig. 14 is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the variable display unit. Note that Fig. 12 shows some drum units with the light guide section, which will be described later, omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the variable display unit 500 comprises a roughly box-shaped housing 521 that opens to the front of the gaming machine, and multiple (specifically, three) drum units 523 that are housed in the housing 521 and arranged side by side, and the housing 521 is integrated with the playing area forming body 310 by being fixed to the playing area forming body 310 from its rear side. The housing 521 is colored and opaque, and blocks light from outside the housing 521 from irradiating the inside through the flesh of the housing 521.

A portion of the drum unit 523 protrudes forward through an opening 522 in the housing 521. A portion of this protruding portion is visible from the front of the gaming machine through a central opening 85 formed in the gaming board unit (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11(a)). In other words, the central opening 85 functions as a defining portion or window portion that defines the area that is visible on the variable display unit 500.

As shown in FIG. 12, the drum unit 523 has a plate-shaped base body 524 that constitutes the attachment portion to the housing 521, and a rotating body (drum) 525 held by the base body 524. When the base body 524 is fixed to the housing 521, the base body 524 divides the internal area of the housing 521 into three equal parts on the left and right in accordance with each drum unit 523.

The rotating body 525 is mounted on the base body 524 via the motor 526. Specifically, the motor 526 is fixed to the base body 524, and the rotating body 525 is fixed to the output shaft of the motor 526. The output shaft of the motor 526 extends in the direction in which the drum units 523 are arranged side by side (left and right direction), and the rotating body 525 rotates around the axis of the output shaft (rotation center axis CL). The motor 526 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and is configured so that the driving control is performed by the notification/performance control device 140. The motor 526 is a stepping motor, and the rotational position of the rotating body 525 can be adjusted depending on the number of pulses of the output drive signal.

The base body 524 is equipped with a position detection sensor 527 that detects the rotational position of the rotating body 525. The position detection sensor 527 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, which grasps the rotational position of the rotating body 525 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the position detection sensor 527. If a deviation occurs in the rotational position of the rotating body 525 due to the influence of an external force or the occurrence of a malfunction, the rotational position of the rotating body 525 is corrected (corrected) based on the grasped position information.

The rotating body 525 is composed of a circular frame 531 that constitutes the framework of the rotating body 525, and a light guiding section 532 that is approximately cylindrical and has a constant thickness and covers the outer periphery of the frame 531. As shown in FIG. 12, the frame 531 is composed of a hub 535 as the center to which the output shaft of the motor 526 is fixed, an annular rim 536 as the outer periphery to which the light guiding section 532 is fixed, and spokes 537 that connect the hub 535 and the rim 536.

In more detail, the rim 536 has a pair of left and right annular portions 541 centered on the central axis CL of rotation, and a long connecting portion 542 that connects the annular portions 541. The light guide portion 532 is fixed to the connecting portion 542 using a fixing means in a state where it is superimposed on the connecting portion 542 from the outside of the frame 531. The frame 531 shown in this embodiment is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colorless and transparent adhesive is used as the fixing means. This is a device to make the frame 531 and the fixed portion (fixing means) to the frame 531 less noticeable when the light guide portion 532 is viewed with the naked eye.

13, a background display device 529 is disposed inside the light guide unit 532. The background display device 529 has a decorative sheet 581 with a seaside pattern, a backlight 582 located behind the decorative sheet 581 and irradiating light onto the decorative sheet 581, and a holder 583 on which the decorative sheet 581 and the backlight 582 are mounted, and is integrated with the base body 524 by fixing the holder 583 to the base body 524. The decorative sheet 581 is disposed so that the sheet surface with the pattern faces the front of the gaming machine (the central opening 85 side), and faces the inner surface portion 552 of the light guide unit 532 from the inside of the frame 531 across a gap. This makes it possible to view the background depicted on the decorative sheet 581 from the front of the gaming machine through the light guide unit 532. The decorative sheet 581 is opaque and colored, although it is light-transmitting, so that the backlight 582 and other elements located behind it cannot be seen through the decorative sheet 581.

The backlight 582 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and is switched on and off by the notification/performance control device 140. When the backlight 582 is turned on, the light from the backlight 582 passes through the decorative sheet 581, causing the decorative sheet 581 to emit a bright light.

Next, the configuration related to the light emission of the light guide 532 will be described with reference to FIG. 14. The rim 536 of the frame 531 is formed with an abutment portion 543 that abuts against the light guide 532 from the side opposite the base body 524. The abutment portion 543 determines the left and right position of the light guide 532. The end of the light guide 532 on the side opposite the abutment portion 543 (the base body 524 side) extends laterally from the rim 536. The base body 524 is formed with an insertion portion 561 into which this extending portion (end portion) is inserted.

The insertion section 561 is groove-shaped and opens toward the light-guiding section 532, and the end of the light-guiding section 532 is inserted into the insertion section 561 through this open portion (hereinafter referred to as the first opening 564). On the opposite side of the bottom 562 of the insertion section 561 from the light-guiding section 532, a light-emitting board 571 on which multiple light-emitting bodies 572 (more specifically, LEDs) are mounted is disposed. The light-emitting board 571 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the light emission of the light-emitting board 571 is controlled by the notification/performance control device 140.

A plurality of through holes 563 are formed in the bottom 562 of the insertion section 561 to correspond to each light-emitting body 572, and the light-emitting body 572 mounted on the light-emitting substrate 571 faces the end face 554 of the light-guiding section 532 through the through holes 563. The optical axis of each light-emitting body 572 faces the same direction as the rotation center axis CL of the rotating body 525, and light from the light-emitting body 572 is irradiated to the end face 554 of the light-guiding section 532. The base body 524 (including the insertion section 561) is made of a colored opaque synthetic resin material and is provided with a light-absorbing function. This suppresses light leakage from the insertion section 561. In this embodiment, the end face 554 of the light-guiding section 532 is located on a virtual plane perpendicular to the rotation center axis CL, and is configured so that the distance between the light-emitting body 572 and the end face 554 is constant at any rotation position.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 15, the light from the light emitter 572 is repeatedly reflected by the outer surface 551 and the inner surface 552 of the light guide 532, and travels toward the opposite end surface of the light guide 532. Here, the outer surface 551 of the light guide 532 is formed with a light emitting section 553 made of fine irregularities. The light supplied to the light guide 532 is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine when it reaches the light emitting section 553. The light emitting section 553 corresponds to various patterns described below, and is configured to display these patterns on the outer surface 551 of the light guide 532 when the light emitting section 553 emits light. In other words, when the light emitting section 553 does not emit light, the pattern is not displayed. Note that since the light emitting section 553 is formed with fine irregularities, the light emitting section 553, which is normally practically invisible or extremely difficult to see, can be seen by the light emitting section 553, as ambient light such as lighting in a game hall is reflected in the light guide 532. Details will be given later, but the variable display unit 500 shown in this embodiment has been designed to prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

In the present embodiment, the rotating body 525 is constructed by combining a plurality of light guide panels 555-557 arranged in the rotation direction to form a light guide section 532 that is generally cylindrical overall. The specific configuration of the light guide section 532 will be further explained below with reference to FIG. 16.

The light guide panels 555-557 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and are all plate-shaped with a constant thickness and curvature. They also have the same length in the rotation direction of the rotating body 525 and the same width in the direction of the rotation center axis CL, and are formed to have the same appearance except for the light emission section 553 (the displayed pattern). The light guide panels 555-557 are each fixed to the rim 536 (more specifically, the connecting section 542) of the frame 531 using the transparent adhesive, which is the fixing means, but the light guide panels 555-557 are not fixed to each other.

As described above, in a configuration in which one end of the light guide section 532 is inserted into the insertion section 561, it is preferable to bring the inner surface of the insertion section 561 and the light guide section 532 as close as possible to improve the light supply efficiency. However, in this structure, it is necessary to add a certain amount of margin to the gap between the two, taking into consideration that distortion may occur in the light guide panels 555-557 due to manufacturing errors or changes over time. Here, in this embodiment, by not fixing the light guide panels 555-557 to each other, it is possible to avoid distortion that may occur when the light guide panels 555-557 are fixed. This makes it possible to minimize the margin.

When the rotating body 525 is constructed using the light guide section 532, the expressiveness of the variable display unit 500 can be improved, but the weight of the rotating body 525 tends to increase. This is a cause of concern that the responsiveness when rotating/stopping the rotating body 525 may decrease. In this regard, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16(b), overlap in the thickness direction is avoided for the light guide panels 555-557. This prevents an increase in the weight of the light guide section 532 and a decrease in responsiveness.

At the boundary region BP1 between the light guide panels 555-557, the adjacent light guide panels 555-557 face each other with a gap between them. This is a measure to prevent the light guide panels 555-557 from strongly interfering with each other at the boundary region BP1 in the event that the light guide panels 555-557 vary in size due to manufacturing errors or the like. By preventing strong interference between the light guide panels 555-557, it is possible to suppress deformation such as the above-mentioned distortion in the light guide panels 555-557.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the boundary region BP1 is offset in the rotation direction relative to the connecting portion 542 of the frame 531, and both ends of each of the light guide panels 555 to 557 in the rotation direction are unfixed (free ends). This is a measure to separate the adhesive-fixed portions from the boundary region BP1.

Next, referring to FIG. 17, the insertion portion 561 will be described in more detail. The insertion portion 561 extends along the portion of the light-guiding portion 532 that protrudes from the opening 522 toward the front of the gaming machine. The open portions on both the top and bottom of the insertion portion 561 (hereinafter referred to as second openings 565) are expanded so that their width gradually increases toward the ends. This prevents the boundary portion BP1 from getting caught when passing through the second opening 565.

If the second opening 565 is expanded, light leakage from the side light 528 becomes more likely. In response to this, in this embodiment, the second openings 565 are both formed to face backwards, more specifically, facing diagonally backwards. This is a design to make it less likely that light leaking from the second opening 565 will enter the player's eyes.

It is also possible to form the bottom 562 of the insertion portion 561 so that the distance from the light guiding portion 532 increases toward the upper and lower ends of the insertion portion 561. With this configuration, it is possible to more suitably prevent the boundary portion BP1 from getting caught when passing through the insertion portion 561.
(Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 602. The MPU 602 is an element that incorporates a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 602, a RAM 604 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, and the like. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 602, such as the functions of the ROM 603 and the RAM 604, may be configured to be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 602 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, the payout control device 242, and various detection sensors 611a to 611e, etc., which are provided in the main control device 162. In this case, the power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 through the power failure monitoring board 605. In addition, as part of the various detection sensors 611a to 611e, detection sensors provided in various winning-corresponding ball entry parts (payout-corresponding ball entry parts) such as the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, the operating port unit 83 (upper operating port 83a, lower operating port 83b), and the through gate 84 are each connected, and the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 performs a winning judgment (ball entry judgment) for each ball entry part based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors. In addition, the MPU 602 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot based on winning entries in the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, and executes a lottery for generating a support entry based on winning entries in the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, the payout control device 242, and the notification/presentation control device 140. The payout control device 242 outputs a prize ball command based on the winning judgment result for the winning ball entry section such as the above-mentioned operation port 83a, 83b, etc. In this case, when the prize ball command is output, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced. Then, when a winning ball is identified in the general winning port 81, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, when a winning ball is identified in the variable winning device 82, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output, when a winning ball is identified in the upper operation port 83a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output, and when a winning ball is identified in the lower operation port 83b, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

Various commands, such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command, are output from the main control device 162 to the notification and performance control device 140. When outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information, and various information is included as the predetermined number of bytes of information.

Also, connected to the output side of the MPU 602 are a variable winning drive unit 82c that opens and closes the door of the variable winning device 82, an electric role drive unit 91c that opens and closes the electric role 91 of the lower operating port 83b, and a main display unit 87. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 controls the drive of various drive units through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 602 controls the drive of the variable prize drive unit 82c so that the large prize opening is opened and closed. Also, if the support lottery for the electric role device 91 is won, the MPU 602 controls the drive of the electric role device drive unit 91c so that the electric role device 91 is opened and closed. Also, the MPU 602 controls the display of the main display unit 87.

In addition, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602, and information on balls entering various entry areas and lottery results such as jackpots are output to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side through this external output terminal board 213. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply and launch control device 243, and is provided with the function of monitoring the stable DC voltage of 24 V, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 243. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls using the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement facility. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for the main control board 601, the payout control device 242, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a specified power path. The power supply and launch control device 243 is also responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, which is driven when specified launch conditions are met.

The notification/performance control device 140 controls the display lamps 26-28 and speaker 29 on the front door frame 14, and the variable display unit 500 on the game board unit 80, based on various commands input from the main control device 162. In particular, the notification/performance control device 140 has the function of determining the performance mode for each game round, such as an overview of the variable display mode of the patterns on the variable display unit 500 (for example, whether or not a reach has occurred and the contents of the reach performance, etc.) and the stopped display mode of the patterns (the type of pattern combination that will be finally stopped (confirmed) when the variable display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 602 uses various counter information during play to perform a lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, sets the display of the main display unit 87, and sets the pattern display of the variable display unit 500. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 19, the MPU 602 uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used to draw the lottery for determining whether a jackpot occurs, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the type of jackpot, such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a reach random number counter C3 used to draw a reach lottery when a miss variation is performed on the variable display unit 500, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time on the main display unit 87 and the variable display unit 500. In addition, the MPU 602 uses an electric role release counter C4 used to draw a lottery for determining whether the electric role 91 of the lower operating port 83b is in an electric role release state.

Each time counter C1-C3, CINI, CS, C4 is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and it is a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 631 set in a specified area of RAM 604. In lottery counter buffer 631, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in reserved ball storage area 632, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in upper actuation port 83a or lower actuation port 83b.

The reserved ball storage area 632 includes a reserved area RE consisting of an upper actuation port reserved area Ra and a lower actuation port reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb include a first area Ra1 and Rb1, a second area Ra2 and Rb2, a third area Ra3 and Rb3, and a fourth area Ra4 and Rb4. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 is stored as reserved information in one of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 and Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning history of the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b, the first area Ra1, Rb1 to the fourth area Ra4, Rb4 store the numerical information in chronological order in the order of the first area Ra1, Rb1 → the second area Ra2, Rb2 → the third area Ra3, Rb3 → the fourth area Ra4, Rb4. By providing four areas Ra1 to Ra4 and Rb1 to Rb4, respectively, up to four winning balls at the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 632 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and information for specifying the number of winning balls at the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b that are reserved and stored is stored in the total reserved number storage area.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the main display unit 87 begins, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

For more details on each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 299, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 299). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot win is stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 621, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in the ROM 603. The contents of the win/loss table will now be explained.

In the win/lose table, address information consisting of binary information and jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, ten types of address information are set, expressed in decimal, from "1" to "10", and ten types of jackpot numerical information are set, expressed in decimal, from "7", "36", "67", "100", "131", "164", "195", "223", "241", and "272", and these address information and jackpot numerical information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. The value of each jackpot numerical information is included in the numerical range of random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1, from "0" to "299".

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the winning/losing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high probability mode, with the former being less than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only jackpot numerical information with address information "1" is referenced when the winning/losing lottery is performed, and in the high probability mode, jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced when the winning/losing lottery is performed. In other words, in the low probability mode, there is one numerical information that will result in a winning jackpot, and in the high probability mode, there are 10 numerical information, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/300, while the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the low probability mode. Note that as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that will result in a winning jackpot are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when a game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b.

In this pachinko machine 10, multiple types of jackpot results are set by providing differences in two conditions: (1) the win/lose selection mode in the win/lose selection means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) the support mode in the electric role 91 of the lower operating port 83b after the opening/closing execution mode ends. As described above, the win/lose selection mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode.

The support modes are set to a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency with which the electric device 91 of the lower operating port 83b opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously released in a similar manner into the game area PE.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5), but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role 91 is in the open state when the electric role opening state is won is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is set to be longer. In this case, when the electric role opening state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role 91 is in the open state multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a shorter time is selected as the time secured between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the lower actuation port 83b is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the upper actuation port 83a is higher than in the lower actuation port 83b, but in the high frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the lower actuation port 83b is higher than in the upper actuation port 83a. And when a winning entry into the lower actuation port 83b occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the electric role opening state per unit time in the high-frequency support mode compared to the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, a configuration for increasing the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery. In addition, in a configuration in which multiple types of secured time (for example, the time of variable display executed in the role result display unit based on winning the through gate 84) are prepared for the time secured between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery, the high-frequency support mode may be set so that a shorter secured time is more likely to be selected or the average secured time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one or any combination of conditions from increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening time, shortening the secured time secured between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery (i.e., shortening the time of one variable display in the role result display unit), shortening the average time of the secured time, and increasing the probability of winning.

The allocation destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in an allocation table storage area serving as an allocation information group storage means in ROM 603. The allocation destination is set to a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and a special jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result).

A normal jackpot result is one in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes a low probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode until the number of plays reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 plays). After the end reference number has elapsed, the mode switches to a low frequency support mode.

The probability of a jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode. This high frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the win/lose lottery becomes a jackpot state and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode.

In the distribution table, "0-19" corresponds to a normal jackpot result, and "20-29" corresponds to a special jackpot result, but this distribution of numbers is arbitrary. In addition, the distribution of jackpot results is not limited to the above two types. For example, multiple modes can be set in the open/close execution mode so that the expected value of winning game balls is high and low, and the types of jackpot results can be increased beyond the above two types by setting differences in the modes to which the open/close execution mode transitions.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area RE of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b. Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603. However, in a game round that transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 602 determines whether or not to generate a reach, regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Note that the number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to each game state. For example, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display may be set to be greater when the support mode is a high-frequency support mode than when it is a low-frequency support mode.

Here, the term "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state that makes a player believe that the game machine is in a variable display state that is likely to result in a special display result after the variable display has started and before the variable display of the patterns (pictures) on the variable display unit 500 is derived and displayed, in a gaming machine that has a variable display unit 500 that is capable of performing a variable display (or a variable display) of patterns (pictures) and in which the stopped display result after the variable display is a special display result during a game round in which the opening and closing execution mode is activated.

In other words, it is a display state in which some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the variable display unit 500 are stopped to display a combination of reach patterns that may result in a jackpot pattern combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, and in this state, the remaining pattern rows are displayed with varying patterns.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to terminating the display of changing patterns, a reach line is formed by displaying a combination of reach patterns that may result in a jackpot combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode on a preset effective line, and the display of changing patterns is performed using the final stopped pattern sequence while the reach line is formed.

Now, with reference to FIG. 20, the configuration related to the variable display of the patterns for each game round and an overview of the variable display will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the overview of the display in the variable display unit 500. Note that in the following explanation, the configuration related to the left drum is distinguished appropriately by adding "L" to the end of the identification code, the configuration related to the middle drum is distinguished by adding "M" to the end of the identification code, and the configuration related to the right drum is distinguished appropriately by adding "R" to the end of the identification code.

The variable display unit 500 has three pattern rows, left, center, and right, and a left variable display area DL, a center variable display area DM, and a right variable display area DR are provided corresponding to each of these pattern rows. In the variable display unit 500, the patterns in each pattern row are displayed as if scrolling in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity. In each of the variable display areas DL, DM, and DR, three patterns are displayed in a static manner for each pattern row, resulting in a total of nine patterns being displayed in a static manner (3 x 3).

As shown in (a) to (j) of FIG. 21, the above-mentioned symbols are composed of nine main symbols, which are the numbers "1" to "9," and secondary symbols, which are pictures that resemble seashells. The main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "high probability symbols," and when these high probability symbols line up, the player enters a special gaming state, which is a jackpot state, and then transitions to a high probability state. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "low probability symbols," and when these low probability symbols line up, the player transitions to a jackpot state, but in such cases the player does not transition to a high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 22 (a schematic diagram showing the light guide section 532 of each drum in plan view), the left and center pattern rows have nine main patterns arranged in descending order with sub-patterns in between. In contrast, the right pattern row has nine main patterns arranged in ascending order with sub-patterns in between. For ease of explanation, FIG. 22 shows the light emitter 553 provided on the light guide section 532 emitting light.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 20, the variable display unit 500 has five active lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the left upward line L4, and the right upward line L5. During each game, the display of the varying patterns is stopped in the order of the left pattern row → the right pattern row → the middle pattern row, and when the display of the varying patterns of all the pattern rows ends with a predetermined combination of patterns (for example, a combination of patterns with the same number) formed on any of the active lines L1 to L5, a jackpot video is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a special jackpot result.

When the above-mentioned reach display is performed, first the display of the changing patterns is terminated in the left changing display area DL, and then in the state where the display of the changing patterns is terminated in the right changing display area DR, a reach line is formed by displaying a pattern with the same number attached to at least one of the active lines L1 to L5 as stopped, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the display of the changing patterns is performed in the middle changing display area DM, resulting in the reach display. Then, when the open/close execution mode occurs, the same pattern as the pattern forming the reach line is displayed as stopped on the reach line, and the display of the changing patterns in the middle pattern row is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19, the variation type counter CS is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 602 to determine the variation display time in the main display unit 87 and the variation display time of the pattern in the variable display unit 500. The variation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is then acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the pattern variation by the variable display unit 500.

The electric role release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 249, and to return to 0 after it reaches the maximum value (i.e., 249). The electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric role reserve area 633 of the RAM 604 when the game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric role 91 should be controlled to an open state based on the stored value of the electric role release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric role 91 is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric role 91 is not controlled to an open state.

As already explained, the MPU 602 uses at least the buffer value of the variable type counter CS to determine the variable display time on the variable display unit 500, and in this determination, the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is used. In addition, the MPU 602 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop result on the main display unit 87, and in this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 624 of the ROM 603 is referenced.

Here, referring to the schematic diagram of FIG. 23, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the symbol display in the variable display unit 500. As already explained, the rotating body 525 shown in this embodiment has a light guide section 532, and symbols are displayed by supplying light from the side light 528 to the light guide section 532. The light guide section 532 is transparent, and the background display device 529 can be seen through the light guide section 532. Therefore, when the variable display unit 500 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the symbols appear to be floating in front of the background. In particular, in this embodiment, the background display device and the outer surface section 551, which is the display surface of the light guide section 532, are separated, and the separation between the symbols and the background is emphasized.

Next, the relationship between the light emitters 572 constituting the side light 528 and the pattern display position will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of Figure 24. In this embodiment, the light emitters 572 are arranged in a line along the end of the light guide section 532 (see Figure 17). These light emitters 572 are roughly divided into upper-level light emitters 572a that supply light to the light emitters 553 located on the effective line L1 (upper level) among the light emitters 553 formed in the light guide 532, middle-level light emitters 572b that supply light to the light emitters located on the effective line L2 (middle level), lower-level light emitters 572c that supply light to the light emitters located on the effective line L3 (lower level), upper-level light emitters 572d in the central opening 85 arranged above the upper-level light emitters 572a, intermediate light emitters 572e arranged between the upper-level light emitters 572a and the middle-level light emitters 572b, intermediate light emitters 572f arranged between the middle-level light emitters 572b and the lower-level light emitters 572c, and lower-level light emitters 572g in the central opening 85 arranged below the lower-level light emitters 572c.

When the light-emitting element 572a for the upper row is lit, light is emitted from the light-emitting portion 553 located in the upper row, and the pattern appears (is displayed) in the upper row. When the light-emitting element 572b for the middle row is lit, light is emitted from the light-emitting portion 553 located in the middle row, and the pattern appears (is displayed) in the middle row. When the light-emitting element 572c for the lower row is lit, light is emitted from the light-emitting portion 553 located in the lower row, and the pattern appears (is displayed) in the lower row.

In this embodiment, the rotation of the rotating body 525 may cause the light emitting unit 553 to move across the light supply range for the upper row and the light supply range for the middle row. These light supply ranges are connected via the light supply range of the middle light emitter 572e. The supply of light from the middle light emitter 572e prevents the pattern from becoming difficult to see when moving from the upper row to the middle row. Also, the rotation of the rotating body 525 may cause the light emitting unit 553 to move across the light supply range for the middle row and the light supply range for the lower row. These light supply ranges are connected via the light supply range of the middle light emitter 572f. The supply of light from the middle light emitter 572f prevents the pattern from becoming difficult to see when moving from the middle row to the lower row.

When the light emitting unit 553 moves from outside the central opening 85 onto the valid line L1, the light emitting unit 553 passes through the range of light supplied from the upper limit light emitter 572d, so that the display of the pattern begins before the valid line L1 is reached. When the light emitting unit 553 moves from on the valid line L3 to outside the central opening 85, the light emitting unit 553 passes through the range of light supplied from the lower limit light emitter 572g, so that the display of the pattern continues even after it moves off the valid line L3.

(Various processes executed by the main control device 162)
Next, a description will be given of the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 to progress the game in each game round. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of these various types of processing will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 25. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, a process of reading the various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of the various winning detection sensors connected to the main control unit 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the next step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric device release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric device release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 604.

In the next step S104, a winning process for through is executed in response to a win at the through gate 84. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If the flag is stored, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric role holding area, provided that the number of reserved roles stored in the electric role holding area is less than 4. In addition, a process is executed for the notification/performance control device 140 to light the reserved lamp unit 98 corresponding to the reserved number. Then, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, where the winning process for the actuation port associated with the winning at actuation port 83a, 83b is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

(Winning process for the operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 26 and 27.

In step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a (a prize). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls.

In the next step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a gaming ball has entered the upper operating port 83a to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the upper operating port 83a. After that, in step S204, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, etc., and this winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether the game ball has entered (won) the lower operating port 83b. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b, the process proceeds to step S206, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S206 is sent to the payout control device 242 in the external output process (S701) of the normal process described below.

In the next step S207, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b to the hall computer HC in the game hall. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. After that, in step S204, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in both steps S201 and S205, i.e., if no ball has entered either the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b, the winning process ends.

Now, with reference to Figure 27, we will explain the information acquisition process of step S204.

(Information Acquisition Processing)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether the start pending memory number N stored in the reserved number storage area FE of the reserved ball storage area 632, specifically, the start pending memory number N related to the ball entry part that triggered the information acquisition process among the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, is less than the upper limit (in this embodiment, "4"). If the start pending memory number N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step S302, the start pending memory number N of the corresponding ball entry part is incremented by 1, and in step S303, the total reserved number stored in the reserved number storage area FE (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in the above step S103 are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area RE, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the common reserve number CRN incremented by 1 in the above step S302.

In the next step S305, a hold command setting process is executed to make the notification/performance control device 140, which is the sub-side (auxiliary) control device, recognize that a win has occurred in the activation ports 83a and 83b, and then this information acquisition process ends. The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S305 is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described below.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 28. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as a regular processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output processing in step S401, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 242. In addition, if various commands such as performance commands such as a fluctuation command, type command, and fluctuation end command, hold command, and shift time commands described below are set, they are sent to the notification/performance control device 140.

Next, in step S402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the next step S403, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. This game round control process performs a jackpot determination, sets the variable display of the patterns by the variable display unit 500, and controls the display of the operating port display section of the main display unit 87.

After executing the game play control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, where the game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like.

In the next step S405, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the electric role 91 provided in the operating port unit 83. In this electric role support process, an electric role opening lottery is executed to determine whether or not the electric role 91 is opened using numerical information acquired from the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area 633 of the RAM 604, and if the electric role opening lottery is selected, the opening and closing process of the electric role 91 is executed. In addition, display control of the through gate display unit is performed to inform the result of the electric role opening lottery.

As already explained, the support provided by the electric device 91 can be set to a low-frequency support mode or a high-frequency support mode, and a transition to one of these support modes is made during game state transition processing. If a high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 after this processing, the mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and if the flag is not set, the mode becomes the low-frequency support mode.

In the electric role support process, whether or not the high frequency support mode is selected is determined by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Then, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role device 91 is opened when the electric role open state is selected is set to be greater than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer than in the low frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is selected and the electric role device 91 is opened multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening.

Incidentally, when switching to the opening/closing execution mode, even if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the support mode is forcibly set to the low-frequency support mode.

After that, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply/launch control device 243. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

In the next step S407, it is determined whether the next timing for executing normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, during the remaining time until the next timing for executing normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 604. Also, in step S409, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 604.

The execution time of each process in steps S401 to S406 changes depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time until the timing of the next normal process execution is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

(Game play control process)
Next, the game play control process in step S501 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 29 and FIG.

First, in the game round control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is in the open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S502 onwards, i.e., the game round start process in steps S503 to S505 and the game round progress process in steps S506 to S508.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, it is determined whether the operating port display section of the main display unit 87 is displaying a change. If the operating port display section is not displaying a change, the process proceeds to steps S503 to S505 for processing to start a game round. In the process to start a game round, first in step S503, it is determined whether the total number of start reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". If the common reserved number CRN is "0", this means that no reserved information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632. Therefore, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step S504, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 632 for variable display, and in step S505, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display in the main display unit 87 and the variable display in the variable display unit 500, and then this game round control process is terminated.

Here, we will explain in detail the data setting process in step S504 and the change start process in step S505.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, the start reservation memory number N stored in the reservation number storage area FE that is the target of the current setting process and the common reservation number CRN are decremented by 1. Next, if the target of the current setting process is based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, a process is executed to shift the data (i.e., reservation information) stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 of the reservation area RE. This data shift process is a process to shift the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 to the lower area side in order, and the data in the first area Ra1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted from the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra3.

If the current setting process is based on a ball entering the lower operating port 83b, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the reserved area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, a process is executed to shift the data (i.e., reserved information) stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 of the reserved area RE. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area in order, clearing the data in the first area Rb1, and shifting the data in each area from the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb3.

Next, a shift command is set, which is information for making the notification/performance control device 140 aware that a shift in the data in the reserved area has occurred. After that, this data setting process ends. The set shift command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 28). By receiving the shift command, the notification/performance control device 140 becomes aware that a shift in the reserved information has occurred.

(Change start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S601, a win/loss determination process is executed to determine whether or not the reserved information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, the information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information obtained from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1, is grasped. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot win, and if the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified information is included in the information corresponding to a jackpot win.

In the next step S602, it is determined whether the result of the win/lose determination process in step S601 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the result corresponds to a jackpot win, the type determination process is executed in step S603.

In the type determination process, the type determination information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information obtained from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2, is identified. In addition, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information corresponding to the guaranteed jackpot result. In more detail, if the reserved information corresponds to a ball entering the upper operating port 83a, the distribution table for the upper operating port 83a is referenced, and if the reserved information corresponds to a ball entering the lower operating port 83b, the distribution table for the lower operating port 83b is referenced to determine the type.

In the following step S604, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot win is a guaranteed jackpot result based on the information identified in the type determination process in step S603. If it is a guaranteed jackpot result, the process for setting the stop result for a guaranteed jackpot is executed in step S605, and if it is not a guaranteed jackpot result, the process for setting the stop result for a normal jackpot is executed in step S606. Also, if it is determined in step S602 that the jackpot win is not a win, the process for setting the stop result for a miss is executed in step S607.

In each stop result setting process from step S605 to step S607, information on the type of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87 is identified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604. Also, in steps S605 and S606, information for the MPU 602 to identify whether the win/loss determination result of the current game round is a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of RAM 604. Specifically, in step S605, a special jackpot flag is stored, and in step S606, a normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any one of the processes in steps S605 to S607, in step S608, a process for setting the variable display time is executed. In the process for setting the variable display time, first, it is determined whether or not the winning/losing lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either a sure-variable jackpot flag or a normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If the winning/losing lottery results in a losing result, it is determined whether or not a reach display will occur in the variable display unit 500W in this game round. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach display has occurred. When determining whether or not a reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 603 is referenced.

If the result is a jackpot or if the result is a miss but corresponds to a reach occurrence, the variable display time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, etc., and this variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter area 634 of the RAM 604. After that, this setting process is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot win, or when the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss and the lottery for reaching the reach is won.

Details will be given later, but the reach display is divided into a normal reach display and a super reach display, which have different variable display modes. Variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set in the reach occurrence variable display time table, and variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is obtained by referencing this table. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variable type counter CS, and the reach display corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is determined by referencing this table.

On the other hand, if the result is not a big win but a miss and does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 is referenced to obtain the variable display time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. After that, this setting process is terminated.

The variable display time information when a reach does not occur is set so that the more the number of common reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so that it is not dependent on the number of common reserved numbers CRN, and the less the number of common reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time. In addition, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is set so that a shorter variable display time is selected in a situation where the support mode is a high-frequency support mode than in a situation where the number of reserved information is the same, compared with a situation where the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, but this is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when a reach occurs, and a configuration may be used in which the variable display time that is likely to be selected and the variable display time that is unlikely to be selected are different between a jackpot win and a miss reach. In addition, a configuration may be used in which the variable display time table for a sure-variable jackpot, the variable display time table for a normal jackpot, the variable display time table for a miss reach, and the variable display time table for a complete miss are each set individually.

As described above, the variable display time for each game is determined using parameters such as whether or not a reach has occurred, the type of reach display, the number of pending information items, and the value of the variable type counter. However, the variable display time for each game is determined without using the contents of other pending information items, specifically, the information for determining a jackpot, the information for determining the type, and the information for determining a reach included in other pending information, as parameters.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process, after the process of setting the fluctuation display time is executed in step S608, a fluctuation command and a type command are set in step S609. The fluctuation command includes information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the game result. In other words, the type command includes information on the game result such as information on the special jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, and information on the miss result.

The variation command and type command set in step S609 are sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal processing (FIG. 28). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 for that game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls the display lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The notification/performance control device 140 also determines the variation display pattern in the variable display unit 500 for that game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls the variable display unit 500 so that the determined variation display pattern is executed. Thereafter, in step S610, the variable display of the image is started in the operating port display unit of the main display unit 87, and then this variation start processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 29), if the main display unit 87 is displaying a variable, the game round progression process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game round progression process, first in step S506, it is determined whether the variable display time for the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of RAM 604 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process, as described above. In addition, the value of this set variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, the game play control process is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, a variable end process is executed in step S508. In the variable end process, the information stored in the RAM 604 in any of the processes in steps S505 to S507 is identified, and the main display unit 87 is controlled so that the image corresponding to that information is displayed stationary on the main display unit 87.

In the next step S509, a variation end command is set. After that, this game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S509 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (Figure 28). Upon receiving the variation end command, the notification/presentation control device 140 displays the final stop pattern combination for that game round as a confirmed display (final stop display).

As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern in the variable display unit 500 is identified by the notification/performance control device 140 with reference to commands from the main control device 162, and the details of the variable display mode are determined by the notification/performance control device 140 based on the identification results. Specifically, the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 executes a variable display control process as part of periodic processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and this variable display control process identifies the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern, etc. Here, the variable display control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 31.

(Variable display control process)
In the variable display control process, first in step S701, it is determined whether or not a game round is in progress, i.e., whether or not the variable display of the patterns for one game round is being executed on the variable display unit 500. If it is determined that a game round is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S702, where it is determined whether or not a variable command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S702, the variable display control process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S702, a process for starting the variable display is executed in step S703, and then the variable display control process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S701, if a positive judgment is made in step S701, i.e., if it is judged that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, it is judged whether or not a fluctuation end command sent from the main control device 162 has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step S704, the fluctuation in progress processing is executed in step S705, and then this fluctuation display control processing is terminated. The fluctuation in progress processing is a process for executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game round started by the fluctuation start processing.

If a positive judgment is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S706, where a process for ending the variation is executed, and then this variable display control process is terminated. In the process for ending the variation, the variable display of the patterns and the currently executed presentation are terminated (determined and stopped) in accordance with the lottery result for that game round. Specifically, the variable display unit 500 is controlled to definitively stop the patterns. In this process, the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to perform the presentation corresponding to the definitive stop. Thereafter, this variable display process is terminated.

(Processing for starting fluctuations)
Here, a supplementary explanation will be given on the process for starting the fluctuation in step S703 with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 32. The process for starting the fluctuation is a process for starting the presentation for a game round based on the reception of a command for the fluctuation transmitted from the main control device 162. In the process for starting the fluctuation, the variable display mode such as a reach display and the symbol combination to be displayed as a finalized display are determined as the presentation for a game round.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S801, the currently received fluctuation command is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent together. In step S1201, the type command received together with the currently received fluctuation command is read, and information on the game result, such as information on the guaranteed jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, or information on the miss result, is identified from the command. Then, in step S2101, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type if a jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won, and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the identified information, and the identified information is stored in a register of the MPU 652.

In the next step S802, based on the information obtained in step S801, it is determined whether the game result of the game to be started this time corresponds to a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in the next step S803, a process for setting the effects for a jackpot is executed.

The jackpot performance setting process determines the stopping result of the jackpot symbols (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, if the result is a special jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be the stopping result for the current game round, where the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols marked with odd numbers) is formed on one active line L1 to L5. Also, if the result is a normal jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be the stopping result for the current game round, where the combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols marked with even numbers) is formed on one active line L1 to L5.

The type of main pattern and the effective lines L1-L5 that are stopped and displayed when a jackpot result occurs are determined randomly by lottery or the like. The final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 store each of the effective lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. At this time, a process is also executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. Note that in the following explanation, address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 654.

In addition, in the performance setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the big win pattern is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, in the case of a big win result, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process for the reach display, the variable display pattern table for the reach display stored in the various table areas of the ROM 653 is obtained, and the performance pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654. Note that in the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 653 to determine the performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654.

If it is determined in step S802 that the result is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, it is determined whether or not a reach will occur in the current game round. If a reach will occur, the process proceeds to step S805, where a process for setting the effect for the reach occurrence is executed. In the process for setting the effect for the reach occurrence, the outline of the effect and the final combination of symbols to be stopped are determined. The former is similar to the process in step S803 above, so the explanation will be used here. Since this process corresponds to a miss reach, the stop symbols are determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to a jackpot result. In other words, the stop result in which a combination of miss reach symbols is established on one of the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the type of combination of miss reach symbols and the active lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when making this determination, the stop results on the effective lines are determined so that the same combination of symbols is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbols in the middle symbol row that are the same as the symbols that form the reach line are finally stopped at a stop position that is shifted forward or backward from the reach line. After that, a process is executed to store the information on the determined stop results in the stop result address storage area.

If it is determined in step S804 that a reach has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, the outline of the normal miss effect and the final symbol combination to be stopped are determined. Since this process corresponds to a complete miss, the symbols to be stopped are determined in such a way that a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any one of the processes in step S803, step S805, or step S806, the process proceeds to step S807. In step S807, display control (variable display control) of the variable display unit 500 is performed to execute the performance for the current game round. This causes each drum unit 523 to start rotating. In addition, drive control of the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 is started based on the performance pattern determined in the above steps S803, S805, or S806, and the performance for the game round begins.

The following provides additional information on the variable display mode of the symbols in the variable display unit 500, with reference to Figures 33 to 35. Figure 33 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and the probability of winning, Figure 34 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a normal reach that does not support special changes, as described below, and Figure 35 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a normal reach that supports special changes, as described below.

As shown in FIG. 33, the pattern change display mode in this embodiment is broadly divided into three types: complete miss, normal reach, and super reach. For normal reach and super reach, the pattern change display mode until transitioning to reach display is the same, and at least until transitioning to reach display, it is not clear whether the pattern change display mode will transition from the previous one to normal reach or super reach.

When comparing normal reach and super reach, there is a difference in the scrolling speed of the middle symbol after the transition to the reach display. In more detail, in the case of normal reach, the scrolling speed of the middle symbol is set to be slower than in the case of super reach. Compared to normal reach, super reach has a higher chance of resulting in a jackpot and transitioning to a special game state. For this reason, it is expected that players hoping to transition to a special game state will pay attention to the changing display of the symbols in the hope of transitioning to super reach.

(Normal reach without special modifications)
Fig. 34 shows an example of the flow of a normal reach corresponding to a miss result. As shown in Fig. 34(a), when a game round is started based on the ball entering the operation port 83a, 83b, the variable display of the pattern is started in each variable display area DL, DM, DR, more specifically, the scroll display that traverses each variable display area DL, DM, DR from the top to the bottom is started.

After that, the left and right symbols are displayed in that order, and in the example shown in FIG. 34(b), two reach lines are formed by the "7" symbol displayed stopped on the pay line L4 and the "6" symbol displayed stopped on the pay line L5.

At a predetermined timing immediately after the reach line is formed, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the scroll speed of the middle pattern row becomes the first constant speed (low speed), and accordingly, other patterns that do not form the reach line in the left and right pattern rows are hidden. Specifically, the light-emitting element 572bL for the middle row of the left variable display area DL and the light-emitting element 572bR for the middle row of the right variable display area DR are turned off, and the sub-pattern displayed in the middle row is hidden.

In the variable display unit 500 shown in this embodiment, the light guide 532 and the side light 528 are used together to display the pattern, and the pattern is hidden by stopping the supply of light from the side light 528. It is not impossible to distinguish the pattern of the light emitting part 553 formed in the light guide 532 if one looks closely, but it becomes difficult to distinguish the pattern when other patterns are emitting light in the vicinity.

After that, as shown in Figure 34 (d) → Figure 34 (e), the scrolling display of the row of middle symbols continues in the middle variable display area DM, and finally the "4" symbol is displayed stationary in the middle row of the middle variable display area DM, clearly indicating to the player that it is a losing result.

In this embodiment, in some game times related to normal reach and super reach, the row of middle symbols may stop and then change and be displayed again, and the middle symbols may be replaced (hereinafter referred to as special change). When such a special change occurs, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in both normal reach and super reach. Here, the flow of the special change will be explained with reference to Figure 35.

(Normal reach with special modifications)
When a game is started based on the ball entering the operation port 83a, 83b, the variable display of the symbols in each variable display area DL, DM, DR, more specifically, the scroll display that vertically crosses each variable display area DL, DM, DR from the top to the bottom, is started. After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol row → the right symbol row, and in the example shown in Figure 35 (a), one reach line is formed by the "7" symbol stopped and displayed on the pay line L2.

At a predetermined timing immediately after the reach line is formed, as shown in FIG. 35(b), the scroll speed of the middle pattern row becomes the first constant speed (low speed), and accordingly, other patterns that do not form reach lines in the left and right pattern rows are hidden. Specifically, the upper row light-emitting element 572aL and the lower row light-emitting element 572cL of the left variable display area DL, and the upper row light-emitting element 572aR and the lower row light-emitting element 572cR of the right variable display area DR are turned off, and the sub-patterns displayed in the upper and middle rows are hidden.

After that, the middle symbol row continues to scroll as shown in FIG. 35(c), and symbols other than the "7" symbol are temporarily displayed on the pay line L2 as shown in FIG. 35(d). When a predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the middle symbol row was temporarily displayed, the middle symbol row becomes hidden as shown in FIG. 35(e). Specifically, the middle symbol row becomes hidden when all the light-emitting elements 572 for the middle variable display area DM are turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35(f), when the middle symbol row is displayed again, the symbol on the pay line L2 is replaced with the "8" symbol from the sub-symbol, and it is clearly indicated that the game round was a losing result. After that, as the fixed display period passes, the other symbols that were not displayed are also displayed again, and a total of nine symbols (3 x 3) are displayed.

Here, we will explain the variable display processing in the variable display control processing (Figure 31) with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 36 to 38.

(Processing during fluctuation)
As shown in FIG. 36, in the variable period processing, in step S901, a determination is made as to whether the side light 528 and the backlight 582 should be switched on or off, and in the following step S902, a light emission restriction process is performed to determine targets for which light emission is to be forcibly restricted, and in step S903, light emission control of the side light 528 and the backlight 582 and drive control of the motor 526 are performed based on the settings made in steps S901 and S902.

(Light emission and drive setting processing)
As shown in Fig. 37, in the light emission and drive setting process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a special variable display transition flag is stored in the various flag storage area of the RAM 654. This special variable display transition flag is a flag that is stored when the above-mentioned special change of the pattern is performed and is erased when the corresponding game round is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1001, the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not a reach display transition flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of RAM 654. The reach display transition flag is a flag that is stored when the reach display is parallel, and is erased when the transition to the special change described above occurs or when the corresponding game round ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003.

In step S1003, it is determined whether it is time to stop the left row of symbols in the left variable display area DL. If a positive determination is made in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1004, where processing for stopping the left drum (rotating body 525L) is executed. Specifically, a flag is set to stop the output of the drive signal to the motor 526L for the left drum. In the light emission and drive control processing in step S903 above, based on this flag and the stop symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation, stop control is performed so that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the left variable display area DL.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, it is judged whether or not it is time to stop displaying the right row of patterns in the right variable display area DR. If a negative judgment is made in step S1005, the light emission and drive control process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006, where processing for stopping the right drum (rotating body 525R) is executed. Specifically, a flag is set to stop the output of the drive signal to the motor 526R for the right drum. In the light emission and drive control processing in step S903 above, based on this flag and the stop pattern determined at the start of the change, stop control is performed so that the pattern is displayed stopped in the right change display area DR.

After executing the stop process in step S1006, the process proceeds to step S1007, where it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a reach display. If a negative determination is made in step S1007, the process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, a process for turning off some of the side lights is executed. In this process, a flag is set for turning off some of the light emitters 572 for the side light 528L on the left drum and the side light 528R on the right drum so that symbols that do not form a reach line are not displayed. In the light emission and drive control process in step S903, light emission control is performed to turn off some of the light emitters 572 based on this flag and the stop position (effective line) of the symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation.

In the next step S1009, processing is performed to turn on the backlight 582 of the background display device 529. Specifically, a flag for turning on the backlight 582 is set. In the light emission and drive control processing in the above step S903, light emission control is performed based on this flag to turn on the backlight 582.

In this embodiment, the background is lit up when the display transitions to the reach display, suggesting the possibility of a big win. Details will be described later, but by turning on the backlight 582, the light emission part 553 corresponding to the hidden pattern is made less noticeable.

Then, in step S1010, the reach display transition flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 654, and the main light emission and drive setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1002, if a positive judgment is made in step S1002, i.e., if the reach display transition flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1101, it is determined whether it is time to transition to the special variable display. In other words, it is determined whether it is time to execute a special change as shown in FIG. 35. If a negative judgment is made in step S1011, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether it is time to change the variable display speed (scroll speed) of the middle pattern row. If a negative judgment is made in step S1012, the main light emission/drive setting process ends as it is. If a positive judgment is made in step S1021, the variable display speed change process is executed in step S1013, and then the main light emission/drive setting process ends.

In the variable display speed change process, a flag is set to change the variable display speed of the middle symbol. In the light emission and drive control process in step S903, the drive control of the middle drum motor 526 is performed based on this flag so that the variable display speed of the middle symbol row becomes a predetermined speed. Specifically, if the current reach display is a normal reach, the rotation speed of the rotor 525M is controlled so that the variable display speed of the middle symbol row becomes a first predetermined speed (low speed), and if it is a super reach, the rotation speed of the rotor 525M is controlled so that the variable display speed becomes a second predetermined speed (high speed).

Returning to the explanation of step S1011, if a positive judgment is made in step S1011, that is, if it is time to transition to the special variation display, the process proceeds to step S1014. In step S1014, a process for temporarily stopping the middle drum (rotating body 525M) is executed. Specifically, a flag for temporarily stopping the middle drum is set. In the light emission and drive control process in step S903, the output of the drive signal to the motor 526M for the middle drum is stopped based on this flag. As a result, the three patterns set at the start of the variation are displayed frozen in the middle variation display area DM. Note that the middle pattern that is temporarily stopped on the reach line at this point is set to be a pattern combination that corresponds to the pattern combination on the reach line that results in a miss.

Then, in step S1015, the reach display transition flag stored in the various flag storage areas of RAM 654 is erased, and in step S1016, the special variable display transition flag is set in the various flag storage areas of RAM 654, after which the light emission and drive setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if a positive judgment is made in step S1001, i.e., if the special variable display transition flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of RAM 654, the special variable display process is executed in step S1016, and then the light emission and drive setting process is terminated. Below, the special variable display process is explained with reference to FIG. 38.

(Special fluctuation display processing)
In the special variation display process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the special change, i.e., the replacement display of the symbols. If the determination in step S1101 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1102.

In step S1102, processing is performed to turn off the side light for the middle drum. Specifically, a flag for turning off the side light is set. In the light emission and drive control processing in step S903, processing is performed to turn off the side light for the middle drum based on this flag. As a result, each pattern that makes up the middle pattern row is hidden, and each pattern that was temporarily displayed in the middle variable display area DM is hidden.

In the next step S1103, processing for driving the middle drum is executed. Specifically, a flag for re-driving the middle drum is set. In the light emission and drive control processing in step S903, the middle drum is rotated based on this flag. In other words, the middle drum rotates in a situation where no light is being supplied from the side light 528M. The middle drum rotates so that the light emission section 553 corresponding to the symbol (final stopping symbol) that constitutes the symbol combination (final stopping symbol combination) corresponding to the current game result is positioned on the reach line.

The direction of rotation of the middle drum during a special change is determined based on two conditions: (1) the number of times the border part BP1 passes through the middle variable display area DM is minimized, and (2) the amount of rotation is minimized. For example, if one border part BP1 passes through the middle variable display area DM when the middle drum is rotated in the forward direction, and two border parts BP1 pass through the middle variable display area DM when the middle drum is rotated in the reverse direction, the forward direction is set as the rotation direction. Regarding each of these conditions (1) to (2), (1) takes precedence over (2), and by having the border part BP1 move through the middle variable display area DM when the pattern is not displayed, it is made difficult for the player to realize that the middle drum is rotating.

Returning to the explanation of step S1101, if a negative determination is made in step S1101, a determination is made in step S1104 as to whether or not it is the end timing for the pattern replacement (special change). If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the special change display process ends. If a positive determination is made in step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, processing is executed to partially light the center drum side light. Specifically, a flag for partial lighting is set.

In the light emission and drive control process in step S903, a process for partially lighting the middle drum side light is executed based on this flag. Specifically, the supply of light is started to the upper, middle, and lower sections of the middle variable display area DM that are located on the reach line, and the supply of light to other sections is stopped. For example, if the reach line being formed currently straddles the middle section, the light emitter 572b corresponding to the middle section is turned on, and the other light emitters 572a, 572c to 572g are kept off. This causes the middle symbol to suddenly switch places, enhancing the impact of the game result display.

The following provides additional explanation of the reach display flow with reference to the timing charts in Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39 is a timing chart showing the reach display flow without special change support, and Figure 40 is a timing chart showing the reach display flow with special change support.

(Reach display not compatible with special changes)
As shown in Fig. 39, at the timing ta1 when a game round related to a reach display not corresponding to a special change starts, the side lights 528L, 528M, 528R of each drum are all turned on, and the back light 582 of the background display device 529 is turned off. In this state, a drive signal is output to each motor 526L, 526M, 526R, and the scrolling display of the pattern row starts in each variable display area DL, DM, DR.

At the timing ta2 after the start of the fluctuation, the output of the drive signal to the motor 526L for the left drum is stopped, and the left drum is stopped at a preset rotation position. This causes the three preset patterns to be displayed stationary in the left fluctuation display area DL. At the following timing ta3, the output of the drive signal to the motor 526R for the right drum is stopped, and the right drum is stopped at a preset rotation position. This causes the three preset patterns to be displayed stationary in the right fluctuation display area DR.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the same symbols are stopped on a preset pay line, forming a reach line and transitioning to the reach display. At this timing ta3, the backlight 582 of the background display device 529 is turned on, emphasizing the transition to the reach display. Also, at the timing ta3, some of the light emitters 572L constituting the side light 528L are turned off so that the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the left variable display area DL and do not form a reach line are not displayed. Also, some of the light emitters 572R constituting the side light 528R are turned off so that the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the right variable display area DR and do not form a reach line are not displayed. Even under this situation, all of the light emitters 572M constituting the side light 528M for the middle drum are kept lit.

At the timing of ta4 after the transition to the reach display, the symbols are displayed stationary in the middle variable display area DM, and a symbol combination corresponding to the game result is formed. This clearly indicates the game result to the player. Then, at the timing of ta5 after the determined display period of the symbols has elapsed, all the light emitters 572 that make up each side light 528 are turned on, and the backlight 582 is turned off.

(Reach display for special changes)
As shown in Fig. 40, at the timing tb1 when the game round related to the special change corresponding reach display starts, the side lights 528L, 528M, 528R of each drum are all lit, and the back light 582 of the background display device 529 is turned off. In this state, a drive signal is output to each motor 526L, 526M, 526R, and the scrolling display of the pattern row is started in each variable display area DL, DM, DR.

At timing tb2 after the start of the fluctuation, the output of the drive signal to the motor 526L for the left drum is stopped, and the left drum stops at a preset rotation position. This causes the three preset patterns to be displayed stationary in the left fluctuation display area DL. At the following timing tb3, the output of the drive signal to the motor 526R for the right drum is stopped, and the right drum stops at a preset rotation position. This causes the three preset patterns to be displayed stationary in the right fluctuation display area DR.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the same symbols are stopped on a preset pay line, forming a reach line and transitioning to the reach display. At this timing of tb3, the backlight 582 of the background display device 529 is turned on, emphasizing the transition to the reach display. Also, at the timing of tb3, some of the light emitters 572L constituting the side light 528L are turned off so that the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the left variable display area DL and do not form a reach line are not displayed. Also, some of the light emitters 572R constituting the side light 528R are turned off so that the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the right variable display area DR and do not form a reach line are not displayed. Even under this situation, all of the light emitters 572M constituting the side light 528M for the middle drum are kept lit.

At the timing of tb4 after the transition to the reach display, the symbols are temporarily displayed in the medium variation display area DM, and a symbol combination corresponding to a miss result is formed. The special change (special variation display) occurs after this timing of tb4. Note that the sequence of events up to the timing of tb4 is the same as the sequence up to the timing of ta4 in the reach display not corresponding to special change shown in FIG. 39.

At time tb5, a predetermined waiting period (slightly shorter than the confirmed display period) from time tb4 when the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is temporarily displayed, all of the light emitters 572M constituting the side light 528M for the middle drum are turned off, and the symbols that were stopped and displayed in the middle variable display area DM are temporarily hidden. The replacement of symbols due to special changes may be repeated up to three times, but the example shown in Figure 40 illustrates a case where this replacement occurs twice.

Immediately after the light emitter 572M goes invisible at time tb5, a drive signal is output to the motor 526M for the middle drum, and the light emitters 553M located on the reach line are replaced. At time tb6 after the replacement is complete, the light emitters 572M that correspond to the reach line are turned on, and the rest are kept off. This makes it appear as if the middle symbol on the reach line has suddenly been replaced with a different symbol.

The symbol combination displayed at tb6 also corresponds to a miss result, and then the second special change is initiated. Specifically, at tb7, a predetermined waiting period (slightly shorter than the confirmed display period) has elapsed since tb6, when the symbol combination was displayed, all of the light emitters 572M that make up the side light 528M for the middle drum are turned off, and the symbols that were displayed in a stopped state in the middle variable display area DM are temporarily hidden.

Immediately after the light emitter 572M goes invisible at the timing of tb7, a drive signal is output to the motor 526M for the middle drum, and the light emission unit 553M located on the reach line is replaced. At the timing of tb8 after the replacement is completed, the light emitter 572M that corresponds to the reach line is turned on, and the rest are kept off. This makes it look as if the middle symbol on the reach line has suddenly been replaced with a different symbol. Since the number of plays shown in Figure 40 corresponds to a losing result, the symbol combination that is finally stopped (confirmed) also corresponds to a losing result.

While the special changes detailed above are being made, the backlight 582 remains on, and light from the backlight 582 is irradiated to the front of the gaming machine through each drum (light-guiding section 532). This is a measure to prevent the pattern on the light-emitting section 553 from appearing when ambient light from lighting in an amusement hall or the like is reflected in the light-guiding section 532.

Each drum (more specifically, the light guide section 532) of the variable display unit 500 described above is composed of a combination of multiple light guide panels 555-557 divided in the rotation direction, and a boundary portion BP1 is generated between the light guide panels 555-557. If the boundary portion BP1 is often located in the variable display area, it is feared that it will reduce the appearance of the variable display unit 500 and hinder the improvement of attention to the game by performing the above-mentioned various display performances. In this embodiment, one of the features is that the arrangement of the light emission portion 553 formed in the light guide section 532, the position of the boundary portion BP1, and the relationship with the variable display area are devised to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. The following describes the devise with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. 41. In FIG. 41, the left drum is illustrated, but the relationship between the boundary portion BP1 and the variable display area is the same for the middle drum and the right drum. Note that in FIG. 41, for convenience of explanation, the light emission portion 553 is shown in a state in which it is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 22, the light guide 532 of each drum is provided with a number of light emitters 553 arranged in the rotation direction. These light emitters 553 correspond to the main and sub-patterns, and the light supplied from the side light 528 is emitted from the light emitters 553 to display the main patterns "1" to "9" and the sub-pattern resembling a "seashell."

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the size of the main pattern in the rotation direction is larger than the size of the sub-pattern. A border area BP1 is disposed between the main pattern and the sub-pattern, and the border area BP1 is biased toward the main pattern so that the blank area formed between the main pattern and the border area BP1 is smaller than the blank area formed between the main pattern and the sub-pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, a boundary portion BP1 is provided between the "6" symbol (more specifically, the light emitting portion 553 for the "6" symbol) and the sub-symbol (more specifically, the light emitting portion 553 for the sub-symbol). When the "6" symbol stops in the upper row of the variable display area, the boundary portion BP1 is located above the upper limit position of the variable display area, i.e., in a range that cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine (see FIG. 41(b)). In contrast, when the "6" symbol stops directly below the variable display area (outside the frame), the boundary portion BP1 is located below the lower limit position of the variable display area, i.e., in a range that cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine (see FIG. 41(c)).

In general, to facilitate manufacturing, it is assumed that the boundary area will be set so that the distance from the light emitting section for the sub-symbol is the same as the distance from the light emitting section for the main symbol. However, there is concern that such a configuration will make it difficult to increase the number of opportunities for the boundary area to stop outside the variable display area. In this regard, the configuration shown in this embodiment makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring by reducing the number of opportunities for the border area BP1 to come into the player's eye, even if the symbol closest to the border area is stopped in the upper or lower section of the variable display area. In this way, the position of the border area BP1 shown in this embodiment has a clear technical significance in making the border area BP1 less noticeable.

In addition, one of the features of this embodiment is that a device has been devised to prevent the border area BP1 from becoming conspicuous while the patterns are being scrolled and displayed by rotating each drum. This device will be described below with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the light emission control process, and FIG. 42(b) is a schematic diagram showing the state of the shift of the regulated object.

As described in FIG. 36, the variable processing executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 includes the above-mentioned light emission/drive setting processing, light emission restriction processing, and light emission/drive control processing. As shown in FIG. 42(a), in the light emission restriction processing, first, the position of the boundary portion BP1 is identified in step S1201. Next, of the light emitters 572 constituting the side light 528, those to be restricted are identified in step S1202. Specifically, the light emitters located to the sides of the boundary portion BP1 identified in step S1201 are identified. In the following step S1203, the light emitters identified in step S1202 are set as targets for light emission restriction. In the above light emission/drive control processing, a process is performed to turn off the targets set in step S1203, regardless of the contents set in the light emission/drive setting processing.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), when the border area BP1 moves in conjunction with the rotation of the pattern row, the light emitter 572 located to the side of the border area BP1 is switched to an off state in response to the movement. In other words, the supply of light to the border area BP1 is suppressed. This configuration can prevent the border area BP1 from emitting light and becoming conspicuous.

The first embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In the variable display unit 500, the light from the side light 528 is emitted from the light emitting portion 553 formed in the light guide portion 532 to display the pattern. The pattern can be switched between displayed and hidden by turning the side light 528 on and off, and the color of the pattern can be changed by changing the color of the light emitted. In this way, using the light guide portion 532 and the side light 528 together to construct a variable display unit (corresponding to a "pattern display means") is preferable for diversifying the display modes of the patterns and increasing attention to the game.

When the light from the side light 528 is switched from a supply state to a non-supply state, the symbols become invisible or difficult to see (non-display). In this way, by making it possible to switch between display and non-display of the symbols, the information provided to the player by the variable display unit 500 can be limited according to the game situation. It can also contribute to diversifying the display modes when displaying a variable pattern.

By configuring the light from the side light 528 to be irradiated onto the end surface 554 of the light guide section 532, the light source can be prevented from being noticeable when visually checking the pattern.

When changing the pattern displayed in the variable display area, the rotating body 525 (light guide unit 532) rotates in the above supply state, making it appear as if the pattern is moving in the direction of the movement. In this way, by moving the light guide unit 532 instead of the light source, it is possible to preferably avoid limitations on the manner in which the pattern can be changed due to factors such as the length of the wiring. Furthermore, since the position of the light source can be fixed, it is possible to replace patterns displayed in the same position, and even when the patterns are displayed in a variable manner, the points that the player should pay attention to can be unified. This is a preferable configuration for preventing pattern displays from being overlooked and reducing player fatigue.

The direction of operation of the light guide 532 is set to be perpendicular to the direction of light irradiation in the side light 528 (more specifically, the light emitter 572). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress changes in the distance between the light irradiated target (end surface 554) in the light guide 532 and the light emitter 572 as the light guide 532 operates. This is preferable in terms of suppressing a shortage of light supply to the light emission unit 553 due to light from the light emitter 572 being diffused before it is irradiated to the end surface 554.

The light emitting units 553 are aligned in the direction of movement of the light guide unit 532, and the light emitters 572 that make up the side light 528 are also aligned in the direction of movement of the light guide unit 532. By individually controlling the light emission of these light emitters 572, it is possible to change the number of images displayed in the variable display area. In this way, by using multiple light emitters 572 that can be individually controlled to emit light, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of patterns displayed depending on the game situation, etc., and thus the expressive power of the variable display unit 500 can be dramatically improved.

When the light emitting section 553 is made up of minute irregularities, it is difficult to completely make it impossible to visually identify the position and shape of the light emitting section 553, since ambient light, such as the lighting in the game hall, is diffused by the light emitting section. In other words, it is possible to grasp the shape and position of the light emitting section 553 by squinting. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, if light is irradiated from the backlight 582 to the light guide section 532, the light from the backlight 582 can confuse ambient light, making it difficult to grasp the shape and position of the light emitting section 553. This is preferable in terms of enhancing the impact when a pattern suddenly appears by switching between the supply state and non-supply state of the side light 528.

When the light guide unit 532 is operated, it cannot be denied that it is possible to identify that the light guide unit 532 is operating by looking closely at the light emission unit 553. This is a factor that reduces the impact when the light guide unit 532 is operated while the side light 528 is not supplied and the pattern is suddenly changed. Therefore, when changing the pattern, as shown in the above embodiment, if the light guide unit 532 is operated under a situation in which the supply of light to the light guide unit 532 by the side light 528 is stopped and light is irradiated to the light guide unit 532 by the backlight 582, the light from the backlight 582 can be used to confuse ambient light, etc. This makes it difficult to know that the light guide unit 532 is operating, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed. In addition, since the light from the backlight 582 is irradiated to the entire variable display area, the effect of making it difficult to identify the shape, etc. of the light emission unit 553 and the operating status of the light guide can be preferably exerted.

By rotating the light guiding section 532, which has a substantially circular ring shape, the location where light is supplied to the light guiding section 532 (end surface 554) is changed. This causes the pattern to be displayed in a variable manner on the light guiding section 532. Because the light guiding section 532 has a substantially circular ring shape, the variable display of the pattern can be continued without reversing the rotation direction of the light guiding section 532. In other words, when performing dynamic display using the light guiding section 532 to enhance expressiveness, etc., it is possible to prevent the light guiding section 532 from becoming excessively large. This is a preferable configuration for increasing the attention of players.

The distance from the side light 528 to the end surface 554 of the light guide 532 is constant at any rotation position. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the position or orientation of the side light 528 in response to changes in the light supply location (for example, to ensure an operating gap). This simplifies the configuration related to light supply in the variable display unit 500.

The side light 528 is configured so that the direction of light emitted by the light emitter 572 (LED) is the same as the central axis line CL of rotation, and the direction of light emission and the arrangement direction (rotation direction) of the light emitting units 553 intersect. In other words, when multiple light emitting units 553 are used together, the light emitting units 553 are prevented from lining up in the direction of light emission. Therefore, when switching the patterns to be displayed according to the rotation position, light is prevented from being supplied to patterns that are not the target of display, and the occurrence of inconveniences such as patterns that should not be displayed faintly emitting light can be preferably avoided.

In a configuration in which the light guide section 532 is substantially annular, an insertion section 561 is provided in which the portion (end) of the light guide section 532 extending from the frame 531 (rim 536) is inserted, and the side light 528 is disposed in this insertion section 561, so that the following effects can be expected. That is, even if the movement of the light guide section 532 becomes unstable, the positional deviation of the light guide section 532 can be suppressed at the portion (insertion section) close to the light irradiation position. This allows the light supply function to be stably performed.

In addition, since the insertion section 561 is provided on the base body 524 that holds the rotating body 525, the gap between the insertion section 561 and the light guide section 532 can be minimized. This is preferable in terms of suppressing strong interference between the insertion section 561 and the light guide section 532 and suppressing light leakage from the insertion section 561.

In a configuration in which the light guide section 532 is movable, if the light guide section 532 comes into contact with the insertion section 561 and the light guide section 532 is damaged, there is a concern that light leakage or the like is likely to occur in that area. This is a factor that reduces the efficiency of supplying light to the light emission section 553. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by forming a gap between the insertion section 561 and the outer surface section 551 and inner surface section 552 of the light guide section 532 to avoid contact between the insertion section 561 and the light guide section 532, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

The light guide section 532 can be divided into multiple pieces (light guide panels 555 to 557) in the rotation direction to facilitate manufacturing and reduce manufacturing costs. However, in this configuration, if the boundary (edge) of each piece gets caught on the open part (entrance part) of the insertion part, it is expected that the behavior of the light guide section 532 will be disturbed. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the gap is formed so that it becomes larger toward the open part, and the edge is prevented from getting caught on the insertion section 561, thereby preferably preventing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. Note that in a configuration in which the open part (entrance part) is expanded, light is more likely to leak from this part. Therefore, by facing the open part toward the rear of the gaming machine, even if light leaks, it can be made less noticeable.

As shown in the above embodiment, the light guide section 532 is formed by a plurality of light guide panels 555-557 arranged in parallel in the rotation direction, so that the shape of the light guide section 532 can be made approximately circular. This configuration can contribute to facilitating the manufacture of the drum unit 523 and reducing the manufacturing cost, compared to, for example, forming one light guide plate in a ring shape. Here, when the parallel light guide panels 555-557 are mutually joined, distortion due to manufacturing variations, etc. may occur. In a configuration in which light is supplied to the end surface 554 of the light guide section 532, there is a concern that the positional relationship between the side light 528 and the end surface 554 may vary due to the influence of such distortion, and the pattern display function may not be properly performed. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the light guide panels 555-557 are attached to the frame 531 in a non-fixed state, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed. This is preferable in that it prevents deterioration in appearance when the light guide unit 532 is used to display changing patterns, and thus increases the player's attention.

As described above, when a single light guide section 532 is constructed by combining multiple light guide panels 555-557, the boundary portion BP1 between the light guide panels 555-557 stands out, which reduces the appearance of the light guide section 532. This is not preferable in terms of increasing the attention of the player. In addition, in a configuration in which the light guide section 532 is fixed to the frame 531, the fixed portion of the light guide section 532 to the frame 531 may differ in appearance from the non-fixed portion. Here, in this embodiment, the ends on both sides of the rotation direction of each light guide panel 555-557 are free ends, and the fixed portion is away from the boundary portion BP1 between the light guide panels 555-557. This prevents the line of sight from being guided to the boundary portion BP1 when the fixed portion comes into the player's field of vision, and reduces the deterioration of the appearance caused by constructing a single light guide section 532 by combining multiple light guide panels 555-557.

When the light guide section 532 is formed by a plurality of light guide panels 555-557, it is preferable to make the boundary area BP1 of the light guide panels 555-557 as inconspicuous as possible. Here, the light emitters 572 (LEDs) constituting the side light 528 are configured to irradiate light in a predetermined direction, and the end faces on both sides of the rotation direction of the light guide panels 555-557 are configured to extend in the predetermined direction, that is, the direction of light irradiation and the direction of extension of the boundary area BP1 are configured to match, thereby preventing the boundary area BP1 from emitting light. This is preferable in terms of improving the above-mentioned appearance. Note that the boundary area BP1 is located in a non-designated area (blank area), but since this boundary area BP1 extends in the direction of the rotation center axis CL, it is possible to prevent the non-designated area from becoming excessively large by taking the boundary area BP1 into consideration.

If the number of light guide panels (number of divisions) is excessively large, there will be more opportunities for the boundary areas between the light guide panels to stop in the variable display area (effective line). This is feared to be a factor that will degrade the appearance of the variable display unit. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, by specifying the number of divisions so that the number of patterns arranged on each of the light guide panels 555-557 is greater than the upper limit number of patterns that can stop in the variable display area, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for the boundary area BP1 to stop in the variable display area. This makes it possible to mitigate the adverse effects of using multiple light guide panels in combination.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the side light 528 as the "light emitting section" is provided on the base body 524 that rotatably holds the rotating body 525 (drum), but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to mount a configuration equivalent to the side light 528 on the rotating body 525. However, in such a configuration, the weight of the drum will be further increased, and it is expected that the responsiveness during rotation/stopping will be reduced. Therefore, it is preferable to provide the side light 528 on the base body 524 as shown in the first embodiment, thereby reducing the weight of the rotating body 525.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, the supply of light to the border region BP1 is restricted by turning off a part of the light emitter 572 (a source of light to the border region BP1) in accordance with the rotational position of the border region BP1. The specific configuration for restricting the supply of light to the border region BP1 is arbitrary, and for example, a shielding means such as a sealant that covers the border region BP1 from the side may be provided.

However, in view of the fact that the end of the light guide 532 is inserted into the insertion portion 561, the possibility cannot be denied that the shielding means may come into contact with the wall surface of the insertion portion 561 due to manufacturing variations and deterioration over time. If the gaming machine continues to operate under such a condition where there is a possibility of contact, the shielding means may wear out and the shielding function may deteriorate. As a countermeasure, for example, by increasing the gap between the light guide 532 and the insertion portion 561, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed, but increasing the gap is not desirable in terms of suppressing light leakage from the insertion portion 561 or improving the efficiency of the light supply. Considering these circumstances, as shown in the first embodiment above, regulating the supply of light to the boundary portion BP1 by light emission control has the technical significance of being able to favorably improve the durability of the gaming machine.

<Modification 3>
In the above first embodiment, the light guide panels 555 to 557 constituting the light guide section 532 are not coupled to each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light guide panels 555 to 557 may be coupled to each other. However, in consideration of the fact that deformation such as distortion may occur in the light guide panels 555 to 557 during or after manufacturing, it is preferable to configure the light guide panels 555 to 557 to be not coupled to each other and to allow such deformation (to be absorbed at the boundary portion BP1).

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, a gap is provided at the boundary portion BP1 of the light guide panels 555 to 557. However, this does not deny a configuration in which the light guide panels 555 to 557 abut against each other at the boundary portion BP1.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, the inner surface of the insertion portion 561 and the light guiding portion 532 are not in contact with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a guide roller for guiding the light guiding portion 532 may be provided on the insertion portion 561 side. However, if scratches or the like occur on the surface of the light guiding portion 532, the light path may change and the efficiency of supplying light to the light emitting portion 553 may decrease. In view of this situation, it is preferable to provide a protective member or the like on the portion of the light guiding portion 532 that comes into contact with the guide roller.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment described above, the rotating body 525 is attached to the base body 524 via the motor 526. However, in view of the fact that the rotating body 525 has a light-guiding section 532 and thus is heavy, it is also possible to rotatably hold the rotating body 525 by the base body 524 and operate the rotating body 525 by the motor 526.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the light guide unit 532 is configured by a combination of three light guide panels 555 to 557, but any number of light guide panels may be used to configure the light guide unit 532. However, even in such a case, it is preferable that the number of light emitting units (i.e., the number of patterns) formed on one light guide panel is greater than the upper limit number of patterns that can be stopped in the variable display area.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the light guide 532 is held rotatably, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the light guide can be moved to change the pattern visible through the central opening 85. For example, the light guide may be held slidably.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, the light guide 532 is formed in a cylindrical shape, but is not limited to this. For example, the light guide 532 may be formed in a disk shape and disposed so that its plate surface faces the front of the gaming machine. In this case, it is preferable to change the direction of the rotation center axis of the rotating body to the front-rear direction.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment described above, the backlight 582 is configured to be turned on when the reach display is entered, but it is sufficient that the backlight 582 is configured to be turned on at least when a special change (special variation display) is executed, and it is optional whether or not to turn on the backlight 582 during other periods.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, when a special change (special variation) is executed, the side light 528 is turned off after the operation of the rotating body 525 is stopped, and the side light 528 is turned on after the rotating body 525 has restarted its operation. However, a specific configuration for operating the rotating body 525 by utilizing the off period of the side light 528 is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, it is also possible to configure the side light 528 to be turned off while the rotating body 525 is operating, and then to turn on the side light 528 after the operation of the rotating body 525 is completed.

In addition, when a pattern is inserted or displayed by a special change, if a variable display mode in which the rotation speed of the rotating body 525M of the middle drum is relatively slow (for example, normal reach) and a variable display mode in which the rotation speed is relatively fast (for example, super reach) are set, it is also possible to change the timing of supplying/stopping light according to the rotation speed. For example, when the pattern is temporarily stopped on the reach line, the time to check the pattern is increased by lengthening the pause period. However, simply lengthening the pause period may result in stronger restrictions on the number of re-changes during special changes. Therefore, if the supply of light is resumed immediately before the pause, the time to check the pattern can be increased. However, in such a configuration, the above-mentioned margin of error substantially changes depending on the rotation speed of the rotating body. Therefore, when the rotation speed is relatively fast, it is preferable to configure the start timing of light supply to be earlier than when the rotation speed is relatively slow, or to set the light supply range to a part of the upstream side of the reach line.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, the side light 528 as the "light emitting section" is fixed, and the light guiding section 532 as the "light guiding body" is movable, but this relationship can be reversed. That is, it is also possible to variably display the pattern by moving the light emitting section relative to the fixed light guiding section. Even in this case, it is preferable to align the arrangement direction of the light emitting sections formed in the light guiding section with the movement direction of the light emitting section.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment described above, the light-guiding section 532 is formed in an approximately circular ring shape, but it is sufficient if the pattern displayed in the variable display area can be changed by operation in one direction, and the light-guiding section 532 is not limited to a circular ring shape (for example, this does not deny the possibility of having a depression or the like formed in one part).

<Modification 14>
In conventional gaming machines, for example, it is possible to make the symbols virtually undistinguishable by displaying them in a high-speed varying manner. However, such a movement hinders the improvement of the durability of the symbol display means. In particular, in a configuration in which the rotating body is provided with a light guide as shown in this embodiment, the weight is heavier than when the rotating body is provided with paper or the like, and there is a concern that such inconvenience will become more pronounced.

Therefore, the supply of light from the side light 528 can be stopped while the rotor 525 is rotating, thereby suddenly erasing the pattern displayed on the light guide 532. By configuring the side light 528 to have a significant change in appearance (change in distinctiveness) by controlling the light emission in this way, it is possible to diversify the display mode while effectively suppressing the resulting decrease in durability.

For example, it is advisable to use a display mode that clearly shows the process of the pattern change together with a display mode that does not clearly show the process of the pattern change. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably diversify the manner in which the pattern is displayed dynamically.

<Modification 15>
In order to make the movement of the light guiding unit 532 difficult to notice when the design is changed in a special way, the operation of the light guiding unit 532 may be started simultaneously with the turning off of the side light 528, or the operation of the light guiding unit 532 may be started after the turning off of the side light 528. Moreover, the side light 528 may be turned on after the operation of the light guiding unit 532 is completed, or the side light 528 may be turned on simultaneously with the completion of the operation of the light guiding unit 532.

<Modification 16>
The stop display period (pause period) of the middle pattern when a special change is made may or may not match the final display period (final stop period). For example, the pause period may be changed depending on the number of times the pattern is replaced in the special change. Specifically, it is possible to provide a difference so that each pause period is longer in the order of when the replacement occurs three times < when it occurs twice < when it occurs once. In this case, when the pause period is short, it is preferable to ensure a period during which the pattern can be seen by accelerating the timing of the start of the supply of the light. In detail, when the pause period when the pattern is replaced once matches the final stop period, when the pause period when the pattern is replaced twice is 0.2 sec shorter than the final stop period, and when the pattern is replaced three times is 0.4 sec shorter than the final stop period, it is preferable to configure the light supply to be resumed by the shortened amount (configuration in which the supply is resumed during the operation of the light guide unit 532).

<Modification 17>
The light emitting unit 553 may be configured to supply light only during the period when the light emitting unit 553 is located on the effective line, and when the light emitting unit 553 is off the effective line, the supply of light is stopped to display the image frame by frame (second special modification). In this case, when comparing a normal reach that supports slow-speed fluctuation display with a super reach that supports high-speed fluctuation display, the latter may have lower visibility of the image than the former, so in the latter case, it is preferable to ensure visibility by supplying light even when the image is slightly off the effective line. For example, it is preferable to delay the timing of stopping the supply of light compared to the former, or to resume the supply of light earlier than the former.

<Modification 18>
In the first embodiment, when a special change is made, the light guiding unit 532 is not stopped (operation is continued) during the process, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to temporarily stop the light guiding unit 532 during the special change.

<Modification 19>
In order to prevent the player from specifying in advance the patterns to be replaced during a special change, it is preferable to increase the proportion of the operation period of the light-guiding unit 532 and the waiting period from when operation stops to when light supply is resumed, and decrease the proportion of the latter.

<Modification 20>
In the first embodiment, the frame 531 is made of synthetic resin, but the present invention is not limited to this. The frame 531 may be made of metal.

<Modification 21>
It is also possible to integrally mold the frame 531 and the light guide panels 555 to 557 shown in the first embodiment. With such a configuration, a fixing means for fixing the frame and the light guide panels and an associated configuration (for example, a portion corresponding to the rim 536) are not required. This is preferable in terms of improving the appearance of the variable display unit.

It is also possible to construct a rotating body by dividing the frame 531 into three parts in the rotational direction corresponding to each of the light guide panels 555 to 557, molding each frame part integrally with the corresponding light guide panel 555 to 557, and fixing these three pieces to each other using a fixing means or the like. By using such a divided structure, it is possible to prevent molding from becoming difficult.

Second Embodiment
The variable display unit 500X shown in this embodiment is similar to the variable display unit 500 shown in the first embodiment in terms of the main configuration for variably displaying the symbols, but differs from the variable display unit 500 in that the background displayed by the background display device 529X can be switched depending on the game situation. Hereinafter, the variable display unit 500X in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the variable display unit 500X. Note that, for configurations similar to those in the first embodiment, the reference numerals are reused and "X" is added to the end of the reference numerals, but those for which no description of differences, etc. is given are basically the same as the various configurations shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 43, although there are differences in size and the like, the background display device 529X shown in this embodiment has the same basic configuration as the drum unit 523 shown in the first embodiment, more specifically, the base body 524, the rotating body 525, the motor 526, the position detection sensor 527, and the side light 528. Specifically, the background display device 529X has a plate-shaped base body 724X that forms the attachment part to the housing 521, and a rotating body 725X held by the base body 724X.

The rotating body 725X is mounted on the base body 724X via the motor 726X. Specifically, the motor 726X is fixed to the base body 724X, and the rotating body 725X is fixed to the output shaft of the motor 726X. The output shaft of the motor 726X extends in the direction in which the drum units 723X are arranged side by side (left and right direction), and the rotating body 725X rotates around the axis of the output shaft. The rotation center axis of the rotating body 725X shown in this embodiment coincides with the rotation center axis CL of the rotating body 525X (they are coaxial). In this way, by aligning the rotation center axes, the operating gap of each rotating body 525X, 725X is reduced. In the following description, the rotation center axis of the rotating body 725X is also referred to as the "rotation center axis CL".

The motor 526 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and is configured so that the drive is controlled by the notification/performance control device 140. The motor 726X is a stepping motor, and the rotational position of the rotor 725X can be adjusted by the number of pulses of the output drive signal.

The base body 724X is equipped with a position detection sensor that detects the rotational position of the rotating body 725X. The position detection sensor is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, which grasps the rotational position of the rotating body 725X based on the detection information (detection signal) from the position detection sensor. If a deviation occurs in the rotational position of the rotating body 725X due to the influence of an external force or the occurrence of a malfunction, the rotational position of the rotating body 725X is corrected (corrected) based on the grasped position information.

The rotating body 725X is composed of a circular frame 731X that constitutes the framework of the rotating body 725X, a substantially cylindrical light guide 732X (light guide panels 755X-757X) that covers the outer periphery of the frame 731X, and decorative sheets 781X-783X that are attached to the outer surface of the light guide 732X. The frame 731X is composed of a hub 735X as the center to which the output shaft of the motor 726X is fixed, an annular rim 736X as the outer periphery to which the light guide 732X is fixed, and spokes 737X that connect the hub 735X and the rim 736X.

More specifically, the rim 736X has a pair of left and right annular portions centered on the central axis CL of rotation, and a long connecting portion that connects the annular portions. The light guide portion 732X is fixed to the connecting portion using a fixing means (adhesive) in a state where it is superimposed on the connecting portion from the outside of the frame 731X.

Abutment portion 743X is formed on rim 736X of frame 731X, which abuts against light guide portion 532 from the side opposite base body 524. This abutment portion 743X determines the left and right position of light guide portion 732X. The end of light guide portion 732X on the side opposite abutment portion 743X (base body 724X side) extends laterally from rim 736X. An insertion portion 761X is formed on base body 724X, into which this extending portion (end portion) is inserted.

The insertion section 761X has a groove shape that is open on the light guiding section 732X side, and the end of the light guiding section 732X is inserted into the insertion section 761X through this open portion. On the opposite side of the bottom 762X of the insertion section 761X to the light guiding section 732X, a light emitting board 771X on which multiple light emitters 772X (more specifically, LEDs) are mounted is disposed. The light emitting board 771X is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the light emission of the light emitting board 771X is controlled by the notification/performance control device 140.

The bottom of the insertion section 761X is formed with multiple through holes corresponding to the light emitters 772X, and the light emitters 772X mounted on the light emitting substrate 771X face the end surface 754X of the light guide section 732X through the through holes. The optical axis of each light emitter 772X faces in the same direction as the rotation center axis CL of the rotating body 725X, and light from these light emitters 772X is irradiated onto the end surface 754X of the light guide section 732X. The base body 724X (including the insertion section 761X) is made of a colored, opaque synthetic resin material and has a light absorbing function. This prevents light from leaking from the insertion section 761X.

Light from the light emitter 772X is repeatedly reflected on the outer and inner surfaces of the light guide 732X, and travels toward the opposite end surface of the light guide 732X. A light emitting section made of fine irregularities is formed on almost the entire outer surface of the light guide 732X. While the light emitting section is formed only in a limited area in the light guide 532X for displaying patterns, the light emitting section is not formed in this manner in the light guide 732X. In other words, the light guide 732X in this embodiment functions as the illumination means (backlight 582) shown in the first embodiment.

The light supplied to the light guide 732X reaches the light emission section of the light guide 732X and is emitted forward of the gaming machine. When the light passes through one of the decorative sheets 781X-783X, the decorative sheet 781X-783X emits bright light.

In this embodiment, the rotating body 525X constituting the drum and the rotating body 725X constituting the background display device 529 face each other, and most of the rotating body 725X is housed within the rotating body 525X, which is one size larger than the rotating body 725X. Since both the rotating body 525X and the rotating body 725X are movable, a suitable operating gap is required between them. However, if this operating gap becomes too large, there is a concern that the background display will not be performed properly. In this embodiment, one of the features is that, taking such circumstances into consideration, efforts have been made to reduce the operating gap.

As shown in FIG. 43, the base body 524X is formed with an engagement recess 591X that engages with the hub 535X of the frame 531X, and the base body 524X is assembled to the frame 531X in a rotatable state by engaging the hub 535X with the engagement recess 591X. The motor 526X is disposed on the opposite side of the base body 524X to the frame 531X (outside the drum unit) and is fixed to the frame 531X. This configuration reduces the weight load on the output shaft of the motor 526X and suppresses vibration when the rotating body 525X is rotated.

On the other hand, the base body 724X is formed with an engagement recess 791X that engages with the hub 735X of the frame 731X, and the base body 724X is assembled to the frame 731X in a rotatable state by engaging the hub 735X with the engagement recess 791X. The motor 726X is disposed on the opposite side of the base body 724X to the frame 731X (outside the drum unit) and is fixed to the frame 731X. This configuration reduces the weight load on the output shaft of the motor 726X and suppresses vibration when the rotating body 725X is rotated.

By suppressing the vibration of the rotating bodies 525X, 725X with this configuration, when the rotating bodies 525X, 725X are arranged on the inside and outside, the operating gap between the rotating bodies 525X, 725X can be reduced.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 44(a), the rotating body 725X shown in this embodiment is also constructed by combining a plurality of light guide panels 755X to 757X arranged in the rotation direction in the same manner as the rotating body 525X, to form a light guide section 732X having an approximately cylindrical shape as a whole. The light guide panels 755X to 757X are made of transparent synthetic resin, and each has a plate shape with a constant thickness and a constant curvature. In addition, the length dimension in the rotation direction of the rotating body 725X and the width dimension in the direction of the rotation center axis CL are the same, and are formed so that the appearance is the same. The light guide panels 755X to 757X are each fixed to the rim 736X (more specifically, the connection part) of the frame 731X using a transparent adhesive as a fixing means, but the light guide panels 755X to 757X are not fixed to each other.

As described above, in a configuration in which one end of the light guide section 732X is inserted into the insertion section 761X, it is preferable to bring the inner surface of the insertion section 761X and the light guide section 732X as close as possible to improve the light supply efficiency. However, in this structure, it is necessary to add a certain amount of margin to the gap between the two, taking into consideration that distortion may occur in the light guide panels 755X to 757X due to manufacturing errors or changes over time. Here, in this embodiment, by not fixing the light guide panels 755X to 757X to each other, it is possible to avoid distortion that may occur when the light guide panels 755X to 757X are fixed. This makes it possible to minimize the margin.

When the rotating body 725X is constructed using the light guide section 732X, the expressiveness of the variable display unit can be improved, but the weight of the rotating body 725X tends to increase. This is a cause of concern that the responsiveness of rotating body 725X when rotating/stopping is reduced. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the light guide panels 755X to 757X are prevented from overlapping in the thickness direction. This prevents an increase in the weight of the light guide section 732X and reduces a reduction in responsiveness.

At the boundary region BP2 between the light guide panels 755X to 757X, the adjacent light guide panels 755X to 757X face each other with a gap between them. This is a measure to prevent the light guide panels 755X to 757X from strongly interfering with each other at the boundary region BP2 when there is variation in size between the light guide panels 755X to 757X due to manufacturing errors or the like. By preventing strong interference between the light guide panels 755X to 757X, it is possible to suppress deformation such as the above-mentioned distortion of the light guide panels 755X to 757X.

The insertion section 761X shown in this embodiment also extends along the portion of the light guide section 732X that protrudes from the opening 522 of the housing 521 (see FIG. 13) to the front of the gaming machine. The upper and lower open portions of the insertion section 761X are expanded so that their width gradually increases toward the ends. This prevents the boundary portion BP2 from getting caught when passing through the open portion. Incidentally, when the open portion is expanded, light leakage from the side light 728X is more likely to occur. In contrast, in this embodiment, both open portions are formed so that they face backward, more specifically, diagonally backward. This is a design to make it difficult for light leaking from the open portion to enter the player's eyes.

Decorative sheets 781X to 783X are attached to the light guide panels 755X to 757X, respectively. The decorative sheets 781X to 783X are the same size as the outer surfaces of the light guide panels 755X to 757X and are optically transparent, but the patterns they depict are different. Specifically, the decorative sheet 781X attached to the light guide panel 755X has a pattern that resembles a sandy beach in the daytime, the decorative sheet 782X attached to the light guide panel 756X has a pattern that resembles a sandy beach in the evening, and the decorative sheet 783X attached to the light guide panel 757X has a pattern that resembles a sandy beach at night.

By rotating the rotor 725X, the background visible from the front of the gaming machine is switched. Here, referring to FIG. 44(b), the relationship between the gaming state and the background is explained in more detail. In the first normal gaming state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, a daytime sandy beach is displayed as the background. In the second normal gaming state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, and in the third normal gaming state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the high probability mode, an evening sandy beach is displayed as the background. In the special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) to which the game enters when a jackpot result is obtained, a nighttime sandy beach is displayed as the background. In this way, the display of the background is switched depending on the gaming state, and the gaming state is suggested to the player.

In this embodiment, the background and the design are displayed using two rotating bodies, one inside and one outside. In such a configuration, it is difficult to incorporate lighting means into the inner rotating body in order to ensure a power supply path to the lighting means. In this regard, the above problem is solved by constructing the rotating body 725X using the light guide section 732X that functions as the lighting means.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the motor 526X for the rotating body 525X and the motor 726X for the rotating body 725X are configured to protrude outside the drum unit. In such a configuration, the gap between the drum units arranged side by side on the left and right becomes large, and the distance between each pattern row becomes large. Below, a modified example that takes such circumstances into consideration will be described.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 45, the hubs 535Y, 735Y of the frames 531Y, 731Y are formed to protrude toward the inside of the drum unit, and the engaging protrusions 591Y, 791Y of the base bodies 524Y, 724Y engage with the hubs 535Y, 735Y from the side of the rotation center axis CL. The engaging protrusions 591Y, 791Y are hollow, and the motors 526Y, 726Y are disposed (housed) in these hollow portions, thereby reducing the protrusion of the motors 526Y, 726Y. This reduces the gap and prevents the pattern rows from separating.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the light guide 732X is used as an illumination means for the decorative sheets 781X to 783X, but is not limited thereto. The light guide 732X can also be configured to display a predetermined pattern, similar to the light guide 532X. For example, the light emitting portion of the light guide 732X may be formed so as to be able to display a pattern similar to the pattern depicted on the decorative sheets 781X to 783X. In such a configuration, it is not preferable that the back side is visible through the light guide 732X. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a plain sheet material or the like on the inner surface side of the light guide 732X to restrict the back side from being visible.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment, the decorative sheets 781X to 783X are attached to the light guide panels 755X to 757X individually, but it is also possible to attach one decorative sheet across the three light guide panels 755X to 757X. With this configuration, the boundary region BP2 between the light guide panels 755X to 757X can be covered to make the boundary region BP2 less noticeable.

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment, three backgrounds are used to suggest four game states, but it is also possible to configure the number of backgrounds to match the number of game states.

<Modification 5>
The configurations shown in the respective modified examples of the first embodiment can also be applied to the variable display unit shown in this embodiment.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the basic structure of the variable display unit is the same as that of the second embodiment, but the configuration is different from that of the second embodiment in that the variable display unit is used to execute different display effects for each game state. The variable display unit in this embodiment will be described below with reference to Figure 46. Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view of the variable display unit.

Each drum unit 723Z constituting the variable display unit is roughly divided into a first display unit consisting of a base body 524Z, a rotating body 525Z, a motor 526Z, a side light 528Z, etc., and a second display unit consisting of a base body 724Z, a rotating body 725Z, a motor 726Z, a side light 728Z, etc. The first display unit has a function of notifying the result of a lottery based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a (see FIG. 6), and if the lottery results in a special jackpot, a symbol combination corresponding to the special jackpot result is displayed on at least one of the effective lines L1 to L5, and if the lottery results in a normal jackpot, a symbol combination corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed on at least one of the effective lines L1 to L5. The base body 524Z, the rotating body 525Z, the motor 526Z, and the side light 528Z are the same as the base body 524Y, the rotating body 525Y, the motor 526Y, and the side light 528Y shown in the second embodiment above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The rotating body 725Z has a light guide section 732Z and a frame 731Z on which the light guide section 732Z is mounted, and has the same configuration as the light guide section 732Y shown in the second embodiment in that the light guide section 732Z is formed by combining a plurality of light guide panels 755Z-758Z. However, it differs from the second embodiment in that, whereas the light guide section 732Y has decorative sheets 781Y-783Y attached to its outer surface, the light guide section 732Z shown in this embodiment has sheet materials 781Z-783Z attached to its inner surface.

The sheet materials 781Z to 783Z are not light-transmitting, so the rear side cannot be seen through the sheet materials 781Z to 783Z. The sheet materials 781Z to 783Z are all plain and do not have a pattern such as a background, i.e., information that can serve as a foothold for identifying the rotational position of the rotating body 725Z. In contrast, the light emitting portion 753Z (see FIG. 47) formed on the outer surface portion 751Z of the light guiding portion 732Z is configured to display a predetermined pattern or the like by emitting light from the light emitting portion 753Z, similar to the light guiding portion 532Z. In other words, while the light guiding portion 732Y shown in the second embodiment functions as a lighting means, the light guiding portion 732Z shown in this embodiment functions as a pattern display means. Note that when light is not emitted from the light emitting portion 753Z, the above-mentioned pattern or the like is not displayed, making it practically impossible or difficult to visually identify the light emitting portion 753Z.

Now, referring to FIG. 47, the light emitting portion 753Z formed in the light guiding portion 732Z, i.e., the pattern or the like displayed by the light emitting portion 753Z, will be described. For ease of explanation, FIG. 47 shows a state in which each light emitting portion 753Z emits light to display a pattern or the like.

A picture is printed on the light-guiding panel 755Z that constitutes the light-guiding unit 732Z, spanning the three light-guiding panels 755Z on the left and right. Specifically, a picture of a sandy beach is printed on the light-guiding panel 755Z. When the light-guiding panel 755Z faces the front of the gaming machine, light is supplied from the side light 728Z, and the background of a sandy beach is displayed.

On the light guide panels 756Z to 757Z, the "boy" symbol, the "bell" symbol, the "replay" symbol, the "7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are arranged in a predetermined order. Although not shown in the figure, the second display unit, like the first display unit, has multiple active lines set, and in the case of a 16R special jackpot result, the symbol combination of "7", "7", and "7" is displayed statically on at least one of the active lines, in the case of a 4R regular jackpot result, the symbol combination of "7", "7", and "BAR" is displayed statically, and in the case of a miss result, a symbol combination other than these symbol combinations is displayed statically (see FIG. 48).

In this embodiment, depending on the game situation, the display can be switched between showing a beach background using light-guiding panel 755Z and showing patterns using light-guiding panels 756Z to 757Z, but the beach background and patterns are never displayed statically at the same time in the variable display area.

The pay lines on the second display unit are configured to match the pay lines L1 to L5 (pay lines on the first display unit) shown in Figure 20 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and overlapping the pay lines front to back makes it easier for players to understand. Hereinafter, the pay lines on the second display unit will also be referred to as pay lines L1 to L5.

In the first and second embodiments, the game times related to the upper actuation port 83a and the game times related to the lower actuation port 83b are executed in a predetermined order and do not overlap, but in this embodiment, the game times related to the upper actuation port 83a and the game times related to the lower actuation port 83b are executed in parallel, which is different. Below, various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 and the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 to realize such a game flow will be explained, focusing on the differences from the second embodiment. First, the game times control process executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 49 to 53.

(Game play control process)
In the game play control process in this embodiment, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an open/close execution mode flag (opening/closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in an open/close execution mode flag storage area (opening/closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The open/close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the open/close execution mode in the game state shift process described later, and is erased when the open/close execution mode is terminated in the game state shift process.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1301, the game round control process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1301, the game round control process for the game round related to the winning of the upper actuation port 83a (game round control process corresponding to the upper actuation port, control process for the upper actuation port) is executed in step S1302, and the game round control process for the game round related to the winning of the lower actuation port 83b (game round control process corresponding to the lower actuation port, control process for the lower actuation port) is executed in step S1303, and then the game round control process is terminated. The basic flow is the same for these two control processes. Below, the upper actuation port control process will be described first with reference to Figures 50 and 51, and then the lower actuation port control process will be described with reference to Figures 52 and 53, focusing on the differences from the lower actuation port control process.

(Control process for upper operating port)
As shown in FIG. 50, in the upper operation port control process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a game related to the upper operation port 83a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the upper operation port display section of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game round is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not a game round flag (game round information) for the upper operation port is stored (stored) in the game round flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game round flag for the upper operation port is stored when the variable display is started on the upper operation port display section, and is erased when the picture is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a game is not being played, a negative judgment is made in step S1401, and the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is judged whether a game is being played for the lower operating port 83b. Specifically, it is judged whether the lower operating port display section of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display to fixed display state, that is, whether one game is being played. This judgment is made by judging whether a game-play flag (variable display information) for the lower operating port is stored (stored) in the game-play flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game-play flag for the lower operating port is stored when a variable display is started in the lower operating port display section, and is erased when a picture or the like corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether or not the number of play times related to the lower operating port 83b corresponds to a jackpot result. If a positive judgment is made in step S1403, the control process for the upper operating port is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S1403 or step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the total reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632 is referenced to determine whether the reserved memory number CRN for the upper operating port (more specifically, the number of reserved information related to the upper operating port 83a), which is the number of reserved information stored, is "0". If the reserved memory number CRN for the upper operating port is "0", the game number control process ends as is. On the other hand, if the reserved memory number CRN for the upper operating port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, data setting process is performed.

In the data setting process for the upper operating port 83a, first the reserved memory count CRN for the upper operating port is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Ra for the upper operating port is moved to the first execution area AE1, and a process is executed to shift the data stored in the memory area of the reserved area Ra for the upper operating port.

This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first through fourth areas to the lower areas in order, clearing the data in the first area and shifting the data in each area from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the hold number display for the upper operating port is turned off. In this light-off process, the LEDs in the hold number display for the upper operating port are turned off in order from the right, which is the opposite of the light-on process that is executed when hold information is added.

After the data setting process described above is performed, in step S1406, a process for starting the change in the pattern on the display unit for the upper operating port and the change in the pattern on the variable display unit (change initiation process for the upper operating port) is executed, and then the game play control process is terminated. Here, the change initiation process for the upper operating port in step S1406 will be described with reference to FIG. 51.

(Upper operating port fluctuation start processing)
In the upper operation port fluctuation start process, first, a hit/miss determination process is executed in step S1501. In the hit/miss determination process, by referring to the hit/miss table for the upper operation port, it is determined whether the hit/miss determination information among the information stored in the first execution area, that is, the numerical information obtained from the big win random number counter C1, matches the above-mentioned big win numerical information. If the determination result in step S1501 is a big win result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1502 and the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the type determination information from the information stored in the first execution area, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2, is identified. In addition, the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information group corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the information group corresponding to the special jackpot result.

In step S1504, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (upper operation port display section) of the main display unit 87 in the relevant game round is specified from a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in ROM 603, and the specified information is stored in RAM 604. A plurality of images to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S1504, information indicating the image corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in RAM 604. Also, in step S1504, information for the MPU 602 to specify whether the current game result is a normal jackpot result or a special jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. Specifically, if the result is a normal jackpot result, a normal jackpot flag is stored, and if the result is a special jackpot result, a special jackpot flag is stored.

After executing the setting process of step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the lower actuation port 83b is being executed. If a positive determination is made in step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a game round (changing display of a pattern) related to the lower actuation port 83b is being executed, the game round (changing display of a pattern) related to the lower actuation port 83b is forcibly terminated midway based on this forced termination flag. More specifically, if a game round related to the upper actuation port 83a corresponds to a jackpot result and a game round related to the lower actuation port 83b can be executed beyond the timing when the confirmation display is performed in that game round, the game round related to the lower actuation port 83b is shortened and the game round related to the lower actuation port 83b is also terminated together with the end of the game round related to the upper actuation port 83a. In such a case, the image displayed in a stopped state during the game round related to the lower operating port 83b will correspond to a losing result.

Returning to the explanation of step S1502, if the determination result in step S1501 is a miss result, a negative determination is made in step S1502 and the process proceeds to step S1507. In step S1507, a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed.

Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (upper operating port display section) of the main display unit 87 in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is identified from a stop result table for miss results that is pre-stored in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604.

After steps S1506 and S1507 have been executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, the process of setting the variable display time (display duration) is executed.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S1508, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S1509. The variable start command includes information on the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach does not occur is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach occurs. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the notification/performance control device 140, which is the control device on the sub side, can determine whether a reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the variable start command includes information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the variable start command may also include information directly indicating whether a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1510, where the display for the upper operating port on the main display unit 87 starts to change, and then the process for starting the change for the upper operating port ends. In the process of step S1510, a play-in-progress flag for the upper operating port is stored in the various flags storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This makes it possible to identify in subsequent processes that a play-in-progress (e.g., a change display) related to the upper operating port 83a is currently being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 50, if a positive determination is made in step S1401, i.e., if it is determined that a game round related to the upper actuation port 83a is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1407. In step S1407, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a game round related to the lower actuation port 83b that corresponds to a jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408.

In step S1408, it is determined whether the timing has passed the variable display time set in step S1508. If a negative determination is made in step S1408, variable display processing is executed in step S1409, and then the main upper operating port control processing is terminated. In the variable display processing in step S1409, the various LEDs that make up the upper operating port display unit are turned on and off, thereby displaying a variable image.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1408, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, a change end process is executed. In the change end process, the display of the main display unit 87 is controlled so that the image is stopped and displayed in the upper operation port display section in a manner determined in advance. That is, for example, a final display of an image corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is executed. Note that the game play flag for the upper operation port stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased when the final display is completed.

After setting the variation end command in the following step S1412, this game round control process ends. The variation end command set in step S1412 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (Figure 28). Based on receiving the variation end command, the notification/presentation control device 140 executes a process to end the presentation for that game round. Specifically, by receiving the variation end command, the combination of patterns corresponding to the game result of that game round is displayed as a final stop display on the first display unit of the variable display unit. Note that the variation end command may not be sent, and the notification/presentation control device 140 may end the presentation for the game round on its own.

After executing the process of step S1412, the process proceeds to step S1413, where the game count counter is updated. The game count counter is a counter for specifying the number of games to continue the high frequency support mode in the second normal game state, and is decremented by "1" each time a game is executed. If the game count counter becomes "0", a positive judgment is made in step S1414, and the process proceeds to step S1415. In step S1415, the high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 604 is erased. In the following step S1416, a high frequency support mode end command is set, and then the main operation port control process is terminated. The high frequency support mode end command is transmitted to the notification/presentation control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/presentation control device 140 switches the display presentation mode based on receiving this command.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1407, the process of rewriting the stop image is executed in step S1410, and the process of each of the above steps S1411 to S1416 is executed, and then the control process for the main upper operating port is terminated. In the process of rewriting the stop result, the stop result is rewritten so that the image corresponding to the miss result is displayed as a stop.

Next, the control process for the lower operating port will be explained with reference to Figures 52 and 53.

(Control process for lower operating port)
As shown in FIG. 19, in the lower operation port control process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a game related to the lower operation port 83b is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lower operation port display section of the main display unit 87 is in a variable display to fixed display, that is, whether or not one game round is being played. This determination is made by determining whether or not a game round flag (variable display information) for the lower operation port is stored (stored) in a game round flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The game round flag for the lower operation port is stored when a variable display is started on the lower operation port display section, and is erased when the picture is displayed stationary and the fixed display ends.

If a game round is not in progress, a negative judgment is made in step S1601 and the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether a game round related to the upper operating port 83a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the upper operating port display section of the main display unit 87 is in the changing display to fixed display, that is, whether one game round is being played.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is judged whether or not the number of times the game is played related to the upper operating port 83a corresponds to a jackpot result. If a positive judgment is made in step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604. If a negative judgment is made in step S1603 or if a negative judgment is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1604. In step S1604, the process refers to the total reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632, and judges whether the reserved memory number CRN for the lower operating port, which is the number of reserved information stored in the reserved information storage area, is "0" or not. If the reserved memory number CRN for the lower operating port is "0", the process proceeds to step S1605. On the other hand, if the reserved memory number CRN for the lower operating port is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the lower operating port 83b, first the reserved memory count CRN for the lower operating port is decremented by 1. Then, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the lower operating port is moved to the second execution area, and the process of shifting the data stored in the memory area of the reserved area Rb for the lower operating port is executed.

This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first through fourth areas to the lower areas in order, clearing the data in the first area and shifting the data in each area from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, and the fourth area to the third area. Then, one of the lit LEDs in the hold number display for the lower operating port is turned off. In this light-off process, the LEDs in the hold lamp section for the lower operating port are turned off in order from the right, which is the opposite of the light-on process that is executed when hold information is added.

After the data setting process described above is performed, in step S1606, a change start process for the lower operating port (change start process for the lower operating port) is executed to start the changing display of the image on the main display unit 87 (main display section D) and the changing display of the image on the variable display unit (specifically, the second display unit), and then this game round control process is terminated.

Now, with reference to Figure 53, we will explain the lower operating port fluctuation start process in step S1606.

(Lower operating port fluctuation start processing)
In the lower operation port fluctuation start process, first, a win/loss determination process is executed in step S1701. In the win/loss determination process, a win/loss table for the lower operation port is referenced to determine whether the information for win/loss determination among the various information stored in the second execution area, that is, the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1, matches the jackpot numerical information described above. If the determination result in step S1701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1702 and the process proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the type determination information among the various information stored in the second execution area, i.e., the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 and the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information group corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the information group corresponding to the special jackpot result.

In step S1704, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (display section for the lower operating port) of the main display unit 87 in the relevant game round is specified from a stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in ROM 603, and the specified information is stored in RAM 604. A plurality of images to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S1704, information indicating the image corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in RAM 604. Also, in step S1704, information for the MPU 602 to specify whether the current game result is a normal jackpot result or a special jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of RAM 604. Specifically, if the result is a normal jackpot result, a normal jackpot flag is stored, and if the result is a special jackpot result, a special jackpot flag is stored.

After executing the setting process of step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the upper actuation port 83a is being executed. If a positive determination is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, a forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a game round (changing display of a pattern) related to the upper actuation port 83a is being executed, the game round (changing display of a pattern) related to the upper actuation port 83a is forcibly terminated midway based on this forced termination flag. More specifically, if a game round related to the lower actuation port 83b corresponds to a jackpot result and a game round (corresponding to a miss result) related to the upper actuation port 83a can be executed beyond the timing when the confirmation display is made in the game round, the game round related to the upper actuation port 83a is shortened and the game round related to the upper actuation port 83a is terminated together with the end of the game round related to the lower actuation port 83b. In such a case, the image displayed in a stopped state during the game round related to the upper operating port 83a will correspond to a losing result.

Returning to the explanation of step S1702, if the judgment result in step S1701 is a miss result, a negative judgment is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1707, a process for setting a stop result for a losing result is executed. Specifically, the image to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (display section for the lower operating port) of the main display unit 87 in the game round related to the start of the current fluctuation is identified from a stop result table for a losing result stored in advance in ROM 603, and the identified information is stored in RAM 604.

After the processing of step S1706 or step S1707 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, the process of setting the variable display time (display duration) is executed.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S1708, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S1709. The variable start command includes information on the variable display time. Here, as described above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach does not occur is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for when a reach occurs. Therefore, even if the variable start command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the notification/performance control device 140, which is the sub-side control device, can determine whether a reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the variable start command includes information indicating whether a reach has occurred. Note that the variable start command may also include information directly indicating whether a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process of step S1709, the process proceeds to step S1710, where the display for the lower operating port on the main display unit 87 starts to change, and then the process for starting the change for the lower operating port ends. In the process of step S1710, a play-turn flag for the lower operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This makes it possible to identify in subsequent processes that a play turn (e.g., a change display) related to the lower operating port 83b is currently being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 52, if a positive determination is made in step S1601, i.e., if it is determined that a game round related to the lower actuation port 83b is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a game round related to the upper actuation port 83a that corresponds to a jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S1608, the process proceeds to step S1609.

In step S1609, it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the variable display process is executed in step S1610, and then the lower operating port control process is terminated. In the variable display process in step S1610, the various LEDs that make up the lower operating port display unit are turned on and off, thereby causing the image to be displayed in a variable manner.

If positive stability is determined in step S1609, the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, a fluctuation end process is executed. In the fluctuation end process, the display of the main display unit 87 is controlled so that the image is stopped and displayed on the lower operating port display section in a previously determined manner.

In the next step S1613, a variation end command is set. The variation end command set in step S1613 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 140 in step S401 in the normal processing (Figure 28). Based on receiving the variation end command, the notification/presentation control device 140 executes processing to end the presentation for that game round. In addition, by receiving the variation end command, the notification/presentation control device 140 causes the combination of patterns corresponding to the game result of that game round to be displayed as a final display (final stop display) on the second display unit of the variable display unit 500Z. Note that the variation end command may not be sent, and the notification/presentation control device 140 may be configured to end the presentation for the game round on its own.

After executing the process of step S1613, the process proceeds to step S1614, where the game count counter is updated. The game count counter is a counter for specifying the number of games to continue the high frequency support mode in the second normal game state, and is decremented by "1" each time a game is executed. If the game count counter becomes "0", a positive judgment is made in step S1615, and the process proceeds to step S1616. In step S1616, the high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area of RAM 604 is erased. In the following step S1617, a high frequency support mode end command is set, and then the control process for the lower operating port is terminated. The high frequency support mode end command is transmitted to the notification/presentation control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 28). In the notification/presentation control device 140, the display presentation mode is switched based on the reception of this command.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1608, the process of rewriting the stop image is executed in step S1611, and the process of each of the above steps S1612 to S1617 is executed, and then the control process for the main upper operating port is terminated. In the process of rewriting the stop result, the stop result is rewritten so that the image corresponding to the miss result is displayed as a stop.

As described above in detail, in this embodiment, the game round related to the upper actuation port 83a and the game round related to the lower actuation port 83b are configured to proceed simultaneously. However, there is a difference in the variable display time set for each game round depending on the game state, and the main target of the game progress changes depending on the game state. Below, we will provide additional explanation on the relationship between the game state and the variable display time with reference to Figure 54.

In the first normal game state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the variable display time set for the game round executed based on the ball entering the upper actuation port 83a is 1 to 20 seconds. In particular, for the game round corresponding to the miss result, the variable display time is set to be shorter as the number of reserved balls related to the upper actuation port 83a increases, so that it is possible to reduce the chance that the reserved information is not obtained even if a ball enters the upper actuation port 83a while the game progresses quickly. On the other hand, the variable display time set for the game round executed based on the ball entering the lower actuation port 83b is a uniform 600 seconds. In other words, the variable display time is 600 seconds regardless of whether the lottery result is a big win result or a miss result. In this way, in the first normal game state, the game round related to the upper actuation port 83a will proceed preferentially.

In contrast, in the second normal game state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and in the third normal game state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the relationship of the variable display time set is the opposite to that in the first normal game state. In other words, the variable display time set for the game round executed based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a is a uniform 600 sec. In other words, the variable display time is 600 sec regardless of whether the lottery result is a jackpot result or a miss result. On the other hand, the variable display time set for the game round executed based on the ball entering the lower operating port 83b is 1 to 10 sec. In particular, for the game round corresponding to a miss result, a difference is set so that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number of reserved balls related to the lower operating port 83b increases, and it is possible to reduce the chances that reserved information is not obtained even though a ball has entered the lower operating port 83b while the game is progressing quickly. In this way, in the second and third normal game states, the game round related to the lower operating port 83b will proceed preferentially.

In this embodiment, the lottery result is notified by the symbol displayed by the first display unit, and the lottery result is notified by the symbol displayed by the second display unit. The side lights of each display unit are switched on and off in accordance with the change in the main game progress target according to each game state. The relationship between the game state and the light emission mode will be described below with reference to Figures 55 and 56.

In the first normal game state, in which the game progresses mainly based on balls entering the upper operating port 83a, the side light 528Z of the first display unit and the side light 728Z of the second display unit are basically kept on (see FIG. 55). In the first normal game state, the rotating body 725Z of the second display unit is kept in a state in which the above-mentioned beach background faces the front of the gaming machine, and the pattern corresponding to the upper operating port 83a is variably displayed in front of the beach background. In other words, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the pattern of the first display unit and the background of the second display unit can be seen.

In contrast, in the second and third normal game states in which the game progresses mainly based on balls entering the lower operating port 83b, the side light 528Z of the first display unit is basically kept off, and the side light 728Z of the second display unit is kept on (see FIG. 55). In these game states, with some exceptions, the symbols on the first display unit are hidden, and are configured not to interfere with the visibility of the symbols displayed by the second display unit. In other words, basically, only the symbols on the second display unit are visible, as shown in FIG. 56(b).

In the special game state, the symbol combination that triggered the transition to the special game state continues to be displayed. In other words, if the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed frozen on the first display unit, the background is hidden and the symbol combination continues to be displayed, and if the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed frozen on the second display unit, the symbol combination continues to be displayed.

Here, the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 executes control processing for game times as part of regular processing. The control processing for game times includes display processing for the upper actuation port corresponding to game times based on balls entering the upper actuation port 83a, and display processing for the lower actuation port corresponding to game times based on balls entering the lower actuation port 83b. Below, the display processing for the upper actuation port is explained with reference to Figures 57 to 59.

In the first normal game state, the side light 528Z for the first display unit is basically kept on and the side light 728Z for the second display unit is basically kept on, and in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the side light 528Z for the first display unit is basically kept off and the side light 728Z for the second display unit is basically kept on.

(Display processing for upper operating port)
As shown in FIG. 57, in the upper operating port control process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state is in progress. If the determination in step S1801 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1801, a main control process for the upper operating port is executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S1801, a special control process for the upper operating port is executed in step S1803.

(Main control process for upper operating port)
As shown in Fig. 58, in the main control process for the upper actuation port, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is time to display the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result in the game related to the lower actuation port 83b as a final stop display. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not a game turn related to the upper operating port 83a is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a game turn related to the upper operating port 83a. If a negative determination is made in step S1903, the main processing for the upper operating port is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1904.

In step S1904, drive control start processing for the first display unit is executed. This causes drive signals to be output to each motor 526Z constituting the first display unit, and each rotating body 525Z starts operating. In the following step S1905, light emission control processing for the side lights 528 of the first display unit is executed. This causes the power supply to continue if power is already being supplied to the side lights 528, and if power supply to some or all of the side lights 528 is not being supplied, power supply to those side lights 528 is started.

Returning to the explanation of step S1902, if a positive judgment is made in step S1902, i.e., if a game round related to the upper operating port 83a is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not it is time to display the confirmed symbol combination in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a. If a positive judgment is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907.

In step S1907, a stop control process for the first display unit is executed. As a result, all of the rotating bodies 525Z that make up the first display unit are stopped, and the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as still. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1908, and light emission and drive control process for the first display unit while it is fluctuating is executed. As a result, the left and right symbol rows are displayed as still and transition to a reach display, or the middle symbol row is changed in a special way. The specific flow of the display performance in this case is the same as in the first embodiment described above.

Returning to the explanation of step S1901, if a positive judgment is made in step S1901, that is, if it is time to confirm and display the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the lower actuation port 83b, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, a light-off control process is executed to turn off all of the side lights 528Z for the first display unit. In other words, if the game round related to the lower actuation port 83b progresses during the first normal game state and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed statically on the second display unit, the symbols on the first display unit are hidden, and the structure is such that it does not interfere with the visibility of the symbol combination displayed by the second display unit behind it.

Then, in step S1910, a forced stop control process is executed to stop the display of each rotating body 525Z of the first display unit. When each rotating body 525Z is forced to stop, the combination of light emitting parts 553Z corresponding to the miss result is stopped in the variable display area, but because the supply of light from the side light 528Z was stopped in step S1909, these light emitting parts 553Z do not emit light.

(Special control process for upper operating port)
Next, the special control process for the upper actuation port, which is executed when the game is in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, in which the game progresses based on the ball entering the lower actuation port 83b, will be described. As shown in Fig. 59, in the special control process for the upper actuation port, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to display the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result in the game round related to the lower actuation port 83b as a final stop display. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not a game turn related to the upper operating port 83a is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a game turn related to the upper operating port 83a. If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the special control process for the upper operating port is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2003, the drive control start process for the first display unit is executed in step S2004, and then the special control process for the main upper operating port is terminated. The drive control start process for the first display unit starts the output of drive signals to each motor 526Z for the first display unit, and each rotating body 525Z starts operating. However, since the side light 528 for the first display unit is maintained in an off state, the pattern on the first display unit remains hidden. In other words, each rotating body 525Z spins freely.

Returning to the explanation of step S2002, if a positive determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the final display of the symbol combination is being performed in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a. If a negative determination is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2006, it is determined whether it is time to confirm and display (final stop display) the symbol combination in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a. If a negative determination is made in step S2006, a drive control process for when the first display unit is fluctuating is executed in step S2010. This controls the rotation/stop of each rotating body 525. However, even in this case, the side light 528 for the first display unit is turned off, so the symbol remains undisplayed.

If a positive determination is made in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, a stop control process for the first display unit is executed. If the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the light emitting unit 553Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on one of the activated lines L1 to L5, and if the current game round corresponds to a loss result, the light emitting unit 553Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the loss result is stopped on one of the activated lines L1 to L5.

In the following step S2008, it is determined whether or not the current game result corresponds to a jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S2008, the special control process for the top operating port is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009, where light emission control process for the side light 528Z for the first display unit is executed. As a result, light is supplied from the side light 528Z only to the light emitting portion 553Z on the line on which the jackpot symbol combination is formed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result suddenly appears on the first display unit.

Returning to the explanation of step S2005, if a positive judgment is made in step S2005, i.e., if the final display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is judged whether the final display period has elapsed and it is time to end the final display. If a negative judgment is made in step S2011, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, it is judged whether the current game result is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2013, where the light emission extension control process is executed to extend the light emission of the side light 528 of the first display unit until the special game state ends.

As described above in detail, if a jackpot result is obtained in a play count related to the upper actuation port 83a during the second normal game state and the third normal game state, only that result is displayed on the first display unit, and the display will continue until the end of the special game state. In contrast, if a loss result is obtained in a play count related to the upper actuation port 83a during the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the spinning body 525Z will also be stopped according to that result, but the symbol combination corresponding to the loss result will remain hidden.

(Display processing for lower operating port)
Next, the control process for the lower operation port will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. As shown in Figure 60, in the control process for the lower operation port, first, in step S2101, the second normal gaming state or It is determined whether or not the third normal gaming state is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, a main control process for the lower operating port is executed in step S2102. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, In step S2103, special control processing for the lower operating port is executed.

(Main control process for lower operating port)
As shown in Fig. 61, in the main control process for the lower operating port, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not it is time to display the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result in the game related to the upper operating port 83a as a final stop display. If the determination in step S2201 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2202.

In step S2202, it is determined whether or not a game turn related to the lower operating port 83b is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a game turn related to the lower operating port 83b. If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the main processing for this lower operating port is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204.

In step S2204, the drive control start process for the second display unit is executed. This causes a drive signal to be output to each motor 726Z constituting the second display unit, causing each rotating body 725Z to start operating. As described above, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the side light 728Z of the second display unit is basically kept on, so that when the rotating body 725Z starts operating, the variable display of the symbols on the second display unit begins.

Returning to the explanation of step S2202, if a positive judgment is made in step S2202, i.e., if a game turn related to the lower operating port 83b is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not it is time to display the final symbol combination (final stop display) in the game turn related to the lower operating port 83b. If a positive judgment is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206.

In step S2206, a stop control process for the second display unit is executed. As a result, all of the rotating bodies 725Z that make up the second display unit are stopped, and the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2207, and a light emission and drive control process for the second display unit during fluctuation is executed. As a result, the left and right symbol rows are displayed as stopped and transition to a reach display, or the middle symbol row is changed in a special way. The specific flow of the display performance in this case is the same as that of the first embodiment described above.

Returning to the explanation of step S2201, if a positive judgment is made in step S2201, that is, if it is time to confirm and display the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the upper actuation port 83a, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2208, a light-off control process is executed to turn off all of the side lights 728Z for the second display unit. In other words, if the game round related to the upper actuation port 83a progresses during the second normal game state or the third normal game state, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed in a static manner on the first display unit, the symbols on the second display unit are hidden, preventing the player from being confused by excessive information provided to the player.

Then, in step S2209, a forced stop control process is executed to stop the display of each rotating body 725Z of the second display unit. When each rotating body 725Z is forced to stop, the combination of light emitting parts 753Z corresponding to the miss result is stopped in the variable display area, but these light emitting parts 753Z do not emit light because the supply of light from the side light 728Z has been stopped in step S2208.

(Special control processing for lower operating port)
Next, the special control process for the lower actuation port, which is executed when the game is in the first normal game state in which the game progresses based on the ball entering the upper actuation port 83a, will be described. As shown in Fig. 62, in the special control process for the lower actuation port, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to display the symbol combination corresponding to the big win result in the game round related to the upper actuation port 83a as a final stop display. If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not a game turn related to the lower operating port 83b is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2303, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a game turn related to the lower operating port 83b. If a negative determination is made in step S2303, the special control process for this lower operating port is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, special control processing of the side light of the second display unit is executed, and in the following step S2305, drive control processing of the second display unit is executed. This starts the output of drive signals to each motor 726Z for the second display unit, and each rotor 725Z starts operating. In this case, the background light emitter 753Z and the pattern light emitter 753Z pass through the variable display area at a predetermined cycle, and the supply of light from the side light 728Z is temporarily halted during the period when the pattern light emitter 753Z passes through the variable display area. This makes it appear as if the background is flashing when viewed by the player.

Returning to the explanation of step S2302, if a positive determination is made in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the final display of the symbol combination is being performed in the game round related to the lower operating port 83b. If a negative determination is made in step S2306, the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, it is determined whether it is time to display the symbol combination in the game round related to the lower actuation port 83b (final stop display). If a negative determination is made in step S2307, in step S2311, light emission and drive control processing for the second display unit during fluctuation is executed. As a result, the side lights 728Z are switched on/off depending on the rotation position of each rotor 725Z, the background is displayed flashing, and the symbols on the second display unit are not displayed. Note that when a game round related to the lower actuation port 83b is executed in the first normal game state, each rotor 725Z will stop when it is time to display the symbol combination without going through the reach display described above.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2307, the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, a stop control process for the second display unit is executed. If the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the light emitting unit 753Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on one of the activated lines L1 to L5, and if the current game round corresponds to a loss result, the light emitting unit 753Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the loss result is stopped on one of the activated lines L1 to L5.

In the following step S2309, it is determined whether or not the current game result corresponds to a jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S2309, the special control process for the lower operating port is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2309, the process proceeds to step S2310, where light emission control process for the side light 728Z for the second display unit is executed. As a result, light is supplied from the side light 728Z only to the light emitting portion 753Z on the line on which the jackpot symbol combination is formed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result suddenly appears on the second display unit.

Returning to the explanation of step S2306, if a positive judgment is made in step S2306, i.e., if the confirmation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2312. In step S2312, it is judged whether the confirmation display period has elapsed and it is time to end the confirmation display. If a negative judgment is made in step S2312, the process proceeds to step S2313. In step S2313, it is judged whether the current game result is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2313 and the light emission extension control process is executed to extend the light emission of the side light 728Z of the second display unit until the special game state ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S2301, if a positive judgment is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2315. In step S2315, a forced stop control process for the second display unit is executed. In other words, if a symbol combination that will result in a jackpot result is displayed as stopped in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a in the first normal game state, each rotating body 725Z is forced to stop for the second display unit as well. In this case, the second display unit is adjusted so that the combination of light emitting parts 753Z that corresponds to the jackpot result does not stop on any of the pay lines L1 to L5.

As described above in detail, if a jackpot result occurs in the play count related to the lower actuation port 83b during the first normal game state, only that result will be displayed on the second display unit, and this display will continue until the end of the special game state. In contrast, if a loss result occurs in the play count related to the lower actuation port 83b during the first normal game state, the spinning body 525Z will also be stopped in accordance with that result, but the symbol combination corresponding to the loss result will remain hidden.

When comparing the first normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode with the second and third normal game states corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the latter has a higher frequency of balls entering the operating port than the former. Taking this into consideration, the variable display time set in the second and third normal game states is shortened to facilitate smooth game progress. When comparing the arrangement of the light emitting parts 553Z (symbols) in the first display unit with the arrangement of the light emitting parts 753Z (symbols) in the second display unit, the former has one symbol per symbol row, whereas the latter has multiple symbols per symbol row. This is a device to shorten the time required for the set symbol to be stopped and displayed as much as possible, thereby improving the responsiveness of the symbol display during game progress.

The results of the lottery based on the ball entering the upper actuation port 83a are displayed on the first display unit, and the results of the lottery based on the ball entering the lower actuation port 83b are displayed on the second display unit. In this way, by providing a display unit for the upper actuation port 83a and a display unit for the lower actuation port 83b separately, the player can quickly understand which actuation port the game is progressing based on the ball entering. However, if a display unit is provided for each actuation port in this way, there is a concern that the burden on the player will increase and the lottery results will be overlooked more often due to the scattering of places that require attention. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, since one display unit is configured to be visible through the other display unit, the amount of movement of the line of sight between the display units can be reduced. Therefore, while providing a separate display unit for each actuation port enhances uniqueness, the occurrence of the various inconveniences caused by it can be suitably suppressed. This can suitably enhance the effect of increasing attention to the game.

The display section of the first display unit and the display section of the second display unit are parallel. This prevents a large difference in visibility between the pattern display in the first display unit and the pattern display in the second display unit.

The pattern changing display area in the first display unit and the pattern changing display area in the second display unit overlap front to back. With this configuration, when a player is focusing on one display unit and the pattern changing display is performed on the other display unit, the chances that the changing display will be overlooked can be reduced without making the presentation flashy or adding unnecessary accents. Furthermore, by overlapping the positions (effective lines) where the pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result is displayed statically on the first and second display units, it is possible to easily identify which pattern combination corresponds to the current lottery result even in a configuration in which multiple patterns are displayed statically.

As described above, in a configuration in which the stop display positions (effective lines) and variable display areas are overlapped front to back, the group of patterns displayed on each display unit can be made different in appearance, thereby improving the ability to distinguish which display unit has the pattern displayed. In particular, in a configuration in which the effective lines are aligned front to back, the patterns on the first display unit and the patterns on the second display unit are mixed together, which preferably avoids the situation in which, for example, a pattern combination corresponding to a losing result is displayed on each display unit, but the pattern combination appears to be displayed as if it were a jackpot result.

In the variable display mode in the first normal game state, the pattern in the second display section is basically hidden, and in the variable display mode in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the pattern in the first display section is basically hidden. With this configuration, confusion between the display in the first display section and the display in the second display section can be effectively suppressed.

In a configuration in which the lotteries by each lottery means are performed in parallel, there is a possibility that a lottery based on winning the lower operating port 83b during the first normal game state will result in a jackpot result, or a lottery based on winning the upper operating port 83a during the second normal game state and the third normal game state will result in a jackpot result. In such a case, it is possible to configure the winning result to be notified by using a display unit other than the display unit on the winning side, but this may be a cause of confusion for the player. On the other hand, if a changing pattern display is performed in the process leading up to the display of the lottery result, the changing pattern display will overlap on both display units, and the player will be provided with too much information. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if a jackpot result is obtained in a lottery based on a winning entry into the upper actuation port 83a during the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the first display unit displays a frozen pattern corresponding to the winning result, and if a jackpot result is obtained in a lottery based on a winning entry into the lower actuation port 83b during the first normal game state, the second display unit displays a frozen pattern corresponding to the winning result, thereby preferably preventing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

<Modification 1>
In the above third embodiment, the second display unit is given a background display function, but it is sufficient that it has at least the function of executing pattern display for a game round related to the lower operating port 83b, and the background display function can be omitted.

<Modification 2>
In the above third embodiment, the side light 728 of the second display unit is turned on during the first normal game state, but the side light 728 may be turned off during the first normal game state.

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, when one of the first and second display units displays a varying pattern, the other does not display a varying pattern (more specifically, does not supply light even if the rotating body rotates), but this is not limiting. It is also possible to display varying patterns in each display unit in parallel.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, whether or not to switch to the high probability mode is determined by a lottery based on the entry of balls into the actuation ports 83a and 83b. In the present embodiment, however, the high probability mode is switched to when a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section provided in the variable winning device 82 during the special game state triggered by the lottery based on the entry of balls into the actuation ports 83a and 83b. This is a difference from the first embodiment in that the configuration of the right route of the game area PE is partially devised to match such differences in gameplay. Specifically, the configuration of the first embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment in that the game mechanism 800 is provided, which is composed of a distribution unit 810 built into the variable winning device 82 arranged in the right route and a stage unit 830 arranged in the right route upstream (diagonally above) of the variable winning device 82. The game mechanism 800 will be described below with reference to Figures 63 to 66. Fig. 63 is a schematic diagram showing the game mechanism 800, Fig. 64 is a schematic diagram showing the stage part of the sorting unit 810 from above, Fig. 65 is a schematic diagram showing various states of the sorting unit, and Fig. 66 is a schematic diagram showing the stage unit 830. In Fig. 63, for convenience of explanation, the sorting unit 810 and the stage unit 830 are drawn side by side.

(Sorting unit 810)
First, the distribution unit 810 shown on the right side of FIG. 63 will be described. The distribution unit has a stage portion 811 formed so that the game balls can roll. The stage portion 811 has a first ball entrance 812, a second ball entrance 813, and a third ball entrance 814 formed as entrances through which the game balls can pass (see FIG. 64). Each of these ball entrances 812-814 is open upward and is slightly larger than the game ball. The first ball entrance 812 is connected to the first branch passage portion 818, which is a passage on the disadvantageous side, through the first communication passage 815, and the second ball entrance 813 is also connected to the first branch passage portion 818 through the second communication passage 816. On the other hand, the third ball entrance 814 is connected to the second branch passage portion 819 (the above-mentioned advantageous ball entrance portion), which is a passage on the advantageous side, through the third communication passage 817.

If a game ball enters the first branch passage 818 during the special game state, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. In contrast, if a ball enters the second branch passage 819 during the special game state, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player and the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode in the normal game state to which the game state transitions after the special game state ends. In this way, since the second branch passage 819 is given a higher advantage than the first branch passage 818 to give the player an advantage, it is assumed that the player will play in the hope that the game ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 82 will enter the third ball entrance 814.

The stage section 811 slopes downward toward each of the ball entrances 812-814, and the ball will enter one of the ball entrances 812-814 as it rolls along the slope on the stage section 811. The stage section 811 is surrounded by the wall of the housing of the variable winning device 82. This prevents a game ball that reaches the stage section 811 from leaving the stage section 811 through any other than the ball entrances 812-814.

The distribution unit 810 is provided with a movable body 821 as a restricting means for restricting the entry of balls into the first ball inlet 812 and the second ball inlet 813. The movable body 821 has a base portion 822 located below the stage portion 811, and a first columnar portion 823 and a second columnar portion 824 standing upward from the base portion 822.

The tip of the first columnar portion 823 is inserted into the first communication passage 815 from below, and the top surface 823a of the first columnar portion 823 forms part of the bottom surface of the first communication passage 815. Similarly, the tip of the second columnar portion 824 is inserted into the second communication passage 816 from below, and the top surface 824a of the second columnar portion 824 forms part of the bottom surface of the second communication passage 816.

The movable body 821 is held by the housing of the variable winning device 82 so that it can be raised and lowered. When the movable body 821 is waiting in the lower limit position shown in FIG. 65(a), game balls can enter the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813, and the probability that a game ball that reaches the stage portion 811 will enter the advantageous third ball entrance 814 is approximately 1/3.

In contrast, when the movable body 821 is waiting at the upper limit position shown in FIG. 65(b), balls are restricted from entering the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813. Specifically, the rolling surface of the stage portion 811 is complemented by the upper surfaces 823a, 824a of the columnar portions 823, 824, and game balls rolling toward the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813 pass through the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813. As a result, the probability that a game ball that reaches the stage portion 811 will enter the third ball entrance 814 on the advantageous side is approximately 1/1.

One of the features of this embodiment is that when the movable body 821 moves to the upper limit position, the waiting period during which the movable body 821 waits at the upper limit position is diversified by using the stage unit 830. The stage unit 830 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 63, the stage unit 830 has a stage portion 831 on which the game balls roll, similar to the distribution unit 810, and is configured so that some of the game balls flowing down the right route, more specifically, game balls that flow into a special ball entrance 88 arranged on the right route, are guided to the stage portion 831.

The stage portion 831 is shaped like a mortar, sloping gently downwards towards its center, and a central opening 832 that opens upwards is formed in the center (see FIG. 56(b)). The game ball guided to the stage portion 831 approaches the central opening 832 while rotating around the central opening 832, and flows into the central opening 832.

The central opening 832 constitutes the entrance of the discharge passage 833 for game balls in the stage section 831. The discharge passage 833 extends vertically, and game balls that pass through the discharge passage 833 flow into a guide passage 836 provided below the discharge passage 833, and are guided via the guide passage 836 to a position directly above the variable winning device 82. In other words, even among game balls that are launched to the right route and pass through the stage unit 830, there is still a chance that they can enter the variable winning device 82.

The stage unit 830 is held so that it can rise and fall vertically, similar to the movable body 821, and the upper and lower limit positions are determined by a stopper 834 attached to the stage unit 830. Although not shown in the figure, the stage unit 830 is biased to the upper limit position by a biasing means (more specifically, a spring member), and is configured to wait at the upper limit position when no game ball is placed on the stage portion 831. However, when at least one game ball is placed on the stage portion 831, the weight of the game ball causes the stage unit 830 to descend against the biasing force of the biasing means. Note that movement beyond the lower limit position is prevented by the stopper 834.

The movable body 821 and stage unit 830 of the sorting unit 810 shown in this embodiment are connected via a link member 840. The link member 840 is rotatably supported at an intermediate position between the movable body 821 and the stage unit 830, and rotates around this support point (central axis CL2). The support point is set biased toward the movable body 821. This is a measure to reduce the force required to raise and lower the movable body 821.

When the stage unit 830 located at one end of the link member 840 descends, the movable body 821 located at the other end of the link member 840 rises in conjunction with it. In contrast, when the stage unit 830 rises, the movable body 821 descends in conjunction with it. Here, the flow of play in the special play state will be illustrated with reference to Figures 67 and 68.

When the special game state is entered, the variable winning device 82 is opened, and the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the large winning opening. The game balls that flow into the large winning opening are guided to the stage section 811 of the distribution unit 810.

As shown in FIG. 67, when there are no game balls on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 (when the balls are not stationary), the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813 of the distribution unit 810 are open, and the probability of the ball entering the third ball entrance 814 on the advantageous side is approximately 1/3.

When a game ball is placed on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830, the stage unit 830 is pushed down to the lower limit position by the game ball, and in conjunction with this, the movable body 821 of the distribution unit 810 moves to the upper limit position. In this state, as shown in FIG. 68, it is not possible for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 812 or the second ball entrance 813, and the entry destinations for the ball are essentially narrowed down to the third ball entrance 814. In other words, the probability of the ball entering the third ball entrance 814, which is the advantageous side, becomes 1/1, albeit temporarily.

As shown in Figures 68 to 67, when the game ball located on the stage portion 831 leaves the stage unit 830 through the central opening 832, the stage unit 830 returns to its upper limit position due to the above-mentioned biasing force. In conjunction with this, the movable body 821 returns to its lower limit position, and the support of the ball entering the third ball entrance 814 by the movable body 821 ends.

Here, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 is eventually discharged from the stage portion 831 through the central opening 832, but the length of time the ball stays there varies. In other words, the length of time the ball stays there varies depending on subtle differences in the moving speed when it reaches the stage portion 831 and the landing position. For this reason, the length of time the movable body 821 supports the ball's entry into the third ball entrance 814 varies.

The stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 shown in this embodiment is configured to allow multiple game balls to roll (reside) at the same time, and the central opening 832 is large enough to prevent multiple game balls from passing through at the same time. As a result, the period of ball entry support is extended when multiple game balls are placed on the stage portion 831. Therefore, in the special game state, the game is played in the hope that as many game balls as possible will be guided to the stage portion 831.

In the distribution unit 810 shown in this embodiment, when a game ball is placed on the upper surfaces 823a, 824a, the weight of the game ball causes the movable body 821 to descend, which may shorten the support period. However, the area of the stage portion 831 is larger than the total area of the upper surfaces 823a, 824a of the columnar portions 823, 824 of the movable body 821. This prevents the above-mentioned phenomenon from occurring frequently.

When a game ball is placed on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830, the movable body 821 of the sorting unit 810 is displaced from the lower limit position to the upper limit position, and when the game ball leaves the stage portion 831, the movable body 821 returns from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. Here, the length of time that the game ball stays on the stage portion 831 varies depending on the rolling manner of the game ball on the stage portion 831 (for example, the rolling direction and rolling speed of the game ball). In other words, the length of time that the movable body 821 is at the upper limit position depends on the above-mentioned length of time. In this way, the movement of the game mechanism 800 is prevented from becoming monotonous, which contributes to increasing attention to the game.

The movable body 821 is displaced to the lower limit position/upper limit position in conjunction with the raising and lowering movement of the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830. Here, by making the movement direction of the stage portion 831 up and down, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the game ball from changing due to the movement of the stage portion 831. This is preferable in terms of mitigating bias in the waiting period during which the game ball waits on the stage portion 831.

In a configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to raise and lower the stage unit 830, the driving force depends on the weight of the game ball. As shown in this embodiment, the stage unit 830 is disposed at one end of the rotatably held link member 840, and the movable body 821 is disposed at the other end, and the stage unit 830 and the movable body 821 are configured to move up and down in a staggered manner, thereby reducing output transmission loss. This is preferable in terms of increasing the reliability of the operation of the game mechanism 800, assuming that the driving force is small.

The stage portion 831 is formed so that multiple game balls can roll simultaneously. As described above, in a configuration in which the weight of the game balls is used as the power to displace the movable body 821, the displacement speed (responsiveness) can be changed depending on the number of game balls that can be positioned on the stage portion 831. This configuration in which the responsiveness changes depending on the number of game balls can contribute to further diversifying the period during which the movable body 821 is maintained at the upper limit position.

The discharge passage 833 formed in the stage unit 830 extends vertically from the central opening 832 to form a vertical passage. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the stage unit 830 from being pushed by a game ball passing through the discharge passage 833, which can delay the return of the stage unit 830 to the standby position. This contributes to improving responsiveness when displacing the movable body 821 to the lower limit position/upper limit position.

The central opening 832 is large enough that multiple game balls cannot pass through at the same time. Therefore, when multiple game balls roll on the stage portion 831, the game balls leave the stage portion 831 one by one, preventing them from leaving all at once. This makes it possible to diversify the period (e.g., the action period) during which the movable body 821 waits at the upper limit position depending on the number of game balls positioned on the stage portion 831.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, when the movable body 821 is placed at the upper limit position, the upper surfaces 823a, 824a of the columnar parts 823, 824 are configured to complement the rolling surface of the game ball on the stage part 811, but this is not limited to the above. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of Fig. 69, when the movable body 821A is placed at the upper limit position, the columnar parts 823A, 824A can be configured to protrude above the rolling surface of the game ball on the stage part 811. This makes it possible to reduce the chance of the game ball landing on the upper surfaces 823aA, 824aA of the columnar parts 823A, 824A while restricting the entry of the ball into the ball entrances 812A, 813A.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the moving direction (vertical direction) of the movable body 821 of the distribution unit 810 and the moving direction (vertical direction) of the stage unit 830 are aligned, but this is not limited to the above. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 70, it is possible to add a shutter 825B that opens and closes the ball entrance 812B and a biasing means that biases the shutter 825B to a closed position, and to configure the shutter 825B to slide from the closed position to the open position against the biasing force of the biasing means as the movable body 821B rises. With this configuration, even if a game ball is placed on the shutter 825B, it is possible to avoid the movable body 821B being pushed down by the weight of the ball.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the game ball that entered the special ball entrance 88 arranged on the right route is guided to the stage unit 830 (stage section 831). In order to increase the variation in the moving speed of the game ball guided to the stage section 831, it is preferable to incline the communication passage 88bC connecting the special ball entrance 88C and the stage section 831, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 71. A difference in behavior occurs between when the game ball flows in from the same side as the inclination direction with respect to the opening 88aC of the special ball entrance 88C and when the game ball flows in from the opposite side to the inclination direction. Since the momentum of the inflow of the game ball is less likely to be reduced in the former case than in the latter case, the difference in the moving speed when the game ball reaches the stage section 831 can be made more noticeable. This is preferable in terms of increasing the width of the support period by the movable body 821.

In addition, in order to provide a difference in the moving speed, the above-mentioned communication passage 88bC can be modified as follows. That is, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 72(a), the communication passage 88bD is branched into a first branch passage 88cD and a second branch passage 88dD at a midway position, and a distribution means 88gD that distributes the game balls to the first branch passage 88cD and the second branch passage 88dD is disposed at the branching position. Then, deceleration units 88eD, 88fD that decelerate the game balls are disposed in the first branch passage 88cD and the second branch passage 88dD, respectively, to create a difference in the moving speed of the game balls when they pass through each branch passage 88cD, 88dD.

This concept may also be applied to the stage portion 831 to create differences in the duration of time the game ball stays in the stage portion 831 depending on the flow path.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 is shaped like a mortar to diversify the stay period of the game ball, but the specific configuration for providing a difference in the stay period is arbitrary. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 72(b1), it is also possible to provide a first flow path 88cE in which the passage period is relatively short and a second flow path 88dE in which the passage period is relatively long in the stage unit 830E, so that the stay period differs depending on the flow path through which the game ball passes. In this case, by allowing the game ball to move from one of the first flow path 88cE/the second flow path 88dE to the other, it is possible to contribute to further diversification of the stay period. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 72(b2), it is preferable to offset the first flow path 88cE above the second flow path 88dE, and then incline the rolling surface of the game ball in the first flow path 88cE downward toward the second flow path 88dE.

<Modification 5>
In the fourth embodiment, the stage unit 830 starts descending when one game ball is placed on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830, but the number of game balls that trigger the start of descent is not limited to this. For example, the stage unit 830 may start descending when two game balls are placed on it, or when three or more game balls are placed on it.

<Modification 6>
In the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which the mode is changed to a high probability mode based on a ball entering the third ball entrance 814 is illustrated, but it is sufficient that at least the ball entrances 812 to 814 have a difference in the degree of advantage, and it is also possible to configure the mode in which a round of play in the special game state is continued by a ball entering the third ball entrance 814. In addition, it is not necessary to apply the distribution unit to the variable winning device 82, and it may be provided separately from the variable winning device 82. In this case, it is also possible to configure the mode in which a lottery for a jackpot is executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813, and the jackpot is confirmed when the ball enters the third ball entrance 814.

<Modification 7>
In the fourth embodiment, the difference in the degree of advantage is set so that the third ball entrance 814 is more advantageous to the player than the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813, but this relationship can also be reversed. That is, the difference in the degree of advantage may be set so that the third ball entrance 814 is less advantageous to the player than the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813.

<Modification 8>
It is sufficient that the movable body is configured to be in an operating state for the period during which the game balls are staying on the stage unit 830, and the action does not necessarily have to be "distribution of game balls". For example, a configuration equivalent to the stage unit 830 may be applied to a movable decorative body for performance.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the game board unit is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, with reference to Figures 73 to 74, a game board unit 80F in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Figure 73 is a front view of the game board unit 80F, and Figure 74 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80F as seen from the front side.

(Game board unit 80F)
The play area PE provided in the play board unit 80F is roughly divided into a left route and a right route by the center frame 95, similar to the play board unit 80 shown in the first embodiment. The left route and the right route merge below the play area PE (the pattern display device 500F described later), and a ball entry unit 850F equipped with a lower operating port 859F is disposed at this merging portion. Although both the game ball launched to the left route and the game ball launched to the right route are configured to be able to enter the lower operating port 859F, the left route is favored over the right route in terms of ball entry probability. As a result, at least in the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, it is more advantageous to launch the game ball to the left route than to the right route in the game.

The lower actuation port 859F in this embodiment corresponds to the upper actuation port 83a shown in the first embodiment, but is located closer to the bottom and further back of the play area PE than the upper actuation port 83a, and therefore less visible when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. This is to make the effect gate 855F stand out in relation to the effect gate 855F described below, and to mimic the effect gate 855F as if it were the "actuation port" in this embodiment based on its function and appearance.

A right operating port 883F, which corresponds to the lower operating port 83b shown in the first embodiment, is provided on the right route. An electric device 891F is provided next to the right operating port 883F, and when the game ball passes through a through gate 884F, which is also provided on the right route, and wins the support lottery, the electric device 891F switches from a closed state to an open state, allowing the ball to enter the right operating port 883F.

Also, on the right route, variable winning devices 881F, 882F are provided, which switch from a non-accepting state to an accepting state when a lottery based on balls entering the lower operating port 859F and the right operating port 883F results in a jackpot and transitions to a special game state (open/close execution mode). This is similar to the first embodiment in that the configuration is such that prize balls are awarded to players when balls enter these variable winning devices 881F, 882F.

Now, we will explain the ball-scoring unit 850F with reference to Figures 75 to 77. Figure 75 is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 80F showing the ball-scoring unit 850F and its surroundings, Figure 76 is a perspective view of the ball-scoring unit as seen from the front side, and Figure 77 is an exploded perspective view of the ball-scoring unit.

As shown in FIG. 75, the right route starts at the windmill 94 arranged on the side of the center frame 95 (specifically, stage 96F) and splits into an upper route and a lower route. The lower route branches midway into a route heading toward the ball entry unit 850F and a route heading toward the general winning opening 81, and some of the game balls flowing down the upper route and the lower route (specifically, game balls that do not head toward the general winning opening 81) are discharged from the game area PE via the ball entry unit 850F.

As shown in Figures 76 and 77, the ball entry unit 850F is made up of a base body 851F on which various game components are mounted, front covers 852F, 853F that cover the base body 851F from the front of the game machine, and a rear cover 854F that covers the base body 851F from the rear of the game machine, which are combined front to back to form multiple flow paths for game balls to flow down, and the base body 851F is fixed to the game area forming body 310F, and is integrated with the game area forming body 310F in a state where it protrudes forward of the game machine through an opening formed in the game area forming body 310F.

The lower operating port 859F is disposed at the bottom of the ball entry unit 850F, and the ball entry unit 850F is provided with a center route (first route) leading to the lower operating port 859F and a side route (second route) leading to the outlet 89 as the flow path. The front covers 852F, 853F are transparent, and through these front covers 852F, 853F, it is possible to see the game balls passing through the inside of the ball entry unit 850F (for example, the center route or side route) and the various built-in game components.

A performance gate 855F is provided at the top of the ball entry unit 850F as the entrance to the center route. In this embodiment, only game balls that are allocated to the upper route (stage 96F) can pass through the performance gate 855F. As shown in FIG. 77, an upper crane 856F is provided below the performance gate 855F as a distribution means for distributing game balls.

The upper crown 856F is disk-shaped, and its upper surface is the rolling surface 871F on which the game balls roll. A first opening 873F and a second opening 874F are formed in the center of the upper crown 856F, which penetrate to the upper limit, and the rolling surface 871F is inclined slightly downward toward the first opening 873F and the second opening 874F. A peripheral wall portion 872F is provided on the outer periphery of the upper crown 856F, which stands upward from the rolling surface 871F, and prevents the game balls that reach the rolling surface 871F from flowing out from anywhere other than the first opening 873F and the second opening 874F. In other words, the game balls that reach the rolling surface 871F are configured to flow into either the first opening 873F or the second opening 874F.

The base body 851 is provided with a first branch passage section 864F through which game balls that flow into the first opening 873F pass, and a second branch passage section 865F through which game balls that flow into the second opening 874F pass. The first branch passage section 864F constitutes part of the center route, while the second branch passage section 865F constitutes part of the side route. In other words, some of the game balls that pass through the performance gate 855F move from the center route to the side route by passing through the second branch passage section 865F. The number of second openings 874F is greater than the number of first openings 873F, and more than half of the game balls that pass through the performance gate 855F move to the side route.

The outlet portion of the first branch passage portion 864F and the outlet portion of the second branch passage portion 865F are arranged side by side, with the former in the center and the latter on both the left and right sides, and an inlet 878F to the lower crane 857F is formed below the outlet portion of the first branch passage portion 864F. The lower crane 857F is disc-shaped like the upper crane 856F, and its upper surface is the rolling surface 875F on which the game ball can roll. A central opening 876F that penetrates from top to bottom is formed in the center of the lower crane 857F, and the rolling surface 875F is inclined slightly downward toward the central opening 876F. The rolling surface 875F is annular, and the game ball that reaches the rolling surface 875F through the inlet 878F rolls toward the central opening 876F while centering on the central opening 876F. The rolling surface 875F is formed so that the number of game balls that can simultaneously stay on the rolling surface 875F is greater than the number of balls reserved at the lower operating port 859F.

A peripheral wall portion 877F that rises upward from the rolling surface 875F is provided on the outer periphery of the lower crane 857F, preventing game balls that reach the rolling surface 875F from flowing out from anywhere other than the central opening 876F. The lower operating port 859F is disposed directly below the central opening 876F, and game balls that pass through the central opening 876F enter the lower operating port 859F. In other words, the game balls that flow into the inlet 878F (game balls that reach the rolling surface 875F) are configured to enter the lower operating port 859F.

Here, a non-electrical device 858F is disposed between the inlet 878F and the area where the outlets of the branch passages 864F and 865F are disposed, as a guide means (ball-entry assist means) to the inlet 878F. The non-electrical device 858F has a pair of left and right movable pieces that face each other across the flow path that connects the first branch passage 864F and the inlet 878F. Each movable piece is held so that it can rotate around the lower end of the movable piece, and the rotation switches the guide state of the non-electrical device 858F between a first guide state and a second guide state.

Below, with reference to Figure 78, we will provide additional explanation on the non-electric role 858F and the configuration related to the movement of the non-electric role 858F. Figure 78(a) is a schematic diagram of the non-electric role 858F when it is in the first guidance state, and Figure 78(b) is a schematic diagram of the non-electric role 858F when it is in the second guidance state.

The non-electric device 858F is connected to the lower crane 857F via a link mechanism 879F. The lower crane 857F is held so that it can be raised and lowered, and the base body 851F is provided with stoppers that define the upper and lower limit positions of the lower crane 857F. The base body 851F is equipped with a spring that urges the lower crane 857F to the upper limit position, and the urging force of this spring causes the lower crane 857F to wait at the upper limit position (hereinafter referred to as the waiting position).

When a game ball is placed on the lower crane 857F (rolling surface 875F), the lower crane 857F descends from the standby position to the lowest position (hereinafter referred to as the descended position) against the force of the spring. Note that the posture of the lower crane 857F is maintained constant at any position in the lifting and lowering section, so there is no occurrence of an event in which the movement of the game ball toward the central opening 876F is impeded due to a change in posture during descent.

When the lower wheel 857F is in the standby position, i.e., when there are no game balls on the rolling surface 875F, the non-electric device 858F is maintained in the first guide state. In the first guide state, game balls flowing out from the outlet of the first branch passage 864F are allowed to flow into the inlet 878F, whereas game balls flowing out from the outlet of the second branch passage 865F are prevented from flowing into the inlet 878F.

When a game ball is placed on the lower crane 857F and the lower crane 857F moves from the standby position to the lowered position, the non-electric device 858F switches from the first guidance state to the second guidance state in conjunction with the movement of the lower crane 857F. In the second guidance state, both the game ball flowing out from the outlet of the first branch passage 864F and the game ball flowing out from the outlet of the second branch passage 865F are allowed to flow into the inlet 878F. In other words, the flow path that is the target of the game ball flowing into the inlet 878F is temporarily expanded, and the game ball that passed through the above-mentioned performance gate 855F can flow into the inlet 878F regardless of whether it passed through the first opening 873F or the second opening 874F.

Here, when the non-electric device 858F is in the second guiding state, game balls flowing down other flow paths formed in the ball entrance unit 850F may also be guided to the inlet 878F. Below, referring again to FIG. 75, we will provide additional information about the other flow paths formed in the ball entrance unit 850F, and then we will explain other objects that are guided to the inlet 878F in the second guiding state.

The first guide passage section 861F is formed on the left and right sides of the upper cranes 856F in the ball entry unit 850F. The first guide passage section 861F constitutes part of the side route described above. The ball entry unit 850F also has a second guide passage section 862F that constitutes part of the lower route described above. The second guide passage section 862F also constitutes part of the side route, and merges with the first guide passage section 861F upstream of the exit portion of the second branch passage section 865F. Game balls that are distributed to the upper route and do not pass through the performance gate 855F and game balls that are distributed to the lower route are guided to the vicinity of the exit portion of the second branch passage section 865F via the side route.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 79(a), when the non-electric device 858F is in the first guide state, the movable piece of the non-electric device 858F functions as a partition that separates the side route and the center route. Therefore, none of the game balls that pass through the first guide passage portion 861F and the second guide passage portion 862F flow into the inlet 878F.

In contrast, when the non-electric device 858F is in the second guide state, as shown in FIG. 79(b), the movable piece of the non-electric device 858F protrudes toward the side route, and the side route and the center route are connected. In this state, game balls that have passed through the first guide passage section 861F and the second guide passage section 862F can also be guided to the inlet 878F by the non-electric device 858F. However, compared to game balls that flow out from the outlet portion of the second branch passage section 865F, the probability of guiding the ball to the inlet 878F is differentiated so that it is less likely to be guided.

In addition, for game balls that flow down the side route via the junction 863F, the probability of being guided to the inlet 878F varies depending on the path taken to reach the junction 863F, specifically, whether the balls pass through the first guide passage 861F or the second guide passage 862F. Specifically, the communication point where the communication occurs when the non-electric device 858F is in the second guide state is located on an extension of the junction 863F, and the slope that forms the rolling surface of the game balls at the junction 863F is formed to slope downward toward the communication point. However, a gap large enough for the game ball to pass through is secured between the slope and the communication point, and whether the game ball that flows down the slope can reach the communication point depends on the moving speed of the game ball.

In more detail, since the first guide passage section 861F extends vertically, the game ball that flows down along the first guide passage section 861F slows down when it reaches the slope. Even if it is accelerated again on the slope, the percentage of the game ball that can reach a speed that can jump over the gap is relatively low. In contrast, since the second guide passage section 862F extends in the same direction as the slope (horizontal), the game ball that flows down along the second guide passage section 862F is accelerated again on the slope without losing momentum. Therefore, the percentage of the game ball that can reach a speed that can jump over the gap is relatively high. In this way, by making a difference in the probability of flowing into the inlet 878F depending on the flow path passed through, it is possible to contribute to increasing attention to the behavior of the game ball.

Next, we will explain the process of winning into the lower operating port 859F, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 80.

The game balls launched to the left route are sorted by the windmill 94 into the upper route and the lower route. When the game balls sorted into the upper route pass through the performance gate 855F and reach the upper crane 856F, there is a chance of winning at the lower operating port 859F. As shown in FIG. 80(a)→FIG. 80(b), the game balls on the upper crane 856F are sorted into the first branch passage section 864F (first opening 873F) and the second branch passage section 865F (second opening 874F).

As shown in Figure 80 (b) → Figure 80 (c), the game balls distributed to the first branch passage section 864F will flow into the inlet 878F and land on the lower crane 857F even if the guidance state of the non-electric device 858F is the first guidance state. When the lower crane 857F moves from the standby position to the lowered position due to the weight of the game ball, the non-electric device 858F switches from the first guidance state to the second guidance state in conjunction with this. In other words, before the preceding game ball B1 enters the lower operating port 859F, the probability of the ball entering the inlet 878F is temporarily increased, and the state transitions to a high ball entry probability state.

As shown in FIG. 80(d), while a game ball is placed on the lower crane 857F, the non-electric device 858F is maintained in the second guide state, and the subsequent game ball B3 that is distributed to the second branch passage portion 865F and the subsequent game ball B4 that is distributed to the second guide passage portion 862F also have a chance to flow into the inlet 878F.

Here, in this embodiment, when comparing a game ball heading to the non-electric role 858F via the lower route with a game ball heading to the non-electric role 858F via the upper route, a difference is provided so that the former takes less time than the latter. Therefore, when the preceding game ball reaches the lower crane 857F and the non-electric role 858F switches to the second guidance state, the game ball passing through the lower route will head to the non-electric role 858F more quickly than the game ball passing through the upper route, increasing the expectation of consecutive winning. There is a technical significance in generating a time advantage in generating/continuing consecutive winning for the game balls allocated to the lower route among the subsequent game balls (however, those passing through the upper crane 856F have an advantage in terms of winning probability) in that it is possible to increase attention to the game balls passing through the disadvantageous lower route.

When the following game balls B3 and B4 land on the lower crane 857F, even if the preceding game ball B1 leaves the lower crane 857F and enters the lower operating port 859F, the lower crane 857F will remain in the descended position, and the non-electric device 858F will also be maintained in the second guidance state. This causes the number of reserved balls related to the lower operating port 859F to increase all at once. After the reserved number reaches the upper limit, even if winning balls continue to enter the lower operating port 859F, the acquisition of new reserved ball information is restricted, so that the player's advantage is prevented from becoming excessively high.

After that, all the game balls leave the lower wheel 857F, which returns to the standby position, and in conjunction with this, the non-electric device 858F switches from the first guidance state to the second guidance state. This cancels the temporary high ball entry probability state related to the lower operating port 859F.

In this way, the ball entry unit 850F shown in this embodiment can bias winning into the lower operating port 859F. Now, with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 81, the change in the reserved number over time will be explained. In Figure 81, the change in the reserved number in this embodiment is illustrated by a solid line, and the change in the reserved number in the first embodiment is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

In this embodiment, when the game ball reaches the lower crane 857F and the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 859F is confirmed, the flow of subsequent game balls into the inlet 878F is facilitated. In other words, if the game ball continues to be shot toward the left route, when one game ball enters the lower operating port 859F, the probability of the subsequent game ball entering the lower operating port 859F increases dramatically, and consecutive entries into the lower operating port 859F (entries in which subsequent reserved information is obtained before the stored reserved information reaches 0) occur. This makes it easier for the reserved number related to the lower operating port 859F to reach the upper limit.

The probability of winning at the lower operating port 859F when the non-electric device 858F is in the first guiding state is lower than the probability of winning at the upper operating port 83a in a configuration in which the upper crane 856F and the non-electric device 858F are not provided, such as the upper operating port 83a shown in the first embodiment. In other words, the probability of winning is lower when the function that induces consecutive wins described above is removed. This configuration creates a bias (sharpness) in the winning at the lower operating port 859F.

In a configuration in which the display performance is performed by the symbol display device 500F based on winning at the lower operating port 859F, the longer the period during which the reserved number is 0, the longer the period during which the display performance is not performed (non-performance period). In this way, there is concern that the noticeable non-performance period will make it clear that no winning has occurred at the lower operating port 859F, which will reduce the player's motivation to play. One of the features of this embodiment is that it uses the above-mentioned performance gate 855F to prevent such inconvenience from occurring. Below, we will provide additional information on the electrical configuration of this embodiment, and then explain the above-mentioned measures.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 82, in this embodiment, a pattern display device 500F is provided instead of the variable display unit 500 shown in the first embodiment, and a display control device 910F is added to control the display contents of this pattern display device 500F.

The display control device 910F includes an MPU 912F, which is an element in which a program ROM 913F and a work RAM 914F are integrated into a chip, and a display control board 911F on which a video display processor (VDP) 915F, a character ROM 916F, and a video RAM 917F are mounted. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 913F and the work RAM 914F are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 912F, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 912F of the display control device 910F analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 140, or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the various commands received, to control the VDP 915F (specifically, generates internal commands for the VDP 915F). More specifically, the MPU 912F performs a process to identify the variable display pattern for each game round in the pattern display device 500F based on the commands sent from the notification/performance control device 140, as well as a process related to the reserved display, and performs drawing processing for the VDP 915F in response to the processing results. This causes various images to be displayed on the display screen 500aF of the pattern display device 500F.

The program ROM 913F is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 912F, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 914F is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 912F executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 914F.

The VDP915F is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 500F. The VDP915F is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP915F mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU912F, video RAM917F, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM917F from the character ROM916 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 500F.

The character ROM 916F serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the patterns displayed on the pattern display device 500F. This character ROM 916F holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot in the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 916F and have each character ROM 916F store image data, etc. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 916F to store JPEG format image data for background images stored in the program ROM 913F.

Video RAM 917F is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on pattern display device 500F, and the display content of pattern display device 500F is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 917F.

In addition, the main display unit (main display section) directly controlled by the main control device 162 is provided with a lower operation port display section that displays the lottery result based on winning at the lower operation port 859F, and a right operation port display section that displays the lottery result based on winning at the right operation port 883F. In the lower operation port display section, the winning at the lower operation port 859F is triggered to display a changing pattern, and as a result of stopping the changing display, the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the lower operation port 859F is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the lower operation port 859F is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the changing display is stopped in the lower operation port display section, and after a predetermined pattern is displayed as a stopping result, the above-mentioned opening/closing execution mode is transitioned to. In the right operation port display section, the winning at the right operation port 883F is triggered to display a changing pattern, and as a result of stopping the changing display, the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the right operation port 883F is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the right operating port 883F is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the variable display on the right operating port display unit will stop, and after a specified image is displayed as the stopped result, the system will transition to the opening/closing execution mode described above according to the result.

Incidentally, based on a winning entry into any of the operating ports 859F, 883F, a variable display is started in the corresponding operating port display section, and a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped, which corresponds to one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the variable display is performed in that single display area regardless of whether a winning entry into any of the operating ports 859F, 883F occurs, it is also possible to start the variable display in that single display area and count one game round as a variable display until the variable display is stopped with the predetermined stop result displayed.

Here, we will explain the configuration related to the changing display of the patterns for each game round and the contents of the changing display. In the following explanation, we will refer to Figure 83 as appropriate. Figure 83 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen 500aF of the pattern display device 500F.

The character ROM 916F of the display control device 910F stores in advance data for nine main patterns that combine numbers "1" to "9" with decorations such as characters resembling fish, data for secondary patterns that do not have numbers, and data for nine simple patterns that are made up of numbers "1" to "9."

As shown in FIG. 83, the display screen 500aF of the pattern display device 500F is provided with a variable display area that displays the various patterns described above. This variable display area is broadly divided into three areas: a first variable display area ME1, a second variable display area ME2, and a third variable display area ME3. The first variable display area ME1 is located at the top left of the display screen 500aF, the second variable display area ME2 is located at the top right of the display screen 500aF, and the third variable display area ME3 is located in the center of the display screen 500aF.

The first variable display area ME1 displays three pattern rows, left, center, and right. Each pattern row is composed of the above-mentioned simple patterns arranged in a predetermined order, and the patterns of each pattern row are displayed to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom) with periodicity. The first variable display area ME1 is linked to the pattern display in the lower operation port display section of the main display section, and the variable display of the patterns starts when the variable display of the patterns starts in the lower operation port display section, and ends (confirmation display starts) when the variable display of the patterns ends (confirmation display starts). The game result is notified to the player by displaying a pattern combination corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery related to the lower operation port display section. In this embodiment, if a jackpot result is obtained, a combination of simple patterns with the same numbers is displayed, and if a loss result is obtained, a combination of simple patterns in which at least one number of the three pattern rows is different from the numbers of the other pattern rows is displayed.

The second variable display area ME2 displays three pattern rows, left, center, and right. Each pattern row is composed of the above-mentioned simple patterns arranged in a predetermined order, and the patterns of each pattern row are displayed to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom) with periodicity. The second variable display area ME2 is linked to the pattern display in the right operating port display section of the main display section, and the pattern display starts when the pattern display starts in the right operating port display section, and ends when the pattern display ends (when the final display starts). The game result is notified to the player by displaying a pattern combination corresponding to the result of the winning/losing lottery related to the right operating port 883F. In this embodiment, for example, when a jackpot result is obtained, a combination of simple patterns with the same numbers is displayed, and when a losing result is obtained, a combination of simple patterns in which at least one number of the three pattern rows is different from the numbers of the other pattern rows is displayed.

The display content in the third variable display area ME3 varies depending on the game state. Figure 83(a) shows an example of the display content in a normal game state corresponding to a low frequency support mode and a low probability mode (hereinafter referred to as the first normal game state), and Figure 83(b) shows an example of the display content in a normal game state corresponding to a high frequency support mode and a high probability mode (hereinafter referred to as the second normal game state).

Details will be given later, but in the first normal game state, a girl character is displayed in the third variable display area ME3, and the lottery result is clearly indicated by the movement of this character. In the first normal game state, the lottery result based on winning at the lower operating port 859F is announced using the pattern row in the first variable display area ME1 and the character in the third variable display area ME3.

In the second normal game state, three pattern rows, an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row, are set in the third variable display area ME3. Each pattern row is configured with main and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. In the third variable display area ME3, the patterns in each of these pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner, scrolling periodically in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper pattern row, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In the lower pattern row, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In other words, the upper and lower pattern rows are composed of 18 patterns. In contrast, in the middle pattern row, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main pattern of "4" additionally arranged between the main pattern of "9" and the main pattern of "1", with one sub-pattern between each of these main patterns. In other words, the middle pattern row alone is composed of 20 patterns, with 10 main patterns arranged.

In addition, in the third variable display area ME3, three symbols are displayed in each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3x3 format. In addition, five active lines are set in the third variable display area ME3, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5. The variable display stops in the order of the top symbol row → the bottom symbol row → the middle symbol row, and when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on any of the active lines, the variable display of all symbol rows ends, indicating that a jackpot has been reached.

In the second normal game state, the results of the jackpot lottery based on winning the right operation port 883F are announced using the pattern rows in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3.

In addition, in the third variable display area ME3, display effects such as reach display are executed. In contrast, in the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2, all symbols are displayed simultaneously and stopped when moving from the variable display to the fixed display, and display effects such as the reach display are not executed. In other words, the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2 are similar to the third variable display area ME3 in that they have the function of notifying the game result, but differ from the third variable display area ME3 in that the process leading up to notifying the game result is simplified.

Incidentally, the manner in which the pattern display device 500F changes is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the changing display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows can be set to be arranged vertically, and the direction of the changing display of the patterns in the pattern rows can be set to be horizontal.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the display mode on the display screen 500aF is identified by the notification/performance control device 140 with reference to commands from the main control device 162, and the details of the display mode are determined by the display control device 910F based on the identification results. Here, the variable display control processing executed as part of the regular processing by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 84 to 86. The variable display control processing is composed of a variable display control processing for the first/second variable display area and a variable display control processing for the third variable display area.

(Variable display control process for first/second variable display area)
In the variable display control process for the first/second variable display area, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not a game is being played, that is, whether or not the variable display of the patterns for one game is being executed in the first variable display area ME1 or the second variable display area ME2 of the pattern display device 500F. If it is determined that a game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S2402, where it is determined whether or not a variable command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S2402, the variable display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2402, a process for starting the variable display is executed in step S2403, and then the variable display control process is terminated. In the process for starting the variable display, the variable display mode of the patterns and the pattern combination to be displayed as confirmed are determined.

Returning to the explanation of step S2401, if a positive judgment is made in step S2401, i.e., if it is judged that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2404. In step S2404, it is judged whether or not a variation end command sent from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step S2404, the variable display control process is terminated after execution of a variable in progress process in step S2405. The variable in progress process is a process for varying the pattern displayed in the first variable display area ME1 or the second variable display area ME2 that corresponds to the current game round during the game round started by the variable start process.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2406, where a process for ending the variation is executed, and then this variation display control process is terminated. In the process for ending the variation, the variable display of the patterns is terminated (stopped to a fixed state) in accordance with the lottery result for that game round. Thereafter, this variation end process is terminated.

(Variable display control process for third variable display area)
In the variable display control process for the third variable display area, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the first normal game state. If it is the first normal game state, a positive determination is made in step S2501, and the process proceeds to step S2502 to execute the process for the first normal game state. If it is the second normal game state, a negative determination is made in step S2501, and the process proceeds to step S2503 to execute the process for the second normal game state.

(Processing for the second normal gaming state)
In the second normal game state process, first, it is determined whether a game turn is in progress, i.e., whether the variable display of the patterns for one game turn is being executed in the third variable display area ME3 of the pattern display device 500F. If it is determined that a game turn is not in progress, it is determined whether a variable command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If a variable command has not been received, this variable display control process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if a variable command has been received, this variable display control process is terminated after executing the process for starting the variable.

If a game is in progress, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation end command sent from the main control device 162 has been received. If a fluctuation end command has not been received, the second normal game state processing is terminated after executing the fluctuation in progress processing. The fluctuation in progress processing is processing for executing various effects and changing the determined effects during the game round started by the fluctuation start processing.

If a variation end command has been received, the variation end process is executed and then the second normal game state process is terminated. In the variation end process, the pattern variation display and the currently being performed presentation are terminated (determined and stopped) in accordance with the lottery result for that game round. Specifically, the patterns are controlled to be definitively stopped in the third variation display area ME3. In this process, the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to perform the presentation corresponding to the definitive stop. Then, the variation end process is terminated.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given on the process for starting the fluctuation in the second normal game state process. In the process for starting the fluctuation, first, the currently received command for the fluctuation is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. In addition, as already explained, when a command for the fluctuation is transmitted from the main control device 162, a type command is also transmitted together. The type command received together with the currently received command for the fluctuation is read, and information on the game result, such as information on the result of a guaranteed jackpot, information on the result of a normal jackpot, or information on a miss result, is identified from the above-mentioned identified information. Then, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won, and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the above-mentioned identified information, and the identified information is stored in the register of the MPU 652. Next, based on the identified information, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a performance setting process for the jackpot is executed.

The jackpot performance setting process determines the stopping result of the jackpot symbols (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, if the result is a special jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be the stopping result for the current game round, where the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols marked with odd numbers) is formed on one active line. Also, if the result is a normal jackpot, the stopping result for this game round is determined to be the stopping result for the current game round, where the combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols marked with even numbers) is formed on one active line.

The type of main pattern and the active line that are stopped and displayed when a jackpot result is reached are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 653 store each active line and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 654. At this time, a process is also executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. Note that in the following explanation, address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 654.

In addition, in the performance setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the big win pattern is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). In the case of a big win result, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process for the reach display, a variable display pattern table for the reach display stored in various table areas of the ROM 653 is obtained, and a normal reach display or super reach display performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654. Note that in the variable display mode determination process described below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 653 to determine the performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654.

If it is determined that the result is not a jackpot, it is checked whether or not a reach will occur in this game. If a reach will occur, a process for setting the effect for the reach occurrence is executed. In the process for setting the effect for the reach occurrence, the outline of the effect and the combination of the symbols to be stopped at the end are determined. The former is the same as the process described above, so the explanation is used here. Since this process corresponds to a miss reach, the stop symbols are determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot result is not obtained. In other words, the stop result for this time is determined to be the stop result in which a combination of miss reach symbols is formed on one effective line. In this case, the type of combination of miss reach symbols and the effective line are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when making this determination, the stop result on the effective line is determined so that the same combination of symbols is not formed on any of the effective lines, and the symbols in the middle pattern row that are the same as the symbols forming the reach line are finally stopped at a stop position shifted forward or backward from the reach line. After that, a process is executed to store the information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area.

If it is determined that a reach has not occurred, the outline of the normal miss effect and the final symbol combination to be stopped are determined. Since this process corresponds to a complete miss, the symbols to be stopped are determined in such a way that a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After that, display control (variable display control) of the symbol display device 500F (third variable display area ME3) is performed to execute the performance for the current game round. This starts the variable display of the symbols in the third variable display area ME3, and starts drive control of the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 based on the performance pattern determined in each of the above processes, starting the performance for the game round.

Next, the first normal game state processing in step S2502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 86.

(Processing for the first normal gaming state)
In the first normal gaming state process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not a special effect is being performed. Although details will be described later, the special effect is an effect that is executed based on passing through the effect gate 855F or winning into the lower operation port 859F in the first normal gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602.

In step S2602, it is determined whether or not a winning bid has been made into the lower operating port 859F. If a positive determination is made in step S2602, a special effect start process is executed in step S2606, and then the first normal game state process is terminated. In the special effect start process, in order to start the special effect, a special effect start command is output to the display control device 910F, background music corresponding to the special effect is output from the speaker unit 29, and the lamp unit 26 is illuminated in a manner corresponding to the special effect.

Returning to the explanation of step S2602, if it is determined that no winning has occurred in the lower operating port 859F, the process proceeds to step S2603. In step S2603, it is determined whether or not the special effects are currently being restricted. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, after the special effects have ended, the special effects triggered by passing through the effect gate 855F are restricted until a certain period of time has passed.

If special effects restrictions are in effect, the first normal game state process ends as is, and if special effects restrictions are not in effect, step S2604 determines whether the game ball has passed through the effect gate 855F. In this embodiment, the effect gate 855F is provided with a ball detection sensor 866F capable of detecting a game ball passing through the effect gate 855F (see FIG. 82). This ball detection sensor 866F is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, and the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 determines whether the game ball has passed through the effect gate 855F based on the detection signal (detection information) from the ball detection sensor 866F.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2604, the first normal game state processing is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2604, the processing proceeds to step S2605. In step S2605, a timer setting process for a special effect is executed. Specifically, the execution time of the special effect is set in a timer counter for special effects provided in the various counter areas 675 of RAM 654. The value of the timer counter for special effects is decremented by "1" each time a variable display control process (more specifically, a variable display control process for the third variable display area) is executed.

After executing the setting process in step S2605, the special effect start process is executed in step S2606, and then the first normal game state process is terminated. As described above, in the special effect start process, a special effect start command is output to the display control device 910F, background music corresponding to the special effect is output from the speaker unit 29, and the lamp unit 26 is caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special effect. The special effect start command output to the display control device 910F includes information indicating whether the current special effect was triggered by passing through the effect gate 855F or winning at the lower operating port 859F. The display control device 910F starts a display corresponding to the special effect based on the special effect start command.

The execution time of the special effect, which begins when the ball passes through the effect gate 855F, is determined based on the time required for the game ball to pass through the effect gate 855F and enter the lower operating port 859F. Below, we will provide additional information about this time with reference to Figure 87. Figure 87 is a schematic diagram showing the center route.

The center route is designed so that the time required for the game ball that has passed through the performance gate 855F to enter the lower operating port 859F through the upper crane 856F → lower crane 857F is 3 to 6 seconds. In other words, although there is some variation depending on the time the game ball stops at the upper crane 856F and the time the game ball stops at the lower crane 857F, the required time is configured to be a maximum of 6 seconds. When a special performance is started by passing through the performance gate 855F, the execution time of the special performance is set to a time longer than the maximum time of 6 seconds (7 seconds in detail). In other words, when a game ball that has passed through the performance gate 855F enters the lower operating port 859F, the special performance that was started by passing through the performance gate 855F can continue until a prize is awarded at the lower operating port 859F.

Returning to the explanation of the first normal game state process in FIG. 86, if a positive judgment is made in step S2601, that is, if a special effect is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2607. In step S2607, it is judged whether the special effect is in the first phase. The special effect shown in this embodiment is composed of a maximum of three phases, and transitions in the order of the first phase → second phase → third phase as the effect progresses. Details will be described later, but the special effect that is started as a result of passing through the effect gate 855F is basically composed of the first phase, and the special effect that is started as a result of winning the lower operation port 859F is basically composed of the first and second phases. Regardless of the trigger, the image data for the effect used in the first phase is the same, and it is difficult to specify (distinguish) from the effect whether the start trigger is passing through the effect gate 855F or winning the lower operation port 859F.

If the determination is affirmative in step S2607, the process proceeds to step S2608. In step S2608, it is determined whether or not it is time to transition to the second phase. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to transition to the second phase that is set based on winning at the lower operation port 859F during the special performance, or the timing to transition to the second phase that is set at the start of the special performance that is started based on winning at the lower operation port 859F. If the determination is negative in step S2608, the process proceeds to step S2609. In step S2609, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter for the special performance has returned to the initial value of "0". If the determination is negative in step S2609, that is, if the special performance (first phase) triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, it is determined whether or not a winning at the lower operation port 859F has occurred. If the determination is affirmative in step S2610, the process proceeds to step S2611.

In step S2611, a process for preparing for a transition to the second phase is executed. If a winning entry occurs in the lower operation port 859F during the special effect (first phase) that is started by passing through the effect gate 855F, the special effect will transition from the first phase to the second phase based on the winning entry. In the process for preparing for a transition to the second phase, the game result and the variable display time of the game to be started are identified from the variable command sent from the main control device 162. Then, the timing of the transition to the second phase is determined based on this identified information, and the value of the special effect timer counter is updated so that it is the same time as the variable display time. Here, the timing of the transition to the second phase is adjusted so that there is no deviation in the position of the girl's character image in both phases, so that the player recognizes that the first and second phases are consecutive.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2610, that is, if no winning entry into the lower operation port 859F occurs during the special performance (first phase) that is started by passing through the performance gate 855F, the process proceeds to step S2612. In step S2612, it is judged whether the game ball has reached the lower crane 857F, that is, whether the winning entry into the lower operation port 859F immediately afterwards is confirmed. Specifically, the ball entry unit 850F is provided with a position detection sensor 868F (see FIG. 82) that detects the position (standby position/lowering position) of the lower crane 857F, and this position detection sensor 868F is connected to the notification/performance control device 140. The MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 identifies the position of the lower crane 857F based on the detection signal (detection information) from the position detection sensor 868F. As described above, when a game ball reaches the lower crane 857F, the weight of the game ball causes the lower crane 857F to move (descend) from the standby position to the descending position. In this embodiment, when the lower crane 857F moves to the descending position, it is determined that the game ball has reached the lower crane 857F.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2612, the process proceeds to step S2613. In step S2613, an extension process for the timer counter for the special effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 87, the time required for the game ball that has reached the lower crane 857F to enter the lower operating port 859F is 0.5 to 2.5 seconds. In other words, although there is some variation in the time the game ball stays in the lower crane 857F, the required time is configured to be a maximum of 2.5 seconds. In this extension process, the special effect corresponding to the first phase is extended for a time longer than the maximum time of 2.5 seconds (more specifically, 3 seconds). This prevents the special effect corresponding to the first phase from ending just before the ball enters the lower operating port 859F.

In the following step S2614, background change processing is executed for the display screen 500aF. This changes the background from "day" to "night." In this embodiment, the background is normally "day," and when the background is "day," there are cases where the game transitions to the second phase and cases where the game does not transition. In contrast, when the background becomes "night," the game is confirmed to transition to the second phase. In other words, the "night" background is differentiated to give the player an advantage over the "day" background.

After the background change process of step S2614 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2612, the first phase progress process of step S2615 is executed, and then this first normal game state process is terminated. By executing the first phase progress process, the display content on the display screen 500aF, the background music and sound effects output from the speaker unit 29, and the light emission state of the lamp unit 26 will change in accordance with the progress of the game. Note that, as will be described in detail later, if a special performance is started based on a winning entry into the lower actuation port 859F, the background may be changed from a "day" background to a "night" background at a predetermined timing in the first phase.

Returning to the explanation of step S2609, if a positive judgment is made in step S2609, i.e., if the value of the timer counter for special effects becomes "0", a special effect end process is executed in step S2616. In the special effect end process, a special effect end command is output to the display control device 910F, the background music corresponding to the special effect being output from the speaker unit 29 is stopped, and the light-emitting display corresponding to the special effect in the lamp unit 26 is ended. Based on the special effect end command, the display control device 910F ends the special effect being executed on the display screen 500aF.

Returning to the explanation of step S2608, if a positive judgment is made in step S2608, that is, if it is time to transition to the second phase, the second phase transition process is executed in step S2617. In the second phase transition process, a second phase transition command is output to the display control device 910F, and the background music and sound effects output from the speaker unit 29 are switched to those corresponding to the second phase, and the light emission state of the lamp unit 26 is switched to those corresponding to the second phase. The second phase transition command output to the display control device 910F includes information indicating the game result and information indicating the execution time of the second phase. When the display control device 910F receives the second phase transition command, it identifies the flow of the presentation in the second phase from the information indicating the game result in the second phase and the information indicating the execution time of the second phase, and switches the display in the pattern display device 500F (third variable display area ME3) to that corresponding to the second phase.

Returning to the explanation of step S2607, if a negative judgment is made in step S2607, i.e., if a special effect corresponding to the second phase or a special effect corresponding to the third phase is in progress, processing for the second/third phase is executed in step S2618, and then processing for the first normal game state is terminated. Here, processing for the second/third phase will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 88.

(Second/Third Phase Treatment)
In the process for the second/third phase, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the special effect. Specifically, this determination is made based on whether or not the value of the timer counter for the special effect is "0". If a positive determination is made in step S2710, the process proceeds to step S2702. As already explained, the transition to the special effect corresponding to the second/third phase is premised on a winning entry to the lower operation port 859F. In step S2702, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the winning entry that triggered the special effect is a losing result. If it is a big win result, a negative determination is made in step S2702, and the special effect end process is executed in step S2707.

In the special effect end process, a special effect end command is output to the display control device 910F, the background music corresponding to the special effect being output from the speaker unit 29 is stopped, and the light display corresponding to the special effect in the lamp unit 26 is ended. Based on the special effect end command, the display control device 910F ends the special effect being executed on the display screen 500aF.

After that, in step S2708, special effect restriction processing is executed, and then the second/third phase processing is terminated. By executing the special effect restriction processing, passage through the effect gate 855F is disabled until a predetermined time has passed (in this embodiment, a time the same length as the confirmed display time: 1 sec), and even if the game ball passes through the effect gate 855F, the passing will not trigger the start of a special effect. Note that the restriction is limited to the effect gate 855F, and this does not apply to winning at the lower actuation port 859F. If a winning occurs at the lower actuation port 859F during the restriction, a special effect will be started based on that winning.

Returning to the explanation of step S2702, if a positive judgment is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703. In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the third phase has been entered. If a positive judgment is made in step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2707 to end the special effect and step S2708 to restrict special effects, and then the process for the second/third phase is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, it is determined whether or not multiple subsequent pending items are stored. If a negative judgment is made in step S2704, the process proceeds to step S2707 to end the special effect and step S2708 to restrict special effects, and then the process for the second/third phase is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2704, the process proceeds to step S2705. In step S2705, the variable display time and the result of the win/lose lottery are confirmed for the subsequent pending items. In the next step S2706, the process of transitioning to the third phase is executed, and then the second/third phase transition process is terminated.

If subsequent reserved information is stored at the end of the second phase, the game moves to the third phase based on the fact that multiple subsequent reserved balls are stored, and the special effects are essentially extended. In this case, if the number of subsequent reserved balls is two and , the special effects corresponding to the third phase continue until the end of the game round related to one reserved ball excluding the final reserved ball; if the number of subsequent reserved balls is three, the special effects corresponding to the third phase continue until the end of the game round related to two reserved balls excluding the final reserved ball; if the number of subsequent reserved balls is four, the special effects corresponding to the third phase continue until the end of the game round related to three reserved balls excluding the final reserved ball. Note that if the reserved balls to be extended include balls corresponding to a jackpot result, the special effects corresponding to the third phase continue until the end of the game round related to the reserved balls corresponding to that jackpot result.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 91, the variable display time table corresponding to a losing result that is referenced when determining the variable display time in the first normal game state is configured so that when the reserved number is "0", the variable display time is 10 to 20 seconds and the fixed display time is 1 second, when the reserved number is "1", the variable display time is 0.5 seconds and the fixed display time is 1 second, when the reserved number is "2", the variable display time is 0.5 seconds and the fixed display time is 1 second, and when the reserved number is "3", the variable display time is 0.5 seconds and the fixed display time is 1 second. Even if the third phase is executed over three game rounds, it will be shorter than the first and second phases.

Returning to the explanation of step S2701 of the processing for the second/third phase shown in FIG. 88, if a negative judgment is made in step S2701, that is, if it is not the end timing of the special effect, the process proceeds to step S2709. If it is during the second phase, a positive judgment is made in step S2709 and the process proceeds to step S2710, where the processing for the second phase progression is executed. By executing the processing for the second phase progression, the display content on the display screen 500aF, the background music and sound effects output from the speaker unit 29, and the light emission state of the lamp unit 26 change in accordance with the progress of the game. If it is during the third phase, a negative judgment is made in step S2709 and the process proceeds to step S2711, where the processing for the third phase progression is executed. By executing the processing for the third phase progression, the display content on the display screen 500aF, the background music and sound effects output from the speaker unit 29, and the light emission state of the lamp unit 26 change in accordance with the progress of the game.

Here, we will explain the flow of the special effects by referring to the schematic diagrams in Figures 89 and 90.

(Special performance sequence)
When no special effects are being executed in the first normal game state, as shown in FIG. 89(a), a girl character standing with a broom in hand is displayed in a corner of the display screen 500aF of the pattern display device 500F (the corner opposite the first variable display area ME1) (hereinafter referred to as the standby display).

If the game ball launched to the right route passes through the effect gate 855F or enters the lower operating port 859F while the special effect is not being executed, the passing through or winning will trigger the start of the special effect. As shown in Figures 89(b) and (c), in the special effect (first phase), a video is displayed in which a girl character flies astride a broom. The girl character moves left and right on the display screen 500aF (third variable display area ME3) until the first phase ends.

Here, if the game ball reaches the lower crane 857F during the special performance (first phase) triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F, the background displayed on the display screen 500aF changes from a "day" background to a "night" background (see FIG. 89(d)). On the other hand, if a chance-up timing occurs as part of the special performance (first phase) triggered by winning the lower operation port 859F, the background displayed on the display screen 500aF changes from a "day" background to a "night" background (see FIG. 89(d)). The "night" background is the background that determines the transition to the second phase, and since the transition to the special game state is configured to go through at least the second and third phases, the change to the "night" background increases the expectation of the transition to the special game state.

At the timing of the transition from the first phase to the second phase, as shown in FIG. 89(e), a fairy character is added to the display screen 500aF (third variable display area ME3), and a message is displayed indicating that the girl has encountered a fairy. After this, a chase effect is executed in which the girl chases the fairy. If the variable display time for the game round that triggered the transition to the second phase is set to a relatively short time of 10 sec, as shown in FIG. 89(f), a message is displayed indicating that the fairy has not been captured. Then, if multiple subsequent reserves have not been secured by the end of the special effect (the relevant game round), the special effect ends and the game returns to the standby display shown in FIG. 89(a).

In contrast, if the variable display time of the game round that triggered the transition to the second phase is set to a relatively long time of 20 seconds, a message will be displayed indicating that the fairy has been successfully captured, as shown in FIG. 89(g). In this embodiment, the capture of the fairy functions as a precursor to the transformation performance, and after the fairy is successfully captured, the girl's transformation challenge performance will begin (see FIG. 89(h)). If the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, a message will be displayed indicating that the transformation challenge performance was successful (see FIG. 89(i)), and then the game will transition to a special game state.

If the current play round corresponds to a losing result, a message will be displayed indicating that the transformation challenge has failed, as shown in FIG. 89(j). If multiple subsequent reserved balls have not been secured by the end of the special play round (corresponding play round), the special play round will end and the display will return to the standby display shown in FIG. 89(a). In contrast, if multiple subsequent reserved balls have been secured by the end of the special play round (corresponding play round), the special play round will transition from the second phase to the third phase, and the special play round will continue over the play rounds related to the subsequent reserved balls. Note that examples of special play rounds are shown in both FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, so for ease of explanation, some descriptions (FIG. 89(j) and FIG. 90(j)) have been duplicated.

As shown in FIG. 90(l), when the game moves to the third phase, the girl's transformation challenge performance resumes. Also, if multiple subsequent pending attempts were stored in FIG. 89(f) above, as shown in FIG. 90(q), a display is displayed indicating that the fairy has been successfully captured, and then the transformation challenge performance begins.

If the subsequent reserved play round corresponds to a miss result, a message is displayed informing the player that the transformation challenge performance has failed (see FIG. 90(n)) at the end of the final play round corresponding to the third phase, and the game returns to the standby display shown in FIG. 89(a). In contrast, if the subsequent reserved play round corresponds to a jackpot result, a message is displayed informing the player that the transformation challenge performance has succeeded (see FIG. 90(m)) at the end of the play round corresponding to the jackpot result, and the game transitions to a special game state.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the movement of the game ball and the flow of special effects by referring to the timing chart in Figure 92.

When the launch of the game ball toward the left route starts at the timing of tc0, the launched game ball flows down toward the ball entry unit 850F. As already explained, in order to generate a winning entry into the lower operating port 859F, it is necessary to make the game ball flow down the center route. For this reason, the game ball basically passes through the performance gate 855F before winning the lower operating port 859F. When the game ball passes through the performance gate 855F at the timing of tc1, the variable display of the pattern begins on the lower operating port display section of the main display unit 87, and the variable display of the pattern begins in the first variable display area ME1 of the pattern display device 500F. In conjunction with this, a special performance (first phase) begins in the third variable display area ME3 of the pattern display device 500F. Note that from this point on, the function of the performance gate 855F as a trigger for starting the special performance is disabled until the special performance ends and the above-mentioned restrictions are lifted.

At timing tc2 during the special performance, a winning entry into the lower actuation port 859F occurs. For the ball entry unit 850F shown in this embodiment, when one game ball enters the lower actuation port 859F, there is a chance that the following game balls will consecutively enter the lower actuation port 859F. In the example shown in Figure 92, winning entries into the lower actuation port 859F occur consecutively at timings tc3 to tc6, and the number of reserved balls increases in one go from "0" to the upper limit of "4".

The special effects do not immediately transition to the second phase at tc2 when the first winning occurs at the lower operating port 859F, but transition from the first phase to the second phase occurs at tc7, when the transition preparation time has elapsed from tc2.

In this embodiment, a special effect can be started based on a winning entry into the lower actuation port 859F, and this special effect transitions from the first phase to the second phase. The above-mentioned interval is provided instead of immediately transitioning to the second phase based on a winning entry into the lower actuation port 859F during the special effect, as this is a device to prevent the player from getting the impression that a transition to the second phase is not possible if the first phase is prolonged.

At tc8, a preset variable display time after tc2, the confirmation display for the first winning is completed on the lower operation port display section of the main display unit 87. This play round corresponds to a miss result, and multiple subsequent pending wins are stored. Therefore, at tc8, the special effect being executed in the third variable display area ME3 of the pattern display device 500F transitions from the second phase to the third phase, and the special effect (third phase) continues for the next three play rounds. In the third phase, the results of the three play rounds are notified by one transformation challenge effect, so there is a higher expectation of a jackpot result than in the second phase.

The fifth embodiment described above is expected to have the following excellent effects:

When the non-electric device 858F of the ball entry unit 850F is in the first guide state, the game balls distributed by the upper crane 856F (corresponding to the "distribution means") to the first branch passage section 865F (corresponding to the "first special flow path") are guided to the lower operating port 859F by the non-electric device 858F. In other words, in the first guide state, the winning path to the lower operating port 859F is limited to the first branch passage section 865F. On the other hand, when the non-electric device 858F is in the second guide state, not only the game balls distributed by the upper crane 856F to the first branch passage section 864F, but also the game balls distributed to the second branch passage section 865F (corresponding to the "second special flow path"), and even the game balls that flow down the side route without passing through the performance gate 855F are guided to the lower operating port 859F by the non-electric device 858F. In this way, even game balls that do not reach the upper crane 856F through the performance gate 855F and are likely to miss, or game balls that are lost due to sorting by the upper crane 856F, are given the opportunity to enter the lower operating port 859F. This prevents a decrease in the player's attention to game balls that flow down routes other than the center route, and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

When one game ball enters the lower actuation port 859F, it becomes easier for subsequent game balls to enter the lower actuation port 859F as well, resulting in successive entries into the lower actuation port 859F. In this way, if a single entry serves as a trigger for successive entries, it is possible to create a bias in the frequency of entries into the lower actuation port 859F, which can enhance the variety of game progress by having game rounds being played in rapid succession or not at all. This helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

For the game balls that are split into the upper route and the lower route by the windmill 94, there is a difference in the time required to move until they reach a position where they can be accepted by the non-electric device 858F. This makes it easier for the frequency (span) of winning balls to change when both the leading game ball and the trailing game ball head toward the lower operating port 859F. In particular, the time required for the game ball to go through the side route (lower route → non-electric device 858F) is shorter than the time required for the game ball to go through the center route (upper route → upper crane 856F → non-electric device 858F). As a result, when the leading game ball goes through the center route and the trailing game ball goes through the side route, the trailing game ball approaches the leading game ball, making it easier for consecutive winnings to occur. In particular, it is preferable to increase the time required to flow down the relatively advantageous center route and to shorten the time required to flow down the relatively unadvantageous side route in order to increase the player's attention.

When a game ball flowing down toward the lower operating port 859F lands on the rolling surface 875F of the lower crane 857F, the lower crane 857F is displaced from the standby position to the descending position. As the game ball moves to the descending position, the non-electric device 858F switches from the first guiding state to the second guiding state, facilitating the flow of balls into the lower operating port 859F, resulting in continuous winning at the lower operating port 859F. If the game ball moves from the standby position to the descending position depending on the weight of the game ball resting on the rolling surface 875F, a bias in the winning frequency can be created with a simple configuration, and an increase in the control load related to the progress of the game can be suppressed.

While the leading game ball is rolling on the rolling surface 875F of the lower crane 857F, the non-electric device 858F is maintained in the second guiding state. In this way, by delaying the timing at which the leading game ball enters the lower operating port 859F while waiting for the arrival of the following game ball, the player has time to visually confirm the successive winnings, which can favorably increase the player's satisfaction.

The lower crane 857F is configured so that the orientation of the rolling surface 875F when it is in the standby position matches the orientation of the rolling surface 875F when it is in the descending position. With this configuration, when a game ball is placed on the lower crane 857F and the lower crane 857F descends, it is possible to suppress disturbances in the behavior of the game ball by avoiding changes in the posture of the lower crane 857F. Suppressing disturbances in the behavior of the game ball in this way is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game ball on the lower crane 857F.

The upper limit of the reserved information stored for the lower operating port 859F is set to be less than the maximum number of game balls that can be positioned on the rolling surface 875F of the lower crane 857F. This configuration makes it possible to earn consecutive wins at the lower operating port 859F while preventing an excessive number of wins that do not result in a jackpot lottery. This is preferable in preventing a decrease in the sense of exhilaration that comes from consecutive wins.

The lower crane 857F is configured so that the game ball cannot reach the lower crane 857F without passing through the non-electric device 858F. In this way, by narrowing down the opportunity for consecutive wins to start at the lower operating port 859F, it is possible to prevent consecutive wins from starting at an unintended timing. In this way, by reducing the chances of missing the start of consecutive wins, it is possible to effectively demonstrate the effect of increasing attention due to consecutive wins.

By executing a performance linked to the variable display of the picture on the display unit for the operation port on the display screen 500aF of the pattern display device 500F, the process (display mode) until the result of the big win lottery is notified can be diversified, thereby suppressing monotony of the game. Although such a configuration can increase the attention to the game, the following inconveniences may occur because the presence or absence of a performance depends on the winning of the lower operation port 859F. In other words, if the period during which no performance is performed becomes long, the fact that there is no winning of the lower operation port 859F becomes conspicuous, which may be a factor that reduces the player's motivation to play. Here, in this embodiment, the performance gate 855F (corresponding to the "passing section") is arranged at a position where the frequency of passing the game ball is higher than the frequency of winning the lower operation port 859F, and a special performance is started (pre-started) on the display screen 500aF when the game ball passes through the performance gate 855F, and the special performance can be ended based on the winning of the lower operation port 859F. This prevents the non-effect period during which no effects are performed on the display screen 500aF from becoming excessively long, and prevents a decrease in attention to the game. This is preferable in preventing a decrease in motivation to play.

The effect gate 855F, which is the trigger for starting the special effect, is arranged upstream of the lower operating port 859F, which is the trigger for ending the special effect. This arrangement can effectively suppress the prolongation of the non-effect period. In addition, by arranging the effect gate 855F on the flow path toward the lower operating port 859F and configuring the game ball that passes through the effect gate 855F to be able to enter the lower operating port 859F, it is possible for one game ball to both trigger the start and end of a special effect. This makes it possible to create a correlation between the special effect and the movement of the game ball.

When a special effect is started based on the game ball passing through the effect gate 855F, the execution time of the special effect is set. If the execution time elapses without a winning entry into the lower actuation port 859F, the special effect ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get the impression that the special effect is completely unrelated to a winning entry into the lower actuation port 859F.

The transition of the special effect from the first phase to the second phase increases anticipation for the transition to the special game state. If the above-mentioned execution time elapses without a winning entry into the lower operating port 859F in the special effect triggered by the passage of the effect gate 855F, the transition to the second phase is avoided, and a highly anticipated display is avoided even though a jackpot lottery has not been held. In this way, by preventing the player's sense of anticipation from being unnecessarily stirred up, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as a decrease in the player's attention even when a situation requires attention. This is preferable for optimally exerting the attention-increasing effect of the special effect.

In this embodiment, not only is a special effect executed on the display screen 500aF (more specifically, the third variable display area ME3) based on winning at the lower operating port 859F, but a special effect may also be executed on the display screen 500aF (the third variable display area ME3) based on the game ball passing through an effect gate 855F arranged on the flow path toward the lower operating port 859F. Furthermore, these special effects are configured so that at least a portion, including the opening part of each special effect, is recognized by the player as being the same. Therefore, when a special effect is executed, the possibility of winning at the lower operating port 859F remains, and the attention to the special effect can be appropriately increased.

Special effects based on winning through the lower operating port 859F are executed with priority over special effects based on passing through the effect gate 855F. In this way, positioning the special effects based on passing through the effect gate 855F as auxiliary is preferable in order to facilitate smooth game progress and to increase attention to the special effects, with the special effects based on winning through the lower operating port 859F being the main focus.

The execution time of the special effect based on passing through the effect gate 855F is set to be shorter than the special effect based on winning through the lower operation port 859F. In order to exert the above-mentioned auxiliary function, it is preferable to suppress the prolongation of the special effect that is not substantially related to whether or not the transition to the special game state is possible.

If a winning entry into the lower operating port 859F occurs during a special effect that is started as a result of passing through the performance gate 855F, the special effect will continue. Here, the execution time of the special effect that is started as a result of passing through the performance gate 855F is longer than the time required for the game ball flowing down the center route to reach the lower operating port 859F from the performance gate 855F. For this reason, the special effect that is started by passing through the performance gate 855F ends just before the ball wins at the lower operating port 859F, and the start/end of the special effect is repeated, which means that the opportunity for a gap between special effects can be reduced.

In the ball entry unit 850F shown in this embodiment, the visibility of the performance gate 855F is higher (easier to notice) than that of the lower operating port 859F. Since a special performance is started on the display screen 500aF based on the passage of the performance gate 855F, it is made to look as if the performance gate 855F is an "operating port". When comparing the number of winnings at the lower operating port 859F per unit time with the number of passing through the performance gate 855F, the latter is higher than the former, so it is possible to give the player the impression that there are more winnings at the "operating port" compared to conventional gaming machines. In this way, by making it look as if there are more winnings at the "operating port", it is possible to improve the satisfaction of the player while suppressing changes in the advantageous degree of the game.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, the lower crane 857F is pushed down by the game ball and moves to a lowered position, so that the non-electric device 858F that guides the game ball to the lower crane 857F switches from the first guide state to the second guide state in which the game ball is more likely to flow into the inlet 878F than the first guide state, and the non-electric device 858F is maintained in the second guide state until the game ball leaves the lower crane 857, thereby generating a bias in the winning frequency to the lower operation port 859F (generating consecutive winnings). If it is possible to generate a bias in the winning frequency to the lower operation port 859F, the specific configuration and operation mode of the non-electric device 858F may be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the non-electric device 858F switches to the second guide state, it is also possible to configure the non-electric device 858F to return to the first guide state when a predetermined period has passed since the switching, regardless of whether a game ball is on the lower crane 857F or not. By performing such forced switching, excessive consecutive winnings into the lower operating port 859F can be prevented.

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the special effect (first phase) newly started based on passing through the effect gate 855F and the special effect (first phase) newly started based on winning at the lower operating port 859F are configured to be common at least in the beginning part (first phase) so that it is difficult to distinguish by looking at the effects whether the effect was triggered by passing through the effect gate 855F or winning at the lower operating port 859F, but this is not limited to this. The special effect may be different depending on the start trigger.

In addition, when a win occurs at the lower operating port 859F during a special effect that is started based on the passage of the effect gate 855F, transitioning from the first phase to the second phase, a correlation is added to the display so that the player recognizes that both phases are consecutive, but it is not necessarily necessary to correlate the first phase and the second phase.

Note that the execution area for the performance that is executed based on winning the lower operating port 859F and the execution area for the performance that is executed based on passing through the performance gate 855F are both configured to be the third variable display area ME3 of the display screen 500aF, but the execution area for each performance may be set separately.

<Modification 3>
In the fifth embodiment, the initial execution time of the special effect that starts based on the passage of the effect gate 855F is set to a uniform time (7 seconds in detail), but this is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the initial execution time is longer than the time required for the game ball to move from the effect gate 855F to the lower operation port 859F. For example, this does not deny a configuration in which multiple candidates for the initial execution time are set (for example, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds) and one of the candidates is selected.

<Modification 4>
In the fifth embodiment, the initial execution time of the special effect that starts based on the passage of the effect gate 855F is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball to move from the effect gate 855F to the lower actuation port 859F, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to set it to be shorter than the time required for the game ball to move from the effect gate 855F to the lower actuation port 859F. In the configuration in which all game balls that reach the lower crane 857F enter the lower actuation port 859F as shown in the fifth embodiment, it is sufficient that the execution time is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball to move from the effect gate 855F to the lower crane 857F. It is also possible to set the initial execution time regardless of the various required times, but in such a configuration, the effect related to the passage of the effect gate 855F and the effect related to the entry into the lower actuation port 859F are easily separated in time. Therefore, in order to strengthen the sense of unity of each presentation and increase attention to the game, it is preferable to have the relationship between the execution time and the required time shown in the fifth embodiment, etc.

<Modification 5>
In the above fifth embodiment, when the non-electric device 858F is in the second guide state (open state), the game ball that has passed through the first branch passage 864F, which is the winning side route in the upper crane 856F, as well as the game ball that has passed through the second branch passage 865F, which is the losing side route in the upper crane 856F, and even the game ball that has not passed through the upper crane 856F can be guided to the lower crane 857F, but this is not limited to this. When the non-electric device 858F is in the second guide state (open state), the guide target may be limited to the game ball that has passed through the winning side route in the upper crane 856F and the game ball that has passed through the losing side route in the upper crane 856F, or may be limited to the game ball that has passed through the winning side route in the upper crane 856F and the game ball that has not passed through the upper crane 856F.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth embodiment, the start of a special effect based on passing through the effect gate 855F is restricted for a certain period (restriction period) after the special effect ends, but the conditions for the restriction may be changed as follows. That is, the restriction may be restricted only when the special effect ends without transitioning from the first phase to the second phase (when no winning entry into the actuation port occurs during the first phase). In other words, the restriction may not be restricted when the special effect transitions from the first phase to the second phase (when winning entry into the lower actuation port 859F occurs during the first phase).

The restriction period is set to be the same length as the period during which the image is confirmed in the operating port display section of the main display unit 87, but the length of the restriction period may be changed as desired.

<Modification 7>
In the above fifth embodiment, when it is detected that the lower crane 857F has moved to the descended position during execution of the special performance (first phase), i.e., when it is determined that a game ball has landed on the lower crane 857F, the execution time of the first phase is extended so that it is longer than the time required for the game ball to move from the lower crane 857F to the lower operating port 859F. However, it is also possible to extend the first phase until an entry into the lower operating port 859F actually occurs.

<Modification 8>
In the above fifth embodiment, when a winning entry into the lower operating port 859F occurs during a special performance, the transition to the second phase is not immediately transitioned to, but rather the transition to the second phase is delayed. However, it is also possible to configure the transition to the second phase immediately when a winning entry into the lower operating port 859F occurs during a special performance.

<Modification 9>
The configuration may be such that a prize ball is awarded to a player based on the game ball passing through the performance gate 855F.

<Modification 10>
In the fifth embodiment, the effect gate 855F is disposed on the flow path of the game ball toward the lower actuation port 859F, but the effect gate 855F may be disposed at a position outside the flow path. In other words, it is also possible to configure the game ball that has passed through the effect gate 855F to be excluded from the prize-winning target at the lower actuation port 859F.

<Modification 11>
In the above fifth embodiment, the lower crown 857F is formed so that the upper limit number of game balls that can be located on the lower crown 857F is greater than the number of reserved balls that can be stored, but this is not limited to this. The lower crown may be formed so that the upper limit number of game balls that can be located on the lower crown is less than the number of reserved balls that can be stored, or the lower crown may be formed so that the upper limit number of game balls that can be located on the lower crown is equal to the number of reserved balls that can be stored.

<Modification 12>
The number of game balls located on the lower crane 857F may be increased to shorten the time the game balls stay on the lower crane 857F. For example, the exit part of the lower crane may be disposed closer to the outer periphery rather than in the center of the lower crane, and when the number of game balls located on the lower crane reaches a certain number, a posture variable mechanism may be provided to change the posture of the lower crane (rolling surface) so that the rolling surface slopes downward toward the exit part of the lower crane.

<Modification 13>
In the above fifth embodiment, the ball detection sensor 866F for the performance gate 855F was connected to the notification/performance control device, but it is sufficient if the notification/performance control device 140 can grasp whether or not the performance gate 855F has been passed, and the connection destination of the ball detection sensor 866F may be changed to another control device such as a main control device or a display control device.

Sixth embodiment
In the fifth embodiment, the effect gate 855F is used as a trigger for starting a special effect. In contrast, the effect gate 855F shown in this embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in that, in addition to the function as a trigger for starting a special effect, the effect gate 855F is given a function as a trigger for changing a part of the display (specifically, a reserved display) on the pattern display device 500F (display screen 500aF) based on the game ball passing through the effect gate 855F during a special effect. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment.

First, the configuration related to the hold display in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 93 and 94. Figure 93 is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 500aF of the pattern display device 500F, Figure 94(a) is a flowchart showing the hold display control command response processing by the MPU 912F of the display control device 910F, and Figure 94(b) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the hold display.

The bottom of the display screen 500aF, specifically the area below the third variable display area ME3, is provided with a reserved number display area NE. The reserved number display area NE is provided with a reserved number display area Da for the lower operation port, which is partitioned so that unit reserved display areas Da1-Da4, the same number as the maximum reserved number when a game ball enters the lower operation port 859F, are lined up in the left-right direction, and a reserved number display area Db for the right operation port, which is partitioned so that unit reserved display areas Db1-Db4, the same number as the maximum reserved number when a game ball enters the right operation port 883F, are lined up in the left-right direction. A reserved icon MP (reserved display image) is displayed according to the number of reserved information stored in these unit reserved display areas Da1-Da4 and Db1-Db4.

Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the lower operation port 859F is four, and the first unit reserved display area Da1, the second unit reserved display area Da2, the third unit reserved display area Da3, and the fourth unit reserved display area Da4 are set in the reserved number display area Da for the lower operation port in response to this. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the right operation port 883F is four, and the first unit reserved display area Db1, the second unit reserved display area Db2, the third unit reserved display area Db3, and the fourth unit reserved display area Db4 are set in the reserved number display area Db for the lower operation port in response to this. For example, when the reserved number related to the lower operation port 859F is "1", the reserved icon MP is displayed in the first unit reserved display area Da1, and when the reserved number related to the lower operation port 859F is "4", the reserved icon MP is displayed in each of the first unit reserved display area Da1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Da4. Note that Figure 93 illustrates an example in which the number of reserved items at the lower operating port 859F is 3, and the number of reserved items at the right operating port 883F is 0.

The pending display area NE also has an execution target display area Dc, which is arranged side by side with the pending number display area Da (specifically, the first unit pending display area Da1) and displays a pending icon MP corresponding to the number of plays to be executed (being executed). In this embodiment, the execution target display area Dc is arranged to the left of the pending number display area Da, but the positional relationship between these is arbitrary. For example, the execution target display area Dc may be arranged to the right of the pending number display area Da.

When a game round ends and the next game round begins, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold number display area Da, Db (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1, Db1) shifts (moves) to the execution target display area Dc. If there are other hold icons MP displayed in the hold number display area Da, Db, these hold icons MP will shift to the (adjacent) unit hold display area closer to the execution target display area Dc in conjunction with the shift. For ease of explanation, hereafter, the side closer to the execution target display area Dc will be referred to as the "downstream side" and the side opposite the execution target display area Dc as the "upstream side."

In this embodiment, a presentation related to a reserved notice, which suggests the contents of reserved information stored in reserved ball storage area 632 of RAM 606, is configured to be executed with a predetermined probability before the start of the game round related to that reserved information. By executing the presentation corresponding to reserved information that has not yet become the subject of a lottery at a timing before the game round related to that reserved information becomes the subject of a lottery, the player is not only able to check the lottery results for the reserved information corresponding to the current game round, but is also able to check or predict the results when the reserved information that will later become the subject of a lottery becomes the subject of a lottery, depending on the contents of the presentation, which diversifies the game. This can increase the attention to the game.

The hold notice can be broadly divided into those executed in conjunction with the variable display of the above-mentioned pattern in the variable display area ME of the display screen 500aF, and those executed in conjunction with changes in the state of the hold display in the hold display area NE of the display screen 500aF. Of these, the hold notice executed in the hold display area NE utilizes the hold display in the display screen 500aF. Below, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 94(a) and the schematic diagram in FIG. 94(b), the configuration that is the premise of the hold notice and the process for hold display control (hold display control command response process) executed by the MPU 912F of the display control device 910F will be explained. The hold display control command response process is a process executed as part of the periodic process that is started at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Hold display control command response processing)
94(a), in the hold display control command response process, first in step S2801, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 140. If a positive determination is made in step S2801, in step S2802, the value of the hold number counter (hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 914F is incremented by 1.

After executing the update process of step S2802, proceed to step S2803 to execute the hold display addition process and terminate this hold display control command response process. The above-mentioned hold memory number SN corresponds to the hold display area of the video RAM 917F. When setting the display of the hold icon MP in the hold display addition process, the hold display information (more specifically, the address of the hold image stored in the hold image data storage area) is set in the unit area corresponding to the hold memory number SN in the hold display area 281. In each unit hold display area Da1-Da4, Db1-Db4 of the hold number display areas Da, Db on the display screen 500aF, the above-mentioned hold icon MP is additionally displayed according to the data written in each unit area.

For example, as shown in FIG. 94(b1), when a hold command is received in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, i.e., when the hold memory count SN is "2", the hold memory count SN changes from "2" to "3", and hold display information is set in the third unit area of the hold display area. As a result, the hold icon MP is displayed in the third unit hold display area Da3, as shown in FIG. 94(b2).

Returning to the explanation of step S2801, if a negative judgment is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 140. If a negative judgment is made in step S2804, the process for handling commands for holding display control is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2804, the process proceeds to step S2805. In step S2805, the value of the pending number counter (pending memory number SN) in the pending counter area of the work RAM 914F is decremented by 1.

In the next step S2806, a shift process is executed, and the pending display control command response process is terminated. In the shift process, the pending display information set in the first unit area of the pending display area is moved to the execution display area, and the pending display information set in the first unit area to the fourth unit area of each pending display area for the lower operating port 859F and the right operating port 883F is shifted sequentially to the lower area side.

Specifically, the pending display information in the first unit area is moved to the execution display area, and the pending display information in each unit area is shifted from the second unit area to the first unit area, the third unit area to the second unit area, the fourth unit area to the third unit area, and so on.

For example, as shown in FIG. 94(b1), when a shift command is received in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, i.e., when the hold memory count SN is "2", the hold memory count SN changes from "2" to "1". As a result, the hold display information in the execution display area 282 is erased, and the hold display information in the first unit area is shifted to the execution display area 282, the hold display information in the second unit area to the first unit area, and the hold display information in the third unit area to the second unit area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94(b3), the hold icon MP is displayed in the execution target display area Dc and the first unit hold display area Da1.

Here, the hold image data storage area stores hold icons MP of different colors (specifically, four colors: white, blue, yellow, and red) as a group of hold images, and the above address differs depending on the color. When setting the hold display information, the notification/performance control device 140 decides which color to display depending on the presence or absence of the hold notice described above, and this information is incorporated into the hold command by the notification/performance control device 140 when the hold command passes through the notification/performance control device 140. In other words, the display control device 910F reads color information from the received hold command and determines which address corresponds to which color to set as the hold display information.

Next, the process for the hold notice executed by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 will be described. The process for the hold notice includes a confirmation process for the hold notice and a setting process for the hold command, and each of these processes constitutes part of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 602 of the main control unit 162 (more specifically, the information acquisition process shown in FIG. 95). In other words, the confirmation process for the hold notice and the setting process for the hold command are configured to be executed based on winning at the actuation ports 859F and 883F. Below, the confirmation process for the hold notice and the setting process for the hold command will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 96 to FIG. 97. Note that the information acquisition process shown in this embodiment is the same as the information acquisition process shown in the first embodiment except for the confirmation process for the hold notice and the setting process for the hold command, so the description will be omitted.

(Confirmation process for pending notice)
In the confirmation process for the reserved ball notice, in step S3001, the start reserved ball memory number N and the common reserved ball number CRN stored in the reserved ball number memory area FE of the reserved ball storage area 632 are read out, and the information on the reserved ball number is stored in the register of the MPU 602. After that, in steps S3002 to S3006, it is confirmed whether or not the reserved ball information acquired by the current winning includes information on the big win.

Specifically, first, in step S3002, the information for determining whether or not a jackpot has occurred is obtained from the reserved information acquired in step S2904 based on the current winnings at the actuation ports 859F and 883F, that is, the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1.

In the next step S3003, it is determined whether or not the mode is low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current win/lose lottery mode is low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If it is low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S3004, and the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced to determine whether the information for determining the jackpot grasped in step S3002 (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) is included in the information group corresponding to the jackpot win. If it is high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S3005, and the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced to determine whether the information for determining the jackpot grasped in step S2902 (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) is included in the information set as the jackpot win.

After step S3004 or S3005, the process proceeds to step S3006, where it is determined whether the information for determining a jackpot obtained in step S3002 (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) corresponds to a jackpot win. If it corresponds to a jackpot win, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S3007, and the confirmation process for this pending notice ends.

In the process of step S3007, the information for determining the type of jackpot among the reserved information acquired in step S2904 based on the current winning is obtained, i.e., the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the allocation table. The information stored in the register of MPU 602 in step S3007 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S3006, the process proceeds to step S3008. In step S3008, the information for determining whether or not a miss is in the pending information acquired in step S2904 based on the current winnings in the actuation ports 859F and 883F is obtained, i.e., the value of the already acquired reach random number counter C3.

In the next step S3009, the reach judgment table (reach judgment information group) stored in the reach judgment table storage area (reach judgment information group storage means) of ROM 603 is referenced to determine whether the reach judgment information grasped in step S3008 (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as a reach win.

After executing the process of step S3009, the process proceeds to step S3010, where it is determined whether the information for reach determination grasped in step S3008 (the value of the reach random number counter C3) corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, then in step S3011, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, and then this confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Setting pending commands)
Next, the pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

In the process of setting the hold command, first in step S3101, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 602, thereby determining whether or not the information for determining a jackpot was identified as corresponding to a jackpot win in the immediately preceding hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 96). If jackpot information is stored, the process proceeds to step S3102, where a jackpot-compatible hold command is set. The above command setting and the various commands described below are set by storing command information in a command setting area provided in RAM 604. In particular, the jackpot-compatible hold command includes information regarding the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S3101, that is, if it is judged that no jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 602, the process proceeds to step S3103, where it is judged whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 602, thereby judging whether or not the information for reach judgment was identified as corresponding to the reach occurrence in the immediately preceding hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 96). If reach occurrence information is stored, a miss reach corresponding hold command is set in step S3104, and if reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete miss corresponding hold command is set in step S3105.

When setting a hold command in steps S3102, S3104, and S3105, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, and information related to the variable display time is stored in the hold command. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referenced, as in the variable display time setting process described above. The hold command set in this way is sent to the display control device 910F via the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 910F can grasp the variable display mode of the pattern based on the hold command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the variable display time may change depending on the number of hold information stored when starting a game round related to the hold information. Therefore, when setting a hold command for a complete miss, a provisional setting of the variable display time is performed.

After executing the command setting process of step S3102, step S3104, or step S3105, a process of setting the number of reserved items to the reserved command is executed in step S3106. Specifically, the information of the reserved command set above is configured as multiple bytes of information, some of which contain information indicating that the command is a reserved command and information on the type of reserved command, and the number of reserved items can be set.

In step S3106, first, the information on the number of reserved items stored in the register of MPU 602 in step S3001 in the immediately preceding confirmation process for the reserved notice (FIG. 96) is read, and then the read information on the number of reserved items is stored in the bit for the information on the number of reserved items in the reserved command that has already been set, using arithmetic processing such as logical OR. As a result, for the reserved command set in any of the processes in steps S3102, S3104, or S3105, information is included for identifying which reserved information corresponds to the reserved command. After the process in step S3106 described above in detail is executed, this reserved command setting process ends.

The hold command containing the information on the number of hold items in step S3106 is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 by external output processing in the next normal processing. By receiving the hold command, the notification/performance control device 140 determines that the amount of hold information has increased. The notification/performance control device 140 also adds hold notice information, which will be described later, to the hold command and sends it to the display control device 910F. The display control device 910F executes processes such as hold display and hold notice based on the received hold command.

The method of setting the hold command is arbitrary as long as the display control device 910F can specify whether or not a jackpot has been won, the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won, whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won, in other words, the manner in which the patterns change and are displayed. For example, combinations of hold commands corresponding to a jackpot, hold commands corresponding to a reach that is a miss, and hold commands corresponding to a complete miss are individually set in correspondence with each number of holds, and the hold command setting process can be configured to select one hold command depending on the confirmation result in the hold notice confirmation process (Figure 96).

Next, we will explain the process related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140. The process related to the hold notice is broadly divided into a command response process that determines the command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice performance setting process that determines the mode of the hold notice.

(Pending command handling process)
In the hold command response process, when a hold command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, a process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed. The hold command response process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

In the pending command response process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 is temporarily stored in the command storage area 672 of the RA 654. The command storage area 672 is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been previously stored, so that even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed smoothly. When determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the area of the command storage area 672 that is the current target for reading. Note that this configuration for reading commands is the same when reading out other commands such as a command for starting fluctuations.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The hold information storage area has the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 for the lower operating port 859F and the first area Rd1 to the fourth area Rd4 for the right operating port 883F, and is configured to be able to store one hold information for each area. The hold information stored in each area Rc1 to Rc4, Rd1 to Rd4 is shifted to the lower area side in order by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when a game round is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1, Rd1 is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area Rc2, Rd2 → first area Rc1, Rd1, third area Rc3, Rd3 → second area Rc2, Rd2, fourth area Rc4, Rd4 → third area Rc3, Rd3. The reserved information storage area of the notification/performance control device 140 is also configured to store reserved information in chronological order according to the ball entry destination, similar to the reserved ball storage area 632 (more specifically, the reserved area RE) of the main control device 162. More specifically, the information indicating the winning destination and the reserved number contained in the currently received command are identified, and the above various information is stored in the area of the first area Rc1, Rd1 to the fourth area Rc4, Rd4 that corresponds to the identified winning destination and reserved number information.

When the above-mentioned hold command is received, a hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, and when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 676. Each of these flags triggers the setting process for the hold notice performance described below, and is erased when the setting process for the hold notice performance is completed.

The MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 performs setting processing for the on-hold notice performance based on the information stored in the on-hold information storage area. Here, the setting processing for the on-hold notice performance will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 98. Note that the setting processing for the on-hold notice performance is a process that is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 2 msec).

(Setting process for holding notice performance)
In the setting process for the on-hold notice performance, first, it is determined whether the on-hold notice performance is restricted. Specifically, in step S3201, it is determined whether the on-hold notice performance restriction flag is set in the various flag storage area of the RAM 654. If the determination is affirmative in step S3201, the setting process for the on-hold notice performance is terminated. If the determination is negative in step S3201, the process proceeds to step S3202.

In step S3202, it is determined whether or not a hold command has been received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a hold command reception flag has been set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If a positive determination is made in step S3202, a lottery process is executed when a hold command is received in step S3203.

In the lottery process when a hold command is received, the lottery objects for the hold notice are limited to the newly added hold information. In other words, a lottery for the availability of the hold notice is performed based on the information stored in the area corresponding to the currently received hold command out of the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 and the first area Rd1 to the fourth area Rd4 provided in the hold information storage area of RAM 654. This lottery is performed by determining from the stored information whether the game round related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether a reach display will be displayed, and if a reach display is displayed, the pattern, and based on the corresponding lottery table and the value of the lottery counter for the hold notice provided in the lottery counter area 674.

In this embodiment, special effects A to C are provided as the above special effects, with differences provided so that the likelihood of winning increases in the order of special effect A < special effect B < special effect C. In the lottery table storage area of ROM 653, a lottery table for a big win, a lottery table for a miss special effect A, a lottery table for a miss special effect B, a lottery table for a miss special effect C, and a lottery table for a complete miss are stored as lottery tables for when a hold command is received. These various tables are set so that the probability of winning the hold notice increases in the order of lottery table for a big win > lottery table for a miss special effect C > lottery table for a miss special effect B > lottery table for a miss special effect A > lottery table for a complete miss. More specifically, for a game round that triggers the start of a special effect or transition to the second phase, the lottery table for the big win, the lottery table for the miss special effect A, the lottery table for the miss special effect B, the lottery table for the miss special effect C, or the lottery table for the complete miss is referenced, and for a game round in which a special effect corresponding to the third phase is executed, either the lottery table for the big win or the lottery table for the complete miss is referenced.

In addition, in the first normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode, the reserved information related to the lower operation port 859F and the reserved information related to the right operation port 883F are the subject of the reserved notice, and in the second normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode, the reserved information related to the lower operation port 859F and the reserved information related to the right operation port 883F are the subject of the reserved notice (the subject of the lottery processing when a reserved command is received).

Returning to the explanation of step S3202, if a negative determination is made in step S3202, i.e., if it is determined that a hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If a positive determination is made in step S3204, a lottery process is executed at the time of receiving a shift command in step S3205.

In the lottery process when a shift command is received, the lottery subject for the hold notice is all the hold information remaining after the shift. In other words, the lottery for the hold notice is performed based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 and the first area Rd1 to the fourth area Rd4 in the hold information storage area 667 of the RAM 654. This lottery is performed individually for each piece of stored information. The lottery order (priority order) is specified to be the most recent (fourth area Rc4, Rd4 → third area Rc3, Rd3 → second area Rc2, Rd2 → first area Rc1, Rd1). For example, if the common hold number CRN is "2", first the lottery is performed based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, Rd2, and if the lottery is not successful, the lottery is performed based on the information stored in the first area Rc1, Rd1.

As with the case of receiving a hold command, the lottery method is carried out by determining from the stored information whether the game related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether a reach display will be made, and if a reach display is made, the pattern, and then based on the corresponding lottery table and the value of the lottery counter for the hold notice provided in the lottery counter area 674.

In the lottery table storage area of ROM653, the lottery table for big win, the lottery table for special miss effect A, the lottery table for special miss effect B, the lottery table for special miss effect C, and the lottery table for complete miss are stored as lottery tables for when a shift command is received. These various tables are set so that the probability of winning the reserved notice increases in the following order: lottery table for big win > lottery table for special miss effect C > lottery table for special miss effect B > lottery table for special miss effect A > lottery table for complete miss. More specifically, for a game that triggers the start of a special effect or a transition to the second phase, any of the lottery tables for big win, the lottery table for special miss effect A, the lottery table for special miss effect B, the lottery table for special miss effect C, and the lottery table for complete miss are referenced, and for a game in which a special effect corresponding to the third phase is executed, any of the lottery tables for big win and the lottery table for complete miss are referenced.

However, these lottery tables for when a shift command is received are set to have a lower probability of winning the reserved advance notice compared to the lottery tables for when a hold command is received. For example, when comparing lottery tables for jackpots, the winning probability when referring to the lottery tables for when a shift command is received is set to be lower than the winning probability when referring to the lottery tables for when a hold command is received.

However, if the value of the common hold number CRN (number of holds) is less than a predetermined number ("4" in this embodiment), the overall probability of winning is lower than when the hold command was received, but if the value of the common hold number CRN (number of holds) is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the overall probability of winning is set to be higher than when the hold command was received.

In addition, in the first normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the low probability mode, the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 859F and the reserved information related to the right actuation port 883F are the subject of the reserved notice, and in the second normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode, the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 859F and the reserved information related to the right actuation port 883F are the subject of the reserved notice (the subject of the lottery processing when a shift command is received).

After the lottery process of step S3203 or step S3205 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3206. In step S3206, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the hold notice performance are met in the lottery process. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, i.e., if no win is determined in steps S3203 and S3205, the hold notice performance setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S3206, the hold notice performance pattern determination process is executed in the following step S3207, and the current hold notice performance pattern is stored in the following step S3208, after which the hold notice performance setting process is terminated.

If it is decided that a reserved information preview performance will be performed, based on the information stored in step S3208, the reserved information will not be included in the lottery for the reserved information preview performance until the game round related to the reserved information is executed. The stored information is then erased when the reserved information moves to the execution area.

Here, we will explain the types of hold preview effects (more specifically, preview effects executed in the hold display area NE) with reference to the schematic diagrams in Figures 99 and 100.

(Types of reserved notice performance)
All of the reserved notice performances have in common that they are configured to suggest the likelihood of a big win by changing the display mode of the reserved icon MP displayed in the reserved display area NE. The display mode (color) of the reserved icon MP is set to four colors: white, blue, yellow, and red. Of these colors, white is the basic color, and when the reserved notice performance is executed, the reserved icon MP becomes another color (blue, yellow, red).

The colors of the reserved icon MP are set in the order of white < blue < yellow < red, so that the likelihood of a jackpot result increases. Specifically, when a reserved notice is issued with a reserved icon MP corresponding to a game that will result in a jackpot, the colors are more likely to be selected in the order of white < blue < yellow < red, whereas when a reserved notice is issued with a reserved icon MP corresponding to a game that will result in a miss, the colors are more likely to be selected in the order of red < yellow < blue < white.

This hold preview performance is broadly divided into preview performance A, which does not support step-up, and preview performance B, which supports step-up, depending on the display mode of the hold icon MP (whether or not step-up is available) (see Figure 99 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 100(a), in preview performance A, after the color of the reserved icon MP changes, the color of the reserved icon is maintained until the corresponding game round (until it moves to the execution target display area Dc). In contrast, in preview performance B, as shown in FIG. 100(b), the color of the reserved icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the color that it will eventually change to is red, it is first changed to a lower color (blue or yellow) with a lower expectation, and then stepped up (promoted) to a higher color with a higher expectation at the timing when the reserved icon MP shifts. By using these two types of preview performances in combination, even if the color has a lower expectation, there is a possibility that it will change to a more expectation color by the time the corresponding game round occurs. This prevents attention to the preview performance from decreasing too early.

The color of the hold icon MP does not only change in the hold number display areas Da, Db, but may also change when moving to the execution target display area Dc. For example, when a hold icon MP that is yellow in the hold number display areas Da, Db moves to the execution target display area Dc, the hold icon MP may change to red, or when a hold icon MP that is white in the hold number display areas Da, Db moves to the execution target display area Dc, the hold icon MP may change to another color (blue, yellow, red).

Here, in the first normal game state, the above-mentioned hold notification may be executed not only when a ball enters the lower operating port 859F or when a shift occurs, but also when the game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during a special performance. Below, with reference to FIG. 98, the hold notification triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F will be explained.

Returning to the explanation of step S3204, if a negative judgment is made in step S3204, i.e., if neither a hold command nor a shift command has been received from the main control device 162, the process proceeds to step S3209. In step S3209, it is judged whether or not a special performance corresponding to the second phase is being performed. If a negative judgment is made in step S3209, the process ends as it is for setting the hold notice performance. If a positive judgment is made in step S3209, the process proceeds to step S3210.

In step S3210, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the performance gate 855F based on the detection signal (detection information) from the ball detection sensor 866F attached to the performance gate 855F. If a negative determination is made in step S3210, the setting process for this preview performance is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3210, the process proceeds to step S3211. In step S3211, the first lottery process is executed when the game ball passes through the performance gate.

In the primary lottery process when passing through the performance gate, the primary lottery table provided in the lottery table storage area 661 of the ROM 653 and the value of the lottery counter for the above-mentioned reserved notice provided in the lottery counter area 674 of the RAM 654 are referenced to perform a primary lottery based on passing through the performance gate 855F. If the primary lottery is not won, the reserved notice performance setting process ends as is, and if the primary lottery is won, the lottery process at the time of receiving the reserved command in step S3203 is executed. In other words, the same lottery (secondary lottery) is performed as when a prize is won at the lower operation port 859F.

The pending information that is selected as a candidate for the pending notice in this lottery is the pending information that triggered the start of the special effect corresponding to the second phase that is currently in progress. Since it is currently in progress, there is no time to perform the step-up described above. Therefore, when the pending notice effect pattern is determined in step S3207, the step-up corresponding notice effect B is excluded from the candidates.

When a winning entry into the lower operating port 859F occurs, an additional reserved icon MP is displayed based on that winning entry. If a game ball passes through the performance gate 855F located on the flow path (center route) toward the lower operating port 859F while the reserved icon MP is displayed, the display mode of the reserved icon MP may change (preview performance described above). In this configuration, by continuing to fire game balls toward the left route even during execution of the special performance, passing through the performance gate 855F can result in a change in the display mode of the reserved icon MP. In other words, players who are expecting a change in the display mode of the reserved icon MP can be encouraged to continue firing game balls even during the special performance. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game during the special performance.

As shown in the fifth embodiment, in a configuration in which a special effect that is started by passing through the effect gate 855F is continued by winning through the lower operating port 859F, it is important to encourage the player to continue firing game balls during the special effect in order to exercise the effect continuation function. In this regard, if it becomes possible to encourage the player to continue firing game balls during a special effect as shown in this embodiment, the effect continuation function can be exercised optimally.

By using a common display mode (color and step-up pattern) when the display mode of the reserved icon MP is changed regardless of the passage of the performance gate 855F and when the display mode of the reserved icon MP is changed based on the passage of the performance gate 855F, it is possible to suppress the changes in the display mode from becoming overly complicated while also achieving the function of suppressing the monotony described above.

When changing the display mode of the reserved icon MP based on passing through the performance gate 855F, a correlation can be created between the change in display mode and the special information (the result of the transition determination) by referring to the reserved information related to the corresponding reserved icon MP to determine whether or not to change the display mode. This is preferable in terms of preventing the reserved change from becoming stale.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment described above, when the game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during the special performance (second phase), a lottery for a hold change is performed by referring to a lottery table for hold change and a random number (value of the lottery counter for hold notice) that are referenced when the game ball enters the lower operating port 859F. However, this can be modified so that when the game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during the special performance (second phase), a lottery for a hold change is performed by referring to a lottery table for hold change and a random number (value of the lottery counter for hold notice) that are referenced at the time of the shift.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for a reserve change based on passing through the performance gate 855F, it is not necessary to use an existing lottery table or random numbers. The lottery table and random numbers for reserve changes executed based on passing through the performance gate 855F may be provided separately from the lottery table for reserve changes referenced when winning or shifting at the lower operation port 859F.

<Modification 2>
In the sixth embodiment, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a reservation notice based on the game ball passing through the effect gate 855F during a special game state corresponding to the second phase, but this is not limited to the above. Alternatively or in addition to this, a lottery may be performed as to whether or not to execute a reservation notice based on the game ball passing through the effect gate 855F during a special effect corresponding to the third phase. Similarly, a lottery may be performed as to whether or not to execute a reservation notice based on the game ball passing through the effect gate 855F during a special effect corresponding to the first phase.

<Modification 3>
In the sixth embodiment, the lottery for the reserved ball change is performed every time the game ball passes through the effect gate 855F during the special effect (second phase), but it is also possible to perform the lottery for the reserved ball change when the number of game balls that have passed through the effect gate 855F reaches a predetermined number (a number equal to or greater than 2). In such a configuration, it is preferable to notify the player of information indicating the remaining number of passes (the relationship between the number of passes through the effect gate 855F and the predetermined number) until the lottery is performed.

<Modification 4>
In the sixth embodiment, when the game ball passes through the effect gate 855F and a lottery for a reserve change is performed, the reserve change is immediately executed after the lottery is won, but a grace period may be set before the reserve change is performed after the lottery. For example, during this grace period, a premonition effect may be performed to suggest whether or not a reserve change will occur as a preliminary step to notifying the player of the lottery result for the reserve change based on the passing of the effect gate 855F. In other words, a premonition effect may be started based on the game ball passing through the effect gate 855F, and if the premonition effect corresponds to the reserve change when the premonition effect ends, the reserve change may be executed.

In such a configuration, there is a possibility that a subsequent game ball may pass through the performance gate 855F during the premonition effect, but the subsequent game ball that passes through the performance gate 855F during the premonition effect may be excluded from the lottery for the reserved change, or may be included in the lottery. For example, if a subsequent game ball that passes through the performance gate 855F during a premonition effect corresponding to a miss wins the reserved change, the result of the premonition effect may be rewritten to one corresponding to the reserved change.

<Modification 5>
In a situation where the non-electric device 858F is in the second guidance state, it is a chance for consecutive winnings to the lower operating port 859F, so the player's attention is likely to be directed to the non-electric device 858F and its surroundings (for example, the upper crane 856F and the lower crane 857F). Therefore, when a lottery for a reserved change is won during the execution of a special performance and the non-electric device 858F is in the second guidance state (i.e., when a game ball is on the lower crane 857F or when consecutive winnings are likely to occur), it is preferable to reserve (delay) the reserved change until the second guidance state is switched to the first guidance state, rather than immediately executing the reserved change. This makes it possible to suitably suppress overlooking the reserved change triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F.

<Modification 6>
In a situation where the advance notice performance B is set and the color of the reserved icon MP has not yet stepped up to the final display mode (a situation where the color is waiting for the step-up timing) when the game ball passes through the performance gate 855F, the display mode of the reserved icon MP may be stepped up in response to the passing of the game ball. In this way, by changing the display mode within a range that takes into consideration the pattern determined in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the change in the display mode is bothersome.

<Modification 7>
When it is decided during a game round to change the display mode of the reserved icon MP, the display mode is not necessarily changed at that timing, but it is also possible to reserve the change until the start of the next game round. With such a configuration, even if the passing of the performance gate 855F does not immediately result in a change in the display mode, the possibility of the display mode being changed remains until the start of the next game round.

Seventh embodiment
In the sixth embodiment, the hold notice is given when the game ball passes through the effect gate 855F during the special effect. This embodiment is similar to the sixth embodiment in that the display process is executed based on the game ball passing through the effect gate 855F during the special effect, thereby increasing the attention to the game, but the specific configuration is different from that of the sixth embodiment. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 101 and 102.

The pachinko machine shown in this embodiment is provided with a setting change function so that the manager of the game hall can change the table that is referenced during the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the above-mentioned win/loss tables include a win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode that correspond to "Setting 1," a win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode that correspond to "Setting 2," and a win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode that correspond to "Setting 3."

As shown in FIG. 101(a), in a game state where the hit/miss table for the low probability mode corresponding to "setting 1" is referenced in the above lottery, the probability of winning is 1/150, in a game state where the hit/miss table for the low probability mode corresponding to "setting 2" is referenced in the above lottery, the probability of winning is 1/120, and in a game state where the hit/miss table for the low probability mode corresponding to "setting 3" is referenced in the above lottery, the probability of winning is 1/100.

In addition, in a game state where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode corresponding to "Setting 1" is referenced in the above lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/32, in a game state where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode corresponding to "Setting 2" is referenced in the above lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/30, and in a game state where the hit/miss table for the high probability mode corresponding to "Setting 3" is referenced in the above lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/28.

In this way, the differences are set to give players an advantage in the order "Setting 1" < "Setting 2" < "Setting 3", and players who want to gain even the slightest advantage in the game are expected to play in the hope of getting "Setting 3".

The probability of winning at actuation ports 859F, 883F, etc. is manufactured to fall within a range preset by the gaming machine manufacturer, and when the probability of winning falls within that range, "Setting 1" is configured to give the gaming parlor an advantage over the player, "Setting 2" is configured to give the player an advantage over the gaming parlor, and "Setting 3" is configured to give the player an even greater advantage than "Setting 2". For convenience in the following explanation, "Setting 3" is also referred to as the "high setting".

It is also possible to reverse the relationship of advantages and disadvantages in the high probability mode from that in the low probability mode. In other words, it is possible to set the order of increasing jackpot probability to be "Setting 3" < "Setting 2" < "Setting 1". In this case, "Setting 1" corresponds to the "high setting" described above.

The setting values described above can be changed at will by the manager of the game hall or the like through a setting change operation. In a gaming machine with such a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so one of the enjoyments is playing while guessing the setting value. The pachinko machine shown in this embodiment is configured to encourage the player to make the above guess by suggesting (setting suggestion) the current setting value to the player when the setting value suggestion condition is met. One of the setting suggestions includes a setting suggestion that is executed based on the game ball passing through the effect gate 855F during a special effect. Below, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 101 (b), the processing related to the effect gate 855F among the various processing for setting suggestion executed as part of regular processing by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 will be described.

(Setting suggestion processing)
In the setting suggestion process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a special effect corresponding to the second phase is being performed. If the determination in step S3301 is negative, the setting suggestion process ends. If the determination in step S3301 is positive, the process proceeds to step S3302.

In step S3302, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the effect gate 855F based on a detection signal (detection information) from the ball detection sensor 866F attached to the effect gate 855F. If a negative determination is made in step S3302, the setting suggestion process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, a lottery process for setting suggestions is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to make a setting suggestion based on the setting suggestion table provided in the lottery table storage area of ROM 653 and the value of the lottery counter for setting suggestions provided in the lottery counter area 674 of RAM 654. The setting suggestion table is set to have differences such that the winning probability is 1/100,000 for setting "1", 1/3000 for setting "2", and 1/1000 for setting "3" (see FIG. 102(a)).

If the lottery in step S3303 results in a non-winning result, a negative judgment is made in step S3304 and the setting suggestion process ends. If the lottery in step S3303 results in a winning result, a positive judgment is made in step S3304 and the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, a setting suggestion performance execution process is performed.

In the setting suggestion performance execution process, sound effects corresponding to the setting suggestion are output from the speaker unit 29, and a setting suggestion start command is output to the display control device 910F. In the MPU 912F of the display control device 910F, based on receiving the setting suggestion start command, a process is performed to add an effect to the character image displayed on the display screen 500aF (third variable display area ME3) of the pattern display device 500F.

When both a girl character and a fairy character are displayed, an effect is added to the fairy character, which has a relatively short display time (see Fig. 102 (b1) → Fig. 102 (b2)). In contrast, when only the girl character or the fairy character is displayed, an effect is added to the girl character. The effect added to the fairy character will continue until the display of that character has ended, and the effect added to the girl character will continue until the special performance has ended.

Even if the game ball passes through the effect gate 855F again while a setting suggestion is being executed, no setting suggestion will be made based on that passage. As described above, if a setting suggestion is won in the first part of the second phase, an effect is added to the fairy character, which has a time limit on the suggestion. For this reason, the display of the effect may end before the end of the special effect. In such a case, setting suggestions may be executed multiple times during one special effect based on the new setting suggestion conditions being met (passing through the effect gate 855F → winning the lottery). This configuration prevents a decrease in the opportunities to execute setting suggestions.

The current setting value may be suggested when a game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during a special performance based on winning the lower operating port 859F. With this configuration, players who are trying to determine the setting value can be encouraged to launch game balls even during special performances.

As shown in the fifth embodiment, in a configuration in which a special effect that is started by passing through the effect gate 855F is continued by winning through the lower operating port 859F, it is important to encourage the player to continue firing game balls during the special effect in order to exercise the effect continuation function. In this regard, if it becomes possible to encourage the player to continue firing game balls during a special effect as shown in this embodiment, the effect continuation function can be exercised optimally.

<Modification 1>
In the seventh embodiment, if a lottery based on passing through the effect gate 855F during a special effect is won, a part of the special effect is changed to one corresponding to a setting suggestion, but it is not necessarily necessary to associate the special effect with the setting suggestion, and the specific form of the setting suggestion based on passing through the effect gate 855F is arbitrary. For example, a special effect may be executed in the third variable display area ME3 on the display screen 500aF, and a setting suggestion display may be performed in an area other than the third variable display area ME3 on the display screen 500aF,
<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment described above, a lottery for setting suggestions is conducted based on the game ball passing through effect gate 855F during a special effect corresponding to the second phase, but instead of or in addition to this, it is also possible to configure a lottery for setting suggestions to be conducted based on the game ball passing through effect gate 855F during a special effect corresponding to the first/third phase.

<Modification 3>
In the seventh embodiment, the setting suggestion lottery is performed every time the game ball passes through the effect gate 855F during the special effect, but it is also possible to configure the lottery for the setting suggestion to be performed when the number of game balls that have passed through the effect gate 855F reaches a predetermined number (a number equal to or greater than 2). In such a configuration, it is preferable to notify the player of information indicating the remaining number of passes (the relationship between the number of passes through the effect gate 855F and the predetermined number) until the lottery is performed.

<Modification 4>
In the seventh embodiment, the execution time when adding an effect to a fairy character in the setting suggestion executed in response to passing through the performance gate 855F is set to be shorter than the shortest execution time of the special performance (second phase). In such a configuration, the setting suggestion starts during the special performance, the setting suggestion ends during the special performance, and the setting suggestion may occur multiple times during one special performance. However, it is not essential to configure the setting suggestion to start multiple times during one special performance. For example, when the fairy character is hidden, it is also possible to configure the effect to be handed over to the girl's character, and the setting suggestion to continue until the special performance ends.

<Modification 5>
In the seventh embodiment, the actual execution time of the setting suggestion varies depending on the passing timing of the performance gate 855F (the timing of winning the lottery for the setting suggestion), but it is also possible to change this and configure the execution time to be constant regardless of the timing. For example, if the execution time (a certain time) for the setting suggestion can be secured, the lottery for the setting suggestion is performed, and if the execution time (a certain time) for the setting suggestion cannot be secured, the lottery for the setting suggestion is not performed. More specifically, the start timing of the setting suggestion in the special performance corresponding to the second phase is predefined, and if the lottery for the setting suggestion is won before the start timing, the setting suggestion is not started immediately, but is reserved (delayed) so that it is started at the start timing.

<Modification 6>
In the seventh embodiment, the display for suggesting a setting is displayed for all of "Setting 1" to "Setting 3", but it is also possible to configure the display not to be displayed for some setting values. For example, the display may not be displayed for "Setting 1", and "Setting 1" may be denied when the display is displayed.

<Modification 7>
In a situation where the non-electric device 858F is in the second guidance state, it is a chance for consecutive winnings to the lower operating port 859F, so the player's attention is likely to be directed to the non-electric device 858F and its surroundings (for example, the upper crane 856F and the lower crane 857F). Therefore, when the setting suggestion lottery is won during the execution of the special performance and the non-electric device 858F is in the second guidance state (i.e., when a game ball is on the lower crane 857 or when consecutive winnings are likely to occur), it is preferable to delay the start of the setting suggestion until the second guidance state is switched to the first guidance state, rather than starting the setting suggestion immediately. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the overlooking of the setting suggestion triggered by the passage of the performance gate 855F.

Eighth embodiment
In the configuration in which the game balls are flowed down by the game pins 93 arranged in the game area PE as shown in the first embodiment, if the direction of the game pins 93 is changed for some reason (such as during cleaning), there is a concern that the probability of winning at various ball entry sections such as the general winning hole 81 may change or ball clogging may occur more easily. In this embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, one of the features is that a device is provided to enable subsequent confirmation of whether the game pins are in the correct direction. Below, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment (configuration related to confirmation of game pins) will be described with reference to FIG. 103, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board unit 80 in the eighth embodiment.

A roughly annular check sheet CS is disposed in front of the game board unit 80 so as to cover the game area PE. The check sheet CS is transparent, and game components such as game pins 93 disposed in the game area PE can be seen from the front of the game machine through the check sheet CS. For convenience, in FIG. 103, game components such as game pins 93 located behind the check sheet CS are shown by solid lines instead of dashed lines.

The check sheet CS is divided into four rectangular sheet materials CS1 to CS4, which are arranged to surround the display surface of the variable display unit 500. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 104, each sheet material CS1 to CS4 has a pattern (hereinafter referred to as the reference pattern IF) that resembles the head of a gaming nail 93. By comparing the reference pattern IF with the head of the gaming nail 93 with the sheet materials CS1 to CS4 placed in a predetermined reference position, it is possible to check whether the gaming nail 93 is facing in the correct direction.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 105, in this embodiment, an indication means for indicating the reference mounting position of the sheet materials CS1 to CS4 relative to the pachinko machine 10 is arranged in the front door frame 14G. Specifically, a reference line TL indicating the reference mounting position of the check sheet CS can be displayed on the rear glass panel 23G of the glass unit 22G mounted on the front door frame 14, and after each sheet material CS1 to CS4 is arranged in accordance with this reference line TL, the sheet materials CS1 to CS4 are attached to the rear glass panel 23G using a fixing means such as tape, thereby completing the mounting of the check sheet CS to the pachinko machine 10. Here, the indication means will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106(a) is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the front door frame 14G, and FIG. 106(b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to the positioning of the check sheet CS. The rear glass panel 23G, like the glass panel 23 shown in the first embodiment, covers the entire play area PE and is configured to be parallel to the front of the play board unit 80G (play area forming body).

The front door frame 14G is provided with a light-emitting unit 901G that supplies light to the end face of the rear glass panel 23G. The light-emitting unit 901G has a light-emitting board on which a large number of LEDs are mounted, and the light-emitting board is connected to the notification/performance control device 140. The notification/performance control device 140 is also connected to a performance operation button 35 arranged on the front side of the front door frame 14G. This performance operation button 35 is operated in accordance with operation instructions during a game round, and serves as an opportunity to execute a performance corresponding to the operation on the variable display unit 500.

In the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140, when the performance operation button 35 is operated with the front door frame 14 open, the light emission control is performed so that the light emitting unit 901G is turned on. The rear glass panel 23G functions as a light guide plate configured so that the light from the light emitting unit 901G passes through the inside while repeatedly reflecting on both plate surfaces, and each plate surface is provided with light emitting units 902G, 903G that emit light. The light emitting units 902G, 903G are formed with a large number of fine recesses recessed from the plate surface, and the light from the light emitting unit 901G is redirected by the light emitting units 902G, 903G and is emitted outside the rear glass panel 23G. The light emitted from the light emitting units 902G, 903G is diffused by the light emitting units 902G, 903G, so that the light emitting units 902G, 903G appear to be emitting light.

Here, the light emitting units 902G and 903G are roughly divided into a rear light emitting unit 902G formed on the rear surface of the rear glass panel 23G and emitting light from the light emitting unit 901G to the rear of the gaming machine, and a front light emitting unit 903G formed on the front surface of the rear glass panel 23G and emitting light from the light emitting unit 901G to the front of the gaming machine. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 107, the front light emitting unit 903G emits light, and a decorative pattern CF imitating a girl character is displayed on the rear glass panel 23G. This decorative pattern CF is displayed only while the light emitting unit 901G is lit, and is hidden when the light emitting unit 901G is turned off. When the game performance transitions to a reach display or a step-up occurs after the transition to the reach display, the light emitting unit 901G lights up and the decorative pattern CF is displayed, suggesting a high possibility of a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 105, the rear light emitting portion 902G emits light, causing a reference line TL indicating the reference position for attaching the check sheet CS to be displayed on the rear glass panel 23G. This reference line TL is only displayed while the light emitting portion 901G is lit, and becomes invisible when the light emitting portion 901G is turned off.

Here, as shown in FIG. 107, when the glass unit 22G is viewed from the front side of the front door frame 14G, the light from the front light emitting portion 903G is easily accessible to the eyes, whereas the light from the rear light emitting portion 902G is difficult to reach the eyes. In other words, even if both the decorative pattern CF and the reference line TL are displayed on the rear glass panel 23G, when the front door frame 14G is viewed from the front side with the front door frame 14G in the closed position, the reference line TL is prevented from interfering with the visibility of the decorative pattern CF. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105, when the glass unit 22G is viewed from the rear side of the front door frame 14G, the light from the front light emitting portion 903G is difficult to reach the eyes, whereas the light from the rear light emitting portion 902G is easy to reach the eyes. In other words, even if both the decorative pattern CF and the reference line TL are displayed on the rear glass panel 23G, when the front door frame 14G is placed in the open position and the front door frame 14G is viewed from the rear side, the decorative pattern CF is prevented from interfering with the visibility of the reference line TL. This allows the rear glass panel 23G to favorably coexist with the presentation function of the front light emitting unit 903G and the instruction function of the rear light emitting unit 902G. The flow of the checking work for the game nails 93 is explained below.

(Checking the gaming nails 93)
When checking the game nails 93, the front door frame 14G is opened, and then the performance operation button 35 on the front door frame 14G is operated. This causes the light emitting unit 901G to light up, and the decorative pattern CF and the reference line TL are displayed on the rear glass panel 23G. When the front door frame 14G is viewed from the rear side, the reference line TL can be seen, while the decorative pattern CF is out of sight. In other words, the decorative pattern CF is prevented from interfering with the placement of the check sheet CS.

After placing the check sheet CS along the reference line TL, the check sheet CS is fixed to the rear surface of the rear glass panel 23G using a fixing means such as tape. This completes the installation of the check sheet CS. The front door frame 14G is then closed to turn off the light emitting unit 901G. This makes the reference line TL and decorative pattern CF invisible. Thereafter, by comparing the reference pattern IF on the check sheet CS with the head of the game nail 93 on the game board unit 80, it is possible to determine whether the game nail 93 is facing correctly.

After checking the game pins 93, the front door frame 14G is opened again and the check sheet CS is collected. The front door frame 14G is then closed to complete the game pin 93 checking process.

As described above in detail, by positioning the check sheet CS in accordance with the reference line TL displayed on the front door frame 14G, it is possible to accurately check whether the heads of the game nails 93 are in the correct position (whether there have been any deformations or other changes to the game nails) by comparing them with the image indicating their position.

Light is supplied to the edge of the glass panel 23G covering the play area PE, and the light is emitted from the rear light emission unit 902G to display the reference line TL. In this way, by providing a light-guiding function to the glass panel 23G that covers the play area PE and displaying the reference installation position as close as possible to the object to be confirmed, it is possible to improve the confirmation accuracy. In this configuration in which the reference installation position is displayed closest to the object to be confirmed, there is a concern that the light-emitting display will interfere with the confirmation work or game performance, but since it is possible to display or hide the reference installation position by switching the light-emitting means ON/OFF, such concerns can be eliminated.

The rear light emission section 902G is made up of a number of recesses formed so as to recess forward from the rear plate surface of the rear glass panel 23G. This configuration makes it possible to effectively prevent the unevenness of the rear light emission section 902G from getting caught on the check sheet CS, or the check sheet CS from lifting up from the rear glass panel 23G, causing it to bend.

By providing a front light emitting section 903G and a rear light emitting section 902G on the rear glass panel 23G and configuring the light from the light emitting section 901G to be emitted forward and backward from each light emitting section 902G, 903G, when a light emitting effect is executed during play in which light is emitted from the front light emitting section 903G, even if the light is emitted from the rear light emitting section 902G, the light is prevented from being directed toward the player, and the decorative pattern CF drawn on the rear glass panel 23G is prevented from becoming difficult to see. This allows the above-mentioned function of indicating the mounting reference position and the effect function of the light emitting display to coexist conveniently on a single glass panel.

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, the light from the light emitting unit 901G is emitted to the rear side of the glass unit 22G (specifically, the rear glass panel 23G) so that the mounting reference position (reference line TL) of the check sheet CS for the game nails 93 is visible when the glass unit 22G is viewed from the rear side of the front door frame 14G. This may be modified so that the light from the light emitting unit 901G is emitted to the front side of the glass unit 22G through the glass unit 22G so that the mounting reference position (reference line TL) of the check sheet CS for the game nails 93 is visible when the glass unit 22G is viewed from the front side. When such a modification is made, a light emitting unit for the front glass panel and a light emitting unit for the rear glass panel may be provided, and one of the two glass panels may be given a function of displaying a decorative pattern CF for display performance, and the other may be given a function of displaying the mounting reference position (reference line) of the check sheet CS. In order to improve the positional accuracy of the check sheet CS, it is preferable that the reference line be displayed on the front surface of the front glass panel when the light for displaying the reference line is emitted toward the front side.

<Modification 2>
In the eighth embodiment, the light from the light emitting unit 901G is emitted to the front and rear sides of the glass unit 22G, and the rear glass panel 23G is provided with a function for displaying a decorative pattern CF for display performance and a function for displaying a reference position (reference line TL) for attaching the check sheet CS, but it is also possible to transfer each of these functions to the front glass panel. Also, each function may be provided separately to the front glass panel and the rear glass panel.

<Modification 3>
In the above eighth embodiment, the glass unit 22G facing the play area PE from the front of the game machine is provided with a function to display the installation reference position (reference line TL) for the check sheet CS, but this is not limited to this. For example, if a transparent cover that covers the play area PE from the front is provided between the front of the game board unit and the glass unit, this cover may be provided with a function to display the installation reference position for the check sheet CS. In addition, this cover may be made openable or detachable, and the cover may be provided with the same functions as the rear glass panel 23G shown in the above eighth embodiment (the display function of the decorative pattern CF and the display function of the reference line TL).

<Modification 4>
In the pachinko machine 10 shown in the eighth embodiment, the check sheet CS for checking the game nails 93 is not provided with a mounting means for mounting the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the glass unit 22G using a fixing means such as a tape prepared separately from the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to have a mounting means for the check sheet CS. For example, a rotating arm may be provided on the frame portion of the front door frame, and the check sheet CS may be held (clamped) by being sandwiched between the arm and the glass panel. Also, the check sheet CS may be attached to the glass panel by electrostatic adsorption or other adsorption.

<Modification 5>
The panel material for displaying the reference line TL does not necessarily have to be made of glass. It is sufficient if the panel material is at least transparent, allows game pieces such as game nails to be seen through the panel material, and can function as a light guide plate. The panel material can also be made of resin such as acrylic.

<Modification 6>
In the glass unit 22G shown in the eighth embodiment, the glass panel 23G is of a multi-layer type, but it is also possible to use a single-layer type glass panel.

<Modification 7>
In the eighth embodiment, a rectangular reference line TL (mounting reference position) aligned with the outer periphery (outer edge) of the check sheet CS is displayed on the glass unit 22G (rear glass panel 23G), but the specific display form is arbitrary as long as it can clearly indicate the position of the check sheet CS. For example, in a configuration in which a reference point for positioning is provided on the check sheet CS, a target (e.g., a dot or a pattern resembling "+") indicating the position of the reference point may be displayed on the glass unit.

<Modification 8>
In the above eighth embodiment, the check sheet CS is made up of a combination of small, separable sheet materials CS1 to CS4, but it may be a single large check sheet. In addition, when combining a plurality of sheet materials CS1 to CS4, it is not necessarily necessary to unify the outer shapes of the respective sheet materials CS1 to CS4.

<Modification 9>
In the eighth embodiment, the effect operation button 35 is provided as an operation means capable of switching the light-emitting unit 901G on and off, and the display of the reference line TL is switched on and off by operating the effect operation button 35. However, in consideration of the fact that the front door frame 14G is opened when the check sheet CS is attached, it is also possible to configure the light-emitting unit 901G to light up when the front door frame 14G is opened, and the light from the light-emitting unit 901G is supplied to the glass unit 22G (configuration in which the reference line TL is displayed). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the light-emitting unit 901G to be turned off when a predetermined period has passed since the front door frame 14 was opened or when the front door frame 14 is closed.

Ninth embodiment
In the above eighth embodiment, the check sheet CS for checking the game nails is attached to the front door frame 14G, but in this embodiment, the check sheet CS is attached to the inner frame (specifically, the game board unit 80H), and the configuration related to the attachment of the check sheet CS is different from that of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to Figures 108 and 109, the attachment structure of the check sheet CS in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the eighth embodiment. Figure 108(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 80H showing an enlarged view of the left route periphery, Figure 108(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the X-X line in Figure 108(a), and Figure 109 is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 80H showing an enlarged view of the branching area of the left route and the right route.

(Attachment structure of sheet material CS2)
First, the mounting structure of the sheet material CS2 for the left route will be described with reference to Fig. 108(a). The game board unit 80H is provided with a rail cover protrusion 951H provided on the rail cover 107H for the guide rail 100 as a holding means for the sheet material CS2, a decorative block protrusion 961H provided on the decorative block 960H in which the general winning opening 81 is formed and disposed at the bottom of the game area PE, and a center frame protrusion 971H provided on the center frame 95H.

The rail cover protrusion 951H, decorative block protrusion 961H, and center frame protrusion 971H each have a seat surface 952H, 962H, 972H facing the front side of the gaming machine, and an upright portion 953H, 963H, 973H that stands up from the seat surface 952H, 962H, 972H toward the front of the gaming machine (see, for example, FIG. 108(b)). The seat surfaces 952H, 962H, 972H are located on a virtual plane parallel to the front surface of the gaming board unit 80H, and are formed so that they are the same distance from the front surface of the gaming board unit 80H. When the sheet material CS2 is arranged so as to be in surface contact with the seat surfaces 952H, 962H, 972H, the sheet material CS2 and the front surface of the gaming board unit 80H are parallel to each other.

The standing portion 953H of the rail cover protrusion 951H abuts against the edge of the sheet material CS2 from the left, and the standing portion 953H restricts the leftward displacement of the sheet material CS2. The standing portion 963H of the decorative block protrusion 961H abuts against the edge of the sheet material CS2 from below and to the right, and the standing portion 963H restricts the downward and rightward displacement of the sheet material CS2. The standing portion 973H of the center frame protrusion 971H abuts against the edge of the sheet material CS2 from above, and the standing portion 973H restricts the upward displacement of the sheet material CS2. These protrusions 951H, 961H, and 971H determine the mounting position of the sheet material CS2 and restrict it from falling off the game board unit 80H.

When the front door frame 14H is placed in the closed position, a facing portion is formed in the frame portion of the front door frame 14H that faces the seat surface 952H with a small gap between them. When the front door frame 14H is placed in the closed position with the sheet material CS2 placed on the game board unit 80H, the sheet material CS2 is sandwiched between the seat surface 952H and the facing portion, preventing the sheet material CS2 from falling off the game board unit 80H.

(Attachment structure of sheet material CS1)
Next, the mounting structure of the sheet material CS1 will be described with reference to Fig. 109. The game board unit 80H is provided with a center frame protrusion 971H (used together with the sheet material CS2) arranged on the center frame 95H as a holding means for the sheet material CS1, a center frame protrusion 981H also arranged on the center frame 95H, and an outer rail protrusion 991H attached to the guide rail 100 (specifically, the outer rail 102).

The center frame protrusions 971H, 981H and the outer rail protrusions 991H each have a seat 972H, 982H, 992H facing the front side of the gaming machine, and an upright portion 973H, 983H, 993H that stands up from the seat 972H, 982H, 992H toward the front of the gaming machine. The seat 972H, 982H, 992H are located on an imaginary plane parallel to the front surface of the gaming board unit 80H, and are formed so that they are the same distance from the front surface of the gaming board unit 80H. When the sheet material CS1 is arranged so as to be in surface contact with the seat 972H, 982H, 992H, the sheet material CS1 and the front surface of the gaming board unit 80H are parallel to each other.

The rising portion 983H of the center frame protrusion 981H abuts against the edge of the sheet material CS1 from the right, and the rising portion 983H restricts the rightward displacement of the sheet material CS1. The rising portion 973H of the center frame protrusion 971H abuts against the edge of the sheet material CS1 from below, and the rising portion 973H restricts the downward displacement of the sheet material CS1. In addition, the rising portion 993H of the outer rail protrusion 991H abuts against the edge of the sheet material CS1 from above, and the rising portion 993H restricts the upward displacement of the sheet material CS1. These protrusions 971H, 981H, 991H determine the mounting position of the sheet material CS1 and restrict it from falling off the game board unit 80H.

When the front door frame 14H is placed in the closed position, a facing portion is formed in the frame portion of the front door frame 14H that faces the seat surface 982H with a small gap between them. When the front door frame 14H is placed in the closed position with the sheet material CS1 placed on the game board unit 80H, the sheet material CS1 is sandwiched between the seat surface 982H and the facing portion, preventing the sheet material CS1 from falling off the game board unit 80H.

<Modification 1>
In the ninth embodiment, the game board unit 80H is provided with a function for determining the position of the check sheet CS for checking the game nails 93 and a function for holding the check sheet CS. It is sufficient for the game board unit to have at least the function for holding the check sheet CS, and the function for determining the position is not essential.

<Modification 2>
In the ninth embodiment, the play area PE is divided by the center frame 95H, the guide rail 100, and the play area dividing member 99, and the check sheet holders are disposed on both the center side (inside) and the outside of the play area PE, sandwiching the flow path of the game balls. It is not necessary to dispose the holders on both the center side and the outside, and it is also possible to dispose them only on either the center side or the outside.

<Modification 3>
In the ninth embodiment, protrusions constituting a holding means for the check sheet are arranged on both the center side (inside) and the outside of the flow path of the game ball in the play area PE. By having these protrusions face each other on either side of a predetermined game nail in the flow path, the accuracy of the confirmation for the predetermined game nail can be improved. There are game nails that have a relatively strong influence on the movement of the game ball and those that have a relatively weak influence. By using a game nail that has a relatively strong influence as the predetermined game nail, the accuracy improvement effect can be preferably exerted.

<Modification 4>
When considering the variation in the assembly of the game parts in the game board unit 80H, it is preferable to provide multiple (two) holding parts for the check sheet CS on one game part, and after the position of the check sheet is determined by these holding parts, the check sheet is further held by other game parts provided at a distance from the game part. This improves the positioning accuracy of the holding parts and preferably suppresses disturbance of the posture of the check sheet.

<Modification 5>
In the ninth embodiment, the outer edge of the check sheet CS is supported by the protrusions 951H, 961H, 971H, 981H, and 991H protruding from the center frame 95H and the rail cover 107H, but the holding structure of the check sheet CS is not limited to this. For example, the check sheet CS may be positioned and held by inserting a protrusion (pin) protruding from the center frame 95H or the rail cover 107H into a reference hole formed in the check sheet CS.

<Modification 6>
In the ninth embodiment, the check sheet CS is made up of a combination of small, separable sheet materials CS1 to CS4, but it may be a single large check sheet. In combining a plurality of sheet materials CS1 to CS4, it is not necessarily necessary to unify the outer shapes of the sheet materials CS1 to CS4.

<Modification 7>
In the ninth embodiment, a single sheet material is held by a plurality of protruding parts, but each of the protruding parts may have a function of holding the sheet material. For example, a movable member may be provided at the tip of each protruding part, which is movable between a clamping position where the sheet material is clamped between the seat surface and the seat and a release position where the clamping is released.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-mentioned embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments.

(1) In the above embodiments, the light guide unit 532, 732 is of a rotating type, but is not limited to this. The operation mode of the light guide unit is arbitrary, and it can be of a sliding type, for example. When it is of a sliding type, it is preferable that the sliding direction is the same as the arrangement direction of the light emission unit 553, 753 (arrangement direction of the pattern).

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the scroll direction (vertical direction) of the patterns in the first display unit and the scroll direction (vertical direction) of the patterns in the second display unit are aligned, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to configure the scroll direction of the patterns in the first display unit and the scroll direction of the patterns in the second display unit to intersect.

(3) The processing direction of the light emitting portion 553, 753 shown in each of the above embodiments may be arbitrary. For example, the unevenness as the "light emitting portion" may be formed by edging, laser processing, molding, or printing.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the light emitting section 553, 753 is configured by forming fine irregularities on the surface of the light guiding section 532, 732, but the specific configuration for emitting light in the light guiding section is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to configure the light guiding section to contain a medium having a different refractive index from the base of the light guiding section, so that light that reaches the medium is emitted from the light guiding section.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the display surface of the first display unit and the display surface of the second display unit are parallel to each other, but this is not limited to the above. It is sufficient that an operating gap is secured for each display unit to operate, and the display surface of the first display unit and the display surface of the second display unit may be configured to face in different directions.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, when the supply of light from the side light 528 to the light guiding unit 532 is stopped, the light guiding unit 532 is operated to make the movement of the light guiding unit 532 less noticeable. However, in order to realize such a technical idea, it is sufficient to use at least a part of the period during which the supply of light is stopped as the operating period of the light guiding unit 532, and it is not necessarily necessary to use the entire period during which the supply is stopped as the operating period.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the boundary portion BP1 of the light guide panels 555 to 557 is configured to extend in the same direction as the rotation center axis CL of the rotating body 525, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to configure the boundary portion BP1 to extend in a direction that intersects with the direction of the rotation center axis CL.

(8) In the above embodiments, three drums are used to display the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result, but the number of drums is arbitrary. For example, there may be one, two, or four or more drums.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, when the main control device 162 performs a lottery based on the pending information, the display of the changing patterns in the actuation port display section of the main display unit and the display of the changing patterns in the changing display area of the variable display unit 500 are started simultaneously with the lottery (more specifically, immediately after the lottery), but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to start the display of the changing patterns in the actuation port display section and the display of the changing patterns in the changing display area of the variable display unit 500 prior to the lottery.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, a difference in the degree of advantage is provided between the lottery for actuating ports 83a, 859H and the lottery for actuating ports 83b, 883H. However, a configuration may be adopted in which there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the lotteries. Also, rather than making the lottery for actuating ports 83b, 883H more advantageous to the player than the lottery for actuating ports 83a, 859H, it is also possible to make the lottery for actuating ports 83a, 859H more advantageous to the player than the lottery for actuating ports 83b, 883H.

(11) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop by operating a stop switch, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns appears on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating the effects, etc., as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
The following feature A group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with regard to the background technology, which is "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2005-074175 A).", and "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature A1. A gaming machine equipped with a picture display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/performance control device 140) that starts variable display of a picture based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (winning into the actuation port 83a, 83b) and stops and displays a picture corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means (lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the picture display means has a light guide (light guide 532) on which a plurality of light emitting portions (light emitting portions 553) are formed, and a light emitting portion (side light 528) that supplies light to an end face (end face 554) of the light guide, and when light is supplied from the light emitting portion to the light guide, the light is emitted from the light emitting portion to display the picture.

In the picture display means shown in feature A1, a picture is displayed by emitting light from a light emitting section through a light emitting section formed on a light guide. The picture can be switched between displayed and hidden by turning on and off the light emitting section, and the color of the picture can be changed by changing the color of the light emitted. In this way, constructing a picture display means by combining a light guide and a light emitting section is preferable for diversifying the display modes of pictures and increasing attention to the game.

In addition, the technical ideas shown below in Features A2 to A14 can also be applied to this feature.

Feature A2. A gaming machine equipped with a picture display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/performance control device 140) that starts variable display of a picture based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (winning into the actuation port 83a, 83b) and stops and displays a picture corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means (lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The picture display means is
A light emitting unit (side light 528),
A light guide (light guide 532) in which a light emitting portion (light emitting portion 553) is formed and in which the pattern is displayed by emitting light supplied from the light emitting portion;
A gaming machine characterized by having a change means (notification/performance control device 140) for changing the image displayed on the light guide by operating at least one of the light guide and the light emitting unit to change the location where light is irradiated from the light emitting unit to the light guide.

In the picture display means shown in feature A2, the light from the light emitting unit is emitted from a light emitting unit formed on the light guide to display the picture. The picture displayed on the light guide is changed by operating at least one of the light guide and the light emitting unit to change the location on the light guide where the light is irradiated. With this configuration, the display of the picture can be novel, which can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature A3. The light emitting portion is disposed to face the end surface (end surface 554) of the light guide,
The gaming machine described in feature A2, wherein the change means is configured to change the point at which light from the light-emitting unit is irradiated onto the end surface.

By configuring the light from the light-emitting section to be irradiated onto the end face of the light guide, the light source is prevented from being noticeable when visually checking the image.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to Feature A2 or Feature A3, characterized in that the pattern displayed on the light guide is invisible or difficult to see when the light guide is in a non-supply state (off state) in which no light is supplied from the light emitting unit to the light guide, compared to a supply state (on state) in which light is supplied from the light emitting unit to the light guide.

According to feature A4, the image becomes invisible or difficult to see (hereinafter also referred to as invisible) when the image is switched from a supply state to a non-supply state. In this way, by making it possible to switch between display and non-display, the information provided to the player by the image display means can be limited according to the game situation. It can also contribute to diversifying the display mode when variably displaying images.

Feature A5. The gaming machine described in Feature A4, characterized in that the change means is configured to operate at least one of the light guide and the light emitting unit in the supply state to change the location of the light irradiated on the light guide.

When changing the image, if at least one of the light guide and the light emitting unit is operated in a supply state in which light is supplied, the image can be made to appear to move in the direction of that operation.

Feature A6. The picture display means has a holding portion (base body 524) that operably holds the light guide,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the change means is configured to operate the light guide to change the point on the light guide where the light is irradiated.

By moving the light guide itself rather than the light emitting unit (light source), it is possible to preferably avoid limitations on how the image can be changed due to factors such as the length of the wiring. In addition, because the position of the light emitting unit can be fixed, it is possible to switch images displayed in the same position, and even when images are variably displayed, it is possible to standardize the areas that players should pay attention to. This is a preferable configuration for preventing image displays from being overlooked and reducing player fatigue.

Feature A7. The gaming machine described in Feature A6, characterized in that the operating direction of the light guide is set to be a direction that intersects with the direction of light irradiation in the light-emitting section.

The change in the distance between the light irradiating target (end face) and the light emitting unit in the light guiding body can be suppressed in association with the operation of the light guiding body. This is advantageous in terms of suppressing a shortage of light supply to the light emitting unit caused by light from the light emitting unit being diffused before being irradiated to the end face.

Feature A8. The light emitting portions are arranged in a line in the operating direction of the light guide,
The light emitting unit includes a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit arranged side by side in the operating direction of the light guide,
The gaming machine described in feature A6 or feature A7, wherein the picture display means is capable of changing the number of pictures displayed by individually controlling the light emission of the first light-emitting section and the second light-emitting section.

By using the first and second light-emitting sections, which can be individually controlled to emit light, in combination, it becomes possible to increase or decrease the number of images displayed depending on the game situation, etc., which dramatically improves the expressiveness of the image display means.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "a gaming machine described in feature A6 or feature A7, characterized in that the light emitting units are arranged in the operating direction of the light guide, the light emitting units include a first light emitting unit and a second light emitting unit arranged side by side in the operating direction of the light guide, and the picture display means controls the light emission of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit individually, thereby making it possible to change the number of pictures displayed at the predetermined display positions in the operating direction."

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A4 to A8, characterized in that the pattern display means has a means for stopping the supply of light from the light-emitting unit while the light guide is in operation.

Even in conventional gaming machines, it is possible to make the images virtually undistinguishable by, for example, varying the image display at high speed. However, this type of movement hinders the improvement of the durability of the image display means. In particular, since the light guide is heavier than paper and the like, there are concerns that such inconveniences will become more pronounced.

Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, the image displayed on the light guide can be suddenly erased by stopping the supply of light from the light-emitting unit. In this way, by configuring the appearance to change significantly (changing the distinctiveness) by controlling the light emission of the light-emitting unit, it is possible to diversify the display mode while suitably suppressing the resulting decrease in durability.

For example, it is advisable to use a display mode that clearly shows the process of the image change and a display mode that does not clearly show the process of the image change in combination. This configuration makes it possible to suitably diversify the manner in which the image is displayed.

Feature A10. The light-emitting unit is a first light-emitting unit, and light from the first light-emitting unit is emitted from the light-emitting unit located at a predetermined display position, thereby displaying the pattern at the predetermined display position.
The light emitting portion has an uneven shape,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features A6 to A8, characterized in that the pattern display means has a second light-emitting section (backlight 582 of the background display device 529) capable of irradiating light from behind the gaming machine onto a portion of the light guide located at the specified display position.

When the light-emitting section is made up of minute projections and recesses, ambient light from the lighting in the game hall and the like is diffused by the light-emitting section, making it difficult to make it completely impossible to visually identify the position and shape of the light-emitting section. In other words, it is possible to discern the shape and position of the light-emitting section by squinting. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the second light-emitting section is configured to irradiate light onto the light guide, the light from the second light-emitting section can confuse ambient light and make it difficult to discern the shape and position of the light-emitting section. This is preferable in terms of enhancing the impact when a pattern suddenly appears by switching the first light-emitting section between a supply state and a non-supply state.

Feature A11. The gaming machine described in Feature A10, characterized in that the change means has a means for operating the light guide under a condition in which the supply of light to the light guide by the first light emitter is stopped and light is being irradiated to the light guide by the second light emitter.

When the light guide is operated, it cannot be denied that it is possible to identify that the light guide is operating by looking closely, using the light emission unit as a marker. This reduces the impact when the light guide is operated while the first light emitter is not supplying light and the image is suddenly changed. Therefore, when changing the image, as shown in this feature, if the light guide is operated under a condition in which the supply of light to the light guide by the first light emitter is stopped and light is irradiated to the light guide by the second light emitter, the light from the second light emitter can be used to drown out ambient light, etc. This makes it difficult to tell that the light guide is operating, and the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature A12. The gaming machine described in Feature A10 or Feature A11, characterized in that the second light-emitting unit is configured to be able to irradiate light to both a portion of the light guide where the light-emitting unit is formed and a portion of the light guide where the light-emitting unit is not formed when the light-emitting unit is located at the predetermined display position.

According to feature A12, the light from the second light-emitting unit is irradiated to the light-emitting unit located at a predetermined display position and its surrounding area, which effectively makes it difficult to identify the shape of the light-emitting unit, the operating status of the light guide, etc.

Feature A13. The light guide is transparent and configured so that the game device (background display device 529) located behind the part where the picture is displayed can be seen from the front of the game machine.
A gaming machine described in any one of Features A2 to A12, characterized in that the image is configured to be invisible when the light guide is in a non-supply state (off state) in which no light is supplied from the light-emitting unit to the light guide, or to be more difficult to see than when the light guide is in a supply state (on state) in which light is supplied from the light-emitting unit.

According to feature A13, the image becomes invisible or difficult to see when the state is changed from the supply state to the non-supply state. This makes it possible to change the visibility of the gaming device located behind it through the light guide. For example, when the game progresses with a focus on the presentation of the gaming device, by switching to the non-supply state and making the image invisible or difficult to see, it is possible to preferably prevent the image from interfering with the visibility of the gaming device.

Feature A14. The picture display means is
A display device (second display unit) that can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine through the light guide;
A display control means for variably displaying the image on the display device (a function for executing light emission and drive control of the second display unit by the MPU 652 of the notification and performance control device 140),
The pattern includes a first pattern displayed on the light guide and a second pattern displayed on the display device,
When the light guide is in a non-supply state (light-off state) in which no light is supplied from the light-emitting unit to the light guide, the first pattern displayed on the light guide is invisible or is difficult to see as compared with a supply state (light-on state) in which light is supplied from the light-emitting unit to the light guide,
The gaming machine described in any one of features A2 to A13, characterized in that the display control means is configured to execute variable display of the second pattern on the display device in the non-supply state, while not execute variable display of the second pattern on the display device in the supply state.

Feature A14 prevents the variable display of a pattern by the light guide and the variable display of a pattern by the display device from becoming a factor that reduces visibility when one of the two is being focused on.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature B group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with regard to the background technology, which is "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2005-074175 A).", and "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature B1. A gaming machine equipped with a picture display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/performance control device 140) that variably displays pictures as the game progresses,
The picture display means is
a light guiding section (532) that is annular or substantially annular about a predetermined central axis (rotation central axis CL), that is rotatable about the predetermined central axis, and that is disposed such that a part of its outer peripheral surface (outer surface portion 551) faces the front of the gaming machine;
a light-emitting section (side light 528) that supplies light to an end surface (end surface 554) facing the same direction as the predetermined central axis in the light-guiding section;
A plurality of light emitting sections (light emitting sections 553) are provided on the outer circumferential surface and aligned in the rotation direction of the light guiding section,
The light guide unit is configured to display the pattern by emitting light supplied from the light emitting unit to an outside of the light guide unit through the light emitting unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that the light-guiding section rotates around the specified central axis, thereby changing the supply point at the end face of the light-guiding section to which light is supplied from the light-emitting section.

According to feature B1, the light supply location on the light guide (end face) changes as the light guide rotates, which is annular or approximately annular. This results in a variable display of a pattern on the light guide. Because the light guide is annular or approximately annular, the variable display of a pattern can be continued without reversing the rotation direction of the light guide. In other words, when performing dynamic display using the light guide to enhance expressiveness, the light guide can be prevented from becoming excessively large. This is a preferable configuration for increasing the attention of players.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "a gaming machine having information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (winning a prize in the actuation port 83a, 83) is established, lottery means (lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for conducting a lottery based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means, notification means (main display unit 87) for notifying the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and picture display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/performance control device 140) for variably displaying pictures according to the progress of the game, the picture display means being annular or approximately annular about a predetermined central axis (rotation central axis CL) and the predetermined central axis being a circle or a circle. A light guide (light guide 532) is provided rotatably at the center, and a part of the outer peripheral surface (outer surface 551) faces the front of the gaming machine. A light emitting unit (side light 528) supplies light to an end surface (end surface 554) of the light guide that faces the central axis. The outer peripheral surface is provided with a plurality of light emitting units (light emitting units 553) arranged in the rotation direction of the light guide. The light guide is configured to display the image by emitting light supplied from the light emitting units, and the light guide rotates around the specified central axis to change the supply location on the end surface of the light guide where the light is supplied from the light emitting units. "

Feature B2. The gaming machine described in Feature B1, characterized in that the light emission unit that is the target of emitting light among the plurality of light emission units is switched by changing the supply location.

As shown in this feature, if the light emitting section that is the target of emitting light can be switched, the pattern displayed at the specified display position can be changed (replaced). In this way, if the displayed pattern can be replaced, it is possible to greatly change the appearance of the display by the pattern display means.

Feature B3. The gaming machine described in Feature B1 or Feature B2, characterized in that the light guide section is annular and the end face is located on a plane perpendicular to the predetermined central axis.

According to feature B3, the distance from the light-emitting unit to the end face of the light-guiding unit is constant at any rotation position. Therefore, there is no need to change the position or orientation of the light-emitting unit in response to changes in the location where light is supplied. This simplifies the configuration related to the light supply in the picture display means.

Feature B4. The gaming machine described in Feature B3, characterized in that the light-emitting unit is configured so that the direction of light irradiation is the same as the predetermined central axis.

In the configuration shown in feature B4, the direction of light irradiation and the direction of arrangement of the light emitting units intersect. In other words, when multiple light emitting units are used in combination, the light emitting units are prevented from lining up in the direction of light irradiation. Therefore, when switching the image to be displayed according to the rotation position, light is prevented from being supplied to images that are not the target of display, and the occurrence of an inconvenience such as an image that should not be displayed faintly emitting light can be preferably avoided.

Feature B5: The light guide section is formed such that an area where the light emitting section is provided and an area where the light emitting section is not provided alternately in a rotation direction of the light guide section,
A gaming machine as described in feature B4, characterized in that a regulating portion for regulating the passage of light is provided in a portion of the end face of the light guiding portion corresponding to the non-installation area.

As shown in Feature B5, by arranging the arrangement areas and the non-arrangement areas alternately and providing a restriction section in the portion corresponding to the non-arrangement area, the light supply path can be prevented from crossing the non-arrangement area. This makes it possible to more effectively exert the effect shown in Feature B4.

Feature B6: A rotating body (rotating body 525) is configured by the light guiding unit and a frame (frame 531) to which the light guiding unit is fixed,
an end portion of the light guiding portion on a side where the end surface is formed extends laterally from the frame,
An insertion portion (insertion portion 561) into which the end portion of the light guiding portion is inserted,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features B3 to B5, characterized in that the light-emitting unit is arranged in a portion of the insertion portion facing the end face.

As shown in feature B3, etc., in a configuration in which the light guide section has a circular shape, an insertion section is provided through which the portion (end) of the light guide section extending from the frame is inserted, and the light emitting section is disposed in this insertion section, and the following effects can be expected. That is, even if the movement of the light guide section becomes unstable, the positional deviation of the light guide section can be suppressed at the location (insertion section) close to the light irradiation position. This allows the light supply function to be stably performed.

Furthermore, by making the insertion portion opaque and colored to hide the light-emitting portion, the appearance of the picture display means can be favorably improved.

Feature B7. The gaming machine described in Feature B6, characterized in that the picture display means has a base body (base body 524) that rotatably holds the rotating body, and the insertion portion is provided on the base body.

According to this characteristic configuration, by providing an insertion section in the base body that holds the rotating body, it is possible to minimize the gap between the insertion section and the light guide section. This is preferable in terms of suppressing strong interference between the insertion section and the light guide section and suppressing light leakage from the insertion section.

Feature B8. The gaming machine described in Feature B6 or Feature B7, characterized in that the insertion portion faces the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the light guide portion with a gap therebetween.

In a configuration in which the positional relationship between the light-emitting section and the light-guiding section is changed, there is a concern that if the light-guiding section comes into contact with the insertion section and the light-guiding section is damaged, light leakage or the like is likely to occur in that area. This is a factor that reduces the efficiency of supplying light to the light emission section. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by forming a gap between the outer peripheral surface and inner peripheral surface of the light-guiding section to avoid contact between the insertion section and the light-guiding section, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B9. The gaming machine described in Feature B8, in which the insertion portion is open toward the base side in the rotation direction of the light guide portion, and the gap is expanded toward this open portion so that it becomes larger.

The light guide section described above can be divided into multiple pieces in the rotation direction, for example, to facilitate manufacturing and reduce manufacturing costs. However, in such a configuration, if the boundary (edge) of each piece gets caught in the open part (entrance part) of the insertion part, it is expected that the behavior of the light guide section will be disturbed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the gap is formed so that it becomes larger toward the open part, and by preventing the edge from getting caught on the insertion part, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B10. The gaming machine described in Feature B9, characterized in that the open portion of the insertion portion has a component that faces toward the rear of the gaming machine.

As shown in feature B9, in a configuration in which the open portion (entrance portion) is expanded, light is more likely to leak from this portion. Therefore, by orienting the open portion toward the rear of the gaming machine, even if light does leak, it can be made less noticeable.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Feature A to Features B1 to B10 described above.

<Characteristics Group C>
The following feature C group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with regard to the background technology, which is "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2005-074175 A).", and "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature C1. A gaming machine equipped with a picture display means (variable display unit 500) that variably displays pictures as the game progresses,
The picture display means is
a light guide section (light guide section 532) that is optically transparent, in which a first light emitting section (e.g., light emitting section 553 corresponding to a symbol "6") and a second light emitting section (e.g., light emitting section 553 corresponding to a symbol "7") are formed, and that is switchable between a first state in which the first light emitting section is located at a predetermined display position (effective line) and a second state in which the second light emitting section is located at the predetermined display position;
A drive unit (motor 526) that drives the light guide unit;
A drive control means (a drive control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140) for switching the light guiding unit between the first state and the second state by controlling the drive unit;
A light-emitting unit (side light 528) that supplies light to an end face of the light-guiding unit;
A light emission control means (light emission control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140) for controlling the light emission of the light emitting unit,
The patterns include a first pattern (e.g., a "6" pattern) that is displayed by emitting light supplied from the light-emitting unit from the first light-emitting unit in the first state, and a second pattern (e.g., a "7" pattern) that is displayed by emitting light supplied from the light-emitting unit from the second light-emitting unit in the second state,
the light emission control means has a supply stopping means for stopping the supply of light by the light emitting unit when switching from the first state to the second state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the drive control means is configured to utilize at least a portion of the period during which the supply of light is stopped by the supply stopping means when switching from the first state to the second state as a drive period for driving the drive unit.

According to feature C1, when switching from the first state to the second state, the light guide unit operates by utilizing the period during which the light source unit stops supplying light (light-off period). This configuration makes it difficult for the player to notice the movement of the drive unit, and makes it appear as if the image displayed at the specified display position has suddenly changed. This type of innovative display can contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, characterized in that the supply stopping means has a means for stopping the supply of light by the light emitting unit before the light guiding unit starts operating when switching from the first state to the second state or simultaneously with the start of the light guiding operation.

According to feature C2, when changing the image displayed at the specified display position, the movement of the light guide section becomes less noticeable. This makes it possible to effectively achieve the effect shown in feature C1.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "the gaming machine described in feature C1, characterized in that the drive control means has a means for starting the drive unit after the supply of light is stopped by the supply stopping means when switching from the first state to the second state."

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, characterized in that the supply stopping means has a means for stopping the supply of light by the light emitting unit after the light guiding unit starts operating when switching from the first state to the second state.

According to feature C3, the moving image can be made to suddenly disappear, and when the image display resumes, it can be made to appear as if it has been replaced by a different image. By providing such visual changes, it is possible to effectively prevent the image display from becoming monotonous.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C3, characterized in that the light emission control means has a means for restarting the supply of light after the operation of the light guide section stops when switching from the first state to the second state.

When the light supply starts after the light-emitting section has been replaced, a different image (the replaced image) suddenly appears in the designated display position, enhancing the visual impact.

Feature C5. The gaming machine described in Feature C4, characterized in that the waiting period from when the operation of the light guide unit stops until the supply of the light is resumed is shorter than the operating period during which the light guide unit operates when switching from the first state to the second state.

As shown in feature C4, in a configuration in which the supply of light is resumed after the operation of the light guide unit is stopped, the waiting period until resumption is longer, increasing the possibility that the player will be able to visually identify the next pattern to be displayed. This is because the ambient light of an amusement hall, etc., is irradiated onto the light emitting unit, and if the player strains their eyes, the external shape of the light emitting unit may be identified. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed by shortening the waiting period when replacing the patterns.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C3, characterized in that the light emission control means has a means for starting the supply of light prior to switching the light guide section from the first state to the second state when the light guide section switches from the first state to the second state.

For example, when displaying images frame by frame at a predetermined display position, if the operating speed of the light guide unit (e.g., the scrolling speed or the changing speed) increases, the display period of the image at the predetermined display position will become shorter. This raises concerns that it will become difficult to visually identify the image. Therefore, as shown in this characteristic, if the configuration is such that the supply of light precedes the image, this inconvenience can be suppressed. This is preferable for increasing the operating speed of the light guide unit and improving responsiveness in switching images, etc.

Feature C7. The drive control means is
a first control means for operating the light guide at a first speed to switch from the first state to the second state;
a second control means for operating the light guide unit at a second speed that is faster than the first speed to switch the light guide unit from the first state to the second state;
A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C3, characterized in that the light emission control means has a means for starting the supply of light prior to switching to the second state when the second control means switches from the first state to the second state.

For example, when displaying an image frame by frame at a predetermined display position, if the operating speed of the light guide unit (e.g., the scrolling speed or the changing speed) becomes faster, the display period of the image at the predetermined display position becomes shorter. This raises concerns that it may become difficult to visually identify the image. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the resumption of light supply is preceded when the light guide unit operates at the latter of the relatively slow first speed and the relatively fast second speed, this kind of inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature C8. A first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided as a stationary display period during which the image is stationary displayed at the predetermined display position;
The gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C3, characterized in that when switching from the first state to the second state, the light emission control means has a means for starting the supply of light prior to switching to the second state if the second period is set as the period for stopping the display of the image in the second state.

When the period during which an image is statically displayed at a specified display position becomes short, it becomes difficult to visually identify the image. Therefore, in such a case (when a relatively short second period is set), the supply of light is resumed prior to switching to the second state, thereby effectively preventing the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C8, wherein the drive control means is configured not to stop the light guide part midway through the switching process when switching from the first state to the second state and when the supply of light by the light emission control means is stopped.

When replacing the images as shown in feature C1, etc., there is a concern that the impact will be reduced if the process is visually identifiable. In particular, even if the light guiding section is made transparent to make the light emitting section difficult to see, the light emitting section can be identified when the light guiding section is stopped. Therefore, by configuring the light guiding section not to stop midway through the process when switching from the first state to the second state, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C10. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C9, characterized in that the light emission control means has a supply continuation means for continuing the supply of light by the light emitting unit when switching from the first state to the second state.

By combining the configuration shown in feature C10 with the configuration shown in feature C1, etc., i.e., by combining a configuration that shows the process of changing the images with a configuration that does not show the process, the impact of suddenly switching the displayed images can be enhanced.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Features A to B to Features C1 to C10 described above.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with regard to the background technology, which is "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2005-074175 A).", and "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature D1. A gaming machine equipped with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500) that variably displays a pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (winning into the actuation port 83a, 83b),
The picture display means is
A base body (base body 524) that is rotatably held;
A plurality of light guide plates (light guide panels 555 to 557) having transparency and arranged in parallel in the rotation direction of the base body;
a light-emitting unit (side light 528) that supplies light to an end surface of the light guide plate that faces a direction intersecting the rotation direction;
The light guide plates are attached to the base body in a non-fixed state relative to each other.

As shown in feature D1, by forming the pattern display means (more specifically, the light guide unit) with multiple light guide plates arranged in parallel in the rotation direction, the shape of the pattern display means can be, for example, approximately annular. With such a configuration, it is possible to contribute to easier manufacturing of the pattern display means and reduced manufacturing costs compared to, for example, forming one light guide plate in a ring shape. Here, when multiple light guide plates arranged in parallel are bonded to each other, distortion due to manufacturing variations and the like may occur. In a configuration in which light is supplied to the end face of the light guide plate, there is a concern that the positional relationship between the light emitting portion and the end face may vary due to the influence of such distortion, and the pattern display function may not be performed well. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed by attaching multiple light guides to the base body in a state where they are not fixed to each other. This is preferable in terms of suppressing the deterioration of the appearance when the pattern is variably displayed using the light guide plate and increasing the attention of the player.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the light guide plate is fixed to the base body at a middle portion of the light guide plate in the rotation direction, and both ends in the rotation direction are free ends.

When multiple light guide plates are combined to form one light guide unit as shown in feature D1, the boundary between the light guide plates becomes conspicuous, which reduces the appearance of the light guide unit. This is undesirable in terms of attracting players' attention. In addition, in a configuration in which the light guide plate is fixed to the base body as shown in feature D1, the fixed portion of the light guide plate to the base body may differ in appearance from the non-fixed portion. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the ends on both sides of the rotation direction of each light guide are free ends, and the fixed portion is away from the boundary between the light guides. This prevents the line of sight from being guided to the boundary when the fixed portion comes into the player's field of vision, and reduces the deterioration of appearance caused by forming one light guide unit by combining multiple light guides.

Feature D3. The gaming machine described in Feature D1 or Feature D2, characterized in that the light guide plates adjacent to each other in the rotation direction are arranged such that the end faces of the light guide plates facing the rotation direction face each other with a gap therebetween.

As shown in Feature D3, by arranging adjacent light guide plates so that their end faces in the rotation direction face each other with a gap between them, it is possible to prevent the light guide plates from coming into contact with each other due to manufacturing errors in the light guide plates. This is preferable in terms of preventing the occurrence of distortions and the like as shown in Feature D1.

In addition, arranging each light guide plate so that it is not doubled on the inside and outside is advantageous in terms of preventing an increase in the weight of the unit and a decrease in responsiveness when operating the picture display means.

Feature D4: The light emitting unit is configured to irradiate light in a predetermined direction,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the end faces on both sides of the light guide plate in the rotation direction extend in the specified direction.

When a light guide unit is constructed using multiple light guide plates as shown in feature D1, it is preferable to make the boundaries between the light guides as inconspicuous as possible. Here, as shown in this feature, by aligning the direction of light irradiation with the direction in which the boundaries (end faces) extend, it is possible to prevent the boundaries from emitting light. This is preferable in terms of improving the appearance of the picture display means.

Feature D5: The pattern display means displays the pattern by emitting light from the light emitting unit through a light emitting unit formed in the light guide plate, and is configured such that an area where the light emitting unit is provided and an area where the light emitting unit is not provided alternate with each other in the rotation direction of the base body;
a boundary portion between the light guide plates is located in the non-installation region,
The light emitting unit is configured to irradiate light in a direction of a rotation center axis of the base body,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that the end faces on both sides of the light guide plate in the rotation direction extend in the direction of the rotation center axis.

When a light guide unit is constructed using multiple light guide plates as shown in feature D1, it is preferable to make the boundaries between the light guides as inconspicuous as possible. Here, as shown in this feature, by aligning the direction of light irradiation with the direction in which the boundaries (end faces) extend, it is possible to prevent the boundaries from emitting light. This is preferable in terms of improving the appearance of the picture display means.

In addition, the boundary portion is located in a non-patterned area (blank area), but because this boundary portion extends in the direction of the rotation center axis, the non-patterned area can be prevented from becoming excessively large by taking the boundary portion into consideration.

Feature D6: The pattern display means displays the pattern by emitting light from the light emitting unit through a light emitting unit formed in the light guide plate, and is configured such that an area where the light emitting unit is provided and an area where the light emitting unit is not provided alternate with each other in the rotation direction of the base body;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that the boundary portion between the light guide plates is located in the non-installation area.

As shown in Feature D6, if the boundary between the light guide plates is located in a non-patterned area (blank area), it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the boundary, making the boundary conspicuous, or reducing the efficiency of light supply.

Feature D7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D6, characterized in that the light guide plates are all curved and have the same thickness, and the outer surfaces of the light guides form a single annular imaginary surface centered on the central axis of rotation of the base body.

Feature D7 makes it possible to change the light guide to which light is supplied depending on the rotational position of the light guide unit, thereby preventing the structure of the picture display means from becoming complicated.

Feature D8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D7, characterized in that the end faces of the light guide plate facing the rotation center direction of the base body and to which light is supplied from the light emitting unit are located on the same plane.

Feature D8 can suppress differences in the distance relationship between the light-emitting section and the end face (the point where light is irradiated) for each light guide, which can contribute to improving the light supply efficiency.

Feature D9. The picture display means displays pictures at predetermined display positions (pay lines L1 to L5) based on the lottery results of the lottery means (lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that the number of light emitting portions formed on each of the multiple light guide plates is configured to be greater than the upper limit number of images displayed at the specified display position.

If the number of light guides (number of divisions) is excessively large, there will be more opportunities for the boundary portions of the light guides to stop at the specified display positions. This is feared to be a factor in reducing the appearance of the picture display means. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by specifying the number of divisions so that the number of patterns arranged on each light guide is greater than the upper limit number of patterns that can stop at the specified display positions, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for the boundary portions to stop at the specified display positions. This makes it possible to mitigate the adverse effects of using multiple light guides in combination.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Features A to C to Features D1 to D9 described above.

<Features Group E>
The following feature E group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with regard to the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2005-074175 A).", and "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature E1. A game board (game board unit 80) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the upper operating port 83a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the upper operating port 83a) when a ball enters a first starting ball entry section (e.g., the upper operating port 83a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (an upper operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the upper operating port 83a by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower actuation port 83b in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the lower actuation port 83b) when a ball enters a second start ball entry section (e.g., the lower actuation port 83b) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Rb of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the lower operation port 83b by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A picture display means (variable display unit 500Z) having a first display section (e.g., a rotating body 525Z of the first display unit) and a second display section (e.g., a rotating body 725Z of the second display unit) and capable of variably displaying pictures on each of the first display section and the second display section;
A first display control means (for example, a function of executing a game number control process related to the upper operation port 83a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the first lottery process on the first display unit when the first lottery process is performed by the first lottery means;
A second display control means (for example, a function of executing a game number control process related to the lower operation port 83b by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the second lottery process on the second display unit when the second lottery process is performed by the second lottery means,
A gaming machine, characterized in that the first display section is transparent, and the second display section is visible through the first display section.

According to feature E1, the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section is displayed on the first display section, and the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section is displayed on the second display section. In this way, by providing a first display section for the first starting ball entry section and a second display section for the second starting ball entry section separately, the player can quickly understand which starting ball entry section the game is progressing based on. However, if a display section is provided for each starting ball entry section in this way, there is a concern that the burden on the player will increase and the lottery results will be overlooked more frequently due to the scattering of noteworthy locations. In this regard, as shown in this feature, since the second display section is configured to be visible through the first display section, the amount of line of sight movement can be reduced when paying attention to the first display section and when paying attention to the second display section. Therefore, while providing a separate display for each starting ball entry section enhances uniqueness, the occurrence of the various inconveniences caused by this can be suitably suppressed. This can suitably enhance the effect of increasing attention to the game.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the first display unit and the second display unit are arranged so that the display surface (outer surface) of the first display unit and the display surface (outer surface) of the second display unit are parallel.

Feature E2 makes it possible to prevent a large difference in visibility between the picture display in the first display section and the picture display in the second display section.

Feature E3: The first display control means has a means for statically displaying a combination of pictures corresponding to a lottery result by the first lottery means after variably displaying pictures on the first display unit;
the second display control means has a means for statically displaying a picture combination corresponding to a lottery result by the second lottery means after variably displaying pictures on the second display unit,
A gaming machine described in feature E1 or feature E2, characterized in that the variable display area when a pattern is variably displayed on the first display unit and the variable display area when a pattern is variably displayed on the second display unit overlap front to back when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, if the variable image display area in the first display unit and the variable image display area in the second display unit are configured to overlap front to back, when a player is focusing on one display unit and a variable image display is performed on the other display unit, the chances that the variable display will be overlooked can be reduced without making the presentation flashy or adding unnecessary accents.

Feature E4. The first display control means has a means for displaying a picture combination corresponding to a lottery result by the first lottery means stopped on a first pay line after variably displaying pictures on the first display unit,
the second display control means has a means for displaying a picture combination corresponding to a result of the lottery by the second lottery means in a stopped manner on a second pay line after variably displaying pictures on the second display unit,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that a stopped display area when a picture combination is displayed stopped on the first effective line and a stopped display area when a picture combination is displayed stopped on the second effective line overlap front to back when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, by overlapping the stop display areas in the first display section and the second display section, in which the picture combinations corresponding to the lottery results are displayed, it is easy to identify which picture combinations correspond to the current lottery results.

In a configuration in which the lottery result is notified by a picture combination that is stopped and displayed on a winning line, it is also possible to configure the winning line in the first display section and the winning line in the second display section to overlap front to back when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Feature E5. A gaming machine according to Feature E3 or Feature E4, characterized in that the group of pictures displayed on the first display unit and the group of pictures displayed on the second display unit are different in appearance.

As shown in Features E3 and E4, in a configuration in which stationary display areas and variable display areas are overlapped front to back, the group of images displayed on each display unit can be made to appear different, improving the ability to distinguish which display unit displays which image.

In particular, as shown in feature E4, in a configuration in which the pay lines are aligned front to back, the images in the first display section and the images in the second display section are mixed together, which advantageously avoids the appearance of a combination of images corresponding to a jackpot result being displayed as if they were stopped, even though a combination of images corresponding to a miss result is displayed in each display section.

Feature E6. The display control modes of the first display unit and the second display unit by the first display control means and the second display control means include a first control mode in which a pattern is variably displayed on the first display unit while restricting the variable display of the pattern on the second display unit, and a second control mode in which a pattern is variably displayed on the second display unit while restricting the variable display of the pattern on the first display unit,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that in the first control mode and the second control mode, the image in the display section that is subject to the regulation is not displayed during the period in which the variable display is regulated.

According to feature E6, by making the image on the second display unit invisible in the first control mode and making the image on the first display unit invisible in the second control mode, confusion between the display on the first display unit and the display on the second display unit can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E7: The first display control means has a first special display means for displaying a picture corresponding to the winning result in a stopped state on the first display unit when the lottery by the first lottery means is won during the second control mode;
The gaming machine described in feature E6 is characterized in that the second display control means has a second special display means which, if a lottery is won by the second lottery means during the first control mode, displays a picture corresponding to the winning result in a stopped state on the second display unit.

In a configuration in which the lotteries by each lottery means are performed in parallel, there is a possibility that the lottery by the second lottery means is won during the first control mode, or the lottery by the first lottery means is won during the second control mode. In such a case, it is possible to use a display unit other than the display unit on the winning side to notify the winning result, but this may cause confusion for the player. On the other hand, if a variable display of a pattern is performed in the process until the lottery result is displayed, the variable display of the pattern will overlap on both display units, and the player will be provided with too much information. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the lottery by the first lottery means is won during the second control mode, the first display unit displays the pattern corresponding to the winning result in a stopped state, and if the lottery by the second lottery means is won during the first control mode, the second display unit displays the pattern corresponding to the winning result in a stopped state, thereby preferably suppressing the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above.

Feature E8: The first display unit includes a first light guide unit (light guide unit 532Z) having transparency and including a plurality of light emitting units arranged in a predetermined direction, a first light emitting unit (side light 528Z) that supplies light to the first light guide unit, and a first driving unit (motor 526Z) that drives the first light guide unit in the predetermined direction, and the pattern is displayed by emitting light from the first light emitting unit through the light emitting units formed in the first light guide unit.
The gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that the first display control means has a drive control means (drive control function in MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140) that drives and controls the drive unit, and is configured to variably display images by operating the first light-guiding unit using the drive control means.

As shown in this feature, if the first display unit is composed of a movable first light guide unit, a light emitting unit, and a drive unit, the image on the first display unit can be switched between displayed and hidden as needed. This makes it possible to ideally realize coexistence with the second display unit located behind it.

Feature E9: The first light-emitting unit is configured to emit light in a direction intersecting a direction in which the first display unit and the second display unit are arranged side by side,
The gaming machine described in feature E8 is configured so that light from the first light-emitting unit is supplied to an end face of the first light-guiding unit.

According to feature E9, the light from the first light-emitting unit is irradiated in a direction intersecting the juxtaposition direction of the first display unit and the second display unit, and is supplied to the end face of the first light-guiding unit. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the light from the first light-emitting unit from being irradiated toward the second display unit, making it difficult to understand the picture display.

Feature E10: The first display control means has a light emission control means (light emission control function in MPU 652 of notification/performance control device 140) that controls the light emission of the first light emitting unit;
The gaming machine described in feature E8 or feature E9, characterized in that the light-emitting control means and the drive control means have a special control means for operating the first light-guiding section while keeping the first light-emitting section in an off state when a pattern is displayed on the second display section by the second display control means.

With this configuration, even if the first light guide is operated while a pattern is being displayed on the second display, the pattern on the first display remains hidden, so the player can be prevented from being confused by the operation of the first light guide.

Feature E11. The gaming machine described in Feature E10, characterized in that the special control means is configured to turn on the first light-emitting unit after the operation of the first light-guiding unit has stopped.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if a pattern is displayed on the second display unit, the lottery result for the first starting ball entry unit can be notified by operating the first light guide unit in the off state and then turning on the first light emitter. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably prevent the pattern display on the second display unit from becoming difficult to understand during the process of notifying the lottery result.

Feature E12: The first light guiding portion has a circular or substantially circular shape and is supported so as to be rotatable about a central axis of the first light guiding portion;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E8 to E11, characterized in that the second display unit is arranged inside the first light guiding unit.

As shown in this feature, if the first light guide section is formed in a circular or annular shape and configured to rotate around its central axis, the distance between the first display section and the second display section can be reduced while maintaining the variable display function of the image on the first display section.

Feature E13: The second display unit includes a second light guide unit (light guide unit 732Z) having transparency and including a plurality of light emitting units arranged in the predetermined direction, a second light emitting unit (side light 728Z) that supplies light to the second light guide unit, and a second driving unit (motor 726Z) that operates the second light guide unit in the predetermined direction, and the pattern is displayed by emitting light from the second light emitting unit through the light emitting units formed in the second light guide unit.
the second light guiding section has a circular or substantially circular shape and is supported so as to be rotatable about a central axis of the first light guiding section;
The second display control means has a drive control means (a drive control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140) that drives and controls the drive unit, and is configured to perform variable display of a pattern by operating the second light guiding unit by the drive control means.
A gaming machine described in any one of features E8 to E12, characterized in that the first light-emitting section is configured to emit light in the direction of the central axis of the first light-guiding section, and the second light-emitting section is configured to emit light in the direction of the central axis of the second light-guiding section.

The configuration shown in this characteristic makes it possible to bring the first display section (first light guide section) and the second display section (second light guide section) into close proximity while preventing light from the first light emitter from being supplied to the second light guide section and preventing light from the second light emitter from being supplied to the first light guide section.

Feature E14. A game board (game board unit 80) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
A first special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the upper operating port 83a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring first special information (e.g., pending information related to the upper operating port 83a) when a ball enters a first starting ball entry section (e.g., the upper operating port 83a) provided in the game area;
A first acquired information storage means (an upper operating port reserve area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the upper operating port 83a by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means;
A second special information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing based on a ball entering the lower actuation port 83b in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring second special information (reserved information related to the lower actuation port 83b) when a ball enters a second start ball entry section (e.g., the lower actuation port 83b) provided in the game area;
A second acquired information storage means (a lower operating port reserve area Rb of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process based on a ball entering the lower operation port 83b by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sequentially performs a second lottery process (a lottery for a big win, etc.) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means;
A picture display means (e.g., a variable display unit 500Z) having a first display section (e.g., a first display unit) and a second display section (e.g., a second display unit) and capable of variably displaying a picture on each of the first display section and the second display section;
a first game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the upper operating port 83a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the first display unit prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round; and
a second game round control means (e.g., a function of executing a game round control process related to the lower operating port 83b in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of controlling the picture display means to start a variable display of a picture on the second display unit prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, display a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process, and end the variable display of the picture, which is counted as one game round;
A gaming machine characterized in that the first display unit and the second display unit are arranged side by side in front and behind with the first display unit on the front side and the second display unit on the back side, and the second display unit is viewable from the front of the gaming machine through the first display unit.

According to feature E14, the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section is displayed on the first display section, and the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section is displayed on the second display section. In this way, by providing a first display section for the first starting ball entry section and a second display section for the second starting ball entry section separately, the player can quickly understand which starting ball entry section the game is progressing based on. However, if a display section is provided for each starting ball entry section in this way, there is a concern that the burden on the player will increase and the lottery results will be overlooked more frequently due to the scattering of places that require attention. In this regard, as shown in this feature, since the second display section is configured to be visible through the first display section, the amount of movement of the line of sight can be reduced when focusing on the first display section and when focusing on the second display section. Therefore, while providing a separate display for each starting ball entry section enhances uniqueness, the occurrence of the various inconveniences caused by this can be suitably suppressed. This can suitably enhance the effect of increasing attention to the game.

The technical ideas described above in Features E2 to E13 can also be applied to Feature E14.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Features A to D to Features E1 to E14 described in detail above.

<Feature Group F>
The following feature group F was made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed through which gaming balls flow. A gaming ball is shot toward the gaming area based on a player's shooting operation, and when the shot gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a privilege such as a payout of gaming balls is given to the player based on that. In such gaming machines in which the granting of privilege depends on the movement of the gaming ball, some gaming machines disperse the flow path of the gaming ball by arranging gaming parts such as nails or windmills in the gaming area, and diversify the movement of the gaming ball, thereby increasing attention to the movement of the gaming ball and, ultimately, attention to the game (for example, see Patent Document 1).""However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in terms of increasing attention to the game through the movement of the gaming ball."

Feature F1. A game board (game board unit 80) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A gaming machine including a gaming device (gaming mechanism 800) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine,
The game device has a rolling surface (stage portion 831) on which a game ball flowing down the game area can roll, and a movable portion (movable body 821) that can be displaced to a first position and a second position, and is configured such that when a game ball is placed on the rolling surface, the movable portion is displaced from the first position to the second position, and when the game ball is released from the rolling surface, the movable portion is displaced from the second position to the first position.
A gaming machine characterized in that the period during which a gaming ball stays on the rolling surface is configured to differ depending on the rolling pattern of the gaming ball.

According to feature F1, when a gaming ball is placed on the rolling surface, the movable part is displaced from a first position to a second position, and when the gaming ball is released from the rolling surface, the movable part returns from the second position to the first position. Here, the duration that the gaming ball stays on the rolling surface varies depending on the rolling manner of the gaming ball on the rolling surface (e.g., the rolling direction and rolling speed of the gaming ball). In other words, the duration that the movable part stays at the second position depends on the above-mentioned duration. In this way, the movement of the gaming device is prevented from becoming monotonous, which contributes to increasing attention to the game.

The configuration shown in this characteristic can also be described as "a gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board unit 80) on which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, and a gaming device (gaming mechanism 800) provided in a position visible from the front of the gaming machine, the gaming device having a rolling surface (stage portion 831) on which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can roll, and a movable part (movable body 821) that can be displaced to a first position and a second position, the movable part being displaced from the first position to the second position when a gaming ball lands on the rolling surface, and the movable part being displaced from the second position to the first position when the gaming ball leaves the rolling surface."

Feature F2. The stage portion on which the rolling surface is formed is held so as to be capable of being raised and lowered;
The gaming machine described in feature F1, characterized in that the stage portion descends from the standby position to the descended position against a spring force, thereby displacing the movable portion from the first position to the second position, and the stage portion returns from the descended position to the standby position by the spring force, thereby displacing the movable portion from the second position to the first position.

According to feature F2, the movable part is displaced to the first position/second position in conjunction with the raising and lowering movement of the stage part on which the rolling surface is formed. Here, by making the movement direction of the stage part up and down, it is possible to suppress changes in the behavior of the game ball caused by the movement of the stage part. This is preferable in terms of mitigating bias in the waiting period during which the game ball waits on the rolling surface.

Feature F3. The gaming machine described in Feature F2, characterized in that the stage portion is configured to move from the standby position to the descending position due to the weight of the gaming ball resting on the rolling surface.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration utilizes the weight of the game ball positioned on the rolling surface, electrical components such as a sensor that detects the game ball on the rolling surface and an actuator that displaces the movable part based on the detection result of the sensor are not required. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention to the game while suppressing the resulting complexity of the configuration. This is preferable for promoting the use of the configuration shown in feature F1, etc.

Feature F4. The gaming machine described in Feature F3 is characterized in that the gaming device has a link section (link member 840) that connects the stage section and the movable section and is rotatably held at an intermediate position between the stage section and the movable section, and is configured so that the stage section and the movable section are displaced alternately in the vertical direction.

In a configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to raise and lower the stage section as shown in feature F3, the driving force depends on the weight of the game ball. As shown in this feature, by arranging the stage section on one end of a rotatably held link section and arranging a movable section on the other end, and forming the stage section and movable section to move up and down in a staggered manner, it is possible to reduce output transmission loss. This is preferable in terms of increasing the reliability of the operation of the gaming device, assuming that the driving force is small.

Feature F5. The gaming machine described in Feature F4, characterized in that the rotation center of the link part is disposed so as to be biased toward the movable part of the stage part and the movable part.

As shown in this characteristic, by positioning the center of rotation closer to the movable part, the weight of the movable part that can be tolerated when displacing it using the weight of the game ball can be increased. This is preferable in terms of increasing the design freedom of the gaming device.

Feature F6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features F3 to F5, characterized in that the stage portion is formed so that multiple gaming balls can roll simultaneously on the rolling surface.

As described above, in a configuration in which the weight of the game balls is used as the driving force for displacing the movable part, the displacement speed (responsiveness) can be changed depending on the number of game balls that can be positioned on the rolling surface. In this way, a configuration in which the responsiveness changes depending on the number of game balls can contribute to further diversifying the period during which the movable part is maintained in the second position.

Feature F7. The rolling surface is formed with an outlet portion (central opening 832) that is open upward and through which the game ball can pass,
A discharge passage (discharge passage 833) through which the game balls that have passed through the outlet portion pass is formed in the stage portion,
A gaming machine according to any one of Features F3 to F6, wherein the discharge passage extends vertically from the outlet portion and is a vertical passage.

In a configuration in which a discharge passage is formed in the stage section, as shown in this feature, by making the discharge passage a vertical passage, it is possible to avoid delays in the return of the stage section to the standby position due to being pushed by a game ball passing through the discharge passage, etc. This contributes to improving responsiveness when displacing the movable section to the first position/second position.

Feature F8. The rolling surface is formed with an outlet portion (central opening 832) that is open upward and through which the game ball can pass,
A gaming machine according to any one of Features F3 to F7, wherein the outlet portion is sized so that multiple gaming balls cannot pass through at the same time.

According to feature F8, when multiple game balls roll on the rolling surface, the game balls leave the rolling surface one by one, and are prevented from leaving all at once. Therefore, the period during which the movable part waits in the second position (e.g., the action period) can be diversified according to the number of game balls located on the rolling surface.

Feature F9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F3 to F8, characterized in that the path of movement of the gaming ball on the rolling surface includes multiple paths in which the gaming ball stays on the rolling surface for different lengths of time.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the duration of a gaming ball's stay on the rolling surface varies depending on which path the gaming ball takes after reaching the rolling surface. With this configuration, a player can estimate the duration of the stay to some extent by paying attention to the path the gaming ball takes. In this way, allowing players to make even a small amount of guesswork is favorable for increasing attention to the game.

Feature F10. The gaming machine described in Feature F9, characterized in that the rolling surface is formed to allow the gaming ball to move from one of the multiple movement paths to another of the multiple movement paths.

By allowing game balls to move between travel routes, it is easy to further diversify the length of stay.

Feature F11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F2 to F10, which is provided with a guide section (connecting passage 88bD) that guides the gaming ball to the rolling surface, and which is characterized in that the guide section has a plurality of flow paths that differ in the moving speed of the gaming ball moving to the rolling surface.

As shown by this feature, by configuring the game ball to move at different speeds when it moves to the rolling surface, the difference in the duration the game ball stays on the rolling surface can be increased.

The technical idea shown in this feature can also be applied to feature F1.

Feature F12. The stage portion on which the rolling surface is formed is a first stage portion,
The gaming device is a gaming machine described in any one of Features F2 to F11, characterized in that it has a second stage portion (stage portion 811) provided with a plurality of ball entry portions including predetermined ball entry portions (ball entry openings 812, 813), and is configured so that when the movable portion is positioned at the second position, it is more difficult to enter the predetermined ball entry portion compared to when the movable portion is positioned at the first position.

According to feature F12, by positioning the movable part in the second position, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the designated entry area, but the duration of this period depends on the period during which the gaming ball stays on the rolling surface. In this way, by diversifying the period during which it becomes difficult to enter the designated entry area, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to pay attention to the movement of the gaming ball on the first stage part and the second stage part.

Feature F13: The first stage portion is configured to move from the standby position to the lowered position by the weight of the game ball resting on the rolling surface;
The game device has a link portion (link member 840) that connects the first stage portion and the movable portion and is rotatably held at an intermediate position between the first stage portion and the movable portion, and is configured so that the first stage portion and the movable portion are displaced alternately in the up-down direction;
The movable portion has a stage surface forming portion (upper surfaces 823a, 824a of columnar portions 823, 824) that form a part of the stage surface of the second stage portion when the movable portion is disposed at the second position,
The gaming machine described in feature F12, wherein the stage surface forming portion is formed so that the area of the stage surface forming portion is smaller than the area of the rolling surface in the first stage portion.

In a configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used to lower the first stage section and the movable section rises in conjunction with this, when the game ball rests on the movable section (stage surface forming section), the movable section sinks downward. This is desirable in terms of diversifying the movements of the gaming device, but in a configuration in which such movements occur frequently and the state changes minutely, there is a concern that players who are paying attention to the gaming device will become more tired. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making the area of the stage surface forming section smaller than the area of the rolling surface of the first stage section and reducing the opportunities for the number of game balls on the stage surface forming section to exceed the number of game balls on the rolling surface, the above-mentioned minute state changes can be suppressed, and a practically desirable configuration can be realized.

Feature F14: The first stage portion is configured to move from the standby position to the lowered position by the weight of the game ball resting on the rolling surface;
The game device has a link portion (link member 840) that connects the first stage portion and the movable portion and is rotatably held at an intermediate position between the first stage portion and the movable portion, and is configured so that the first stage portion and the movable portion are displaced alternately in the up-down direction;
The gaming machine described in Feature F12 or Feature F13, wherein the movable part has a passage forming part (upper surfaces 823a, 824a of columnar parts 823, 824) that forms the bottom of a passage through which a gaming ball that flows into the designated ball entry part passes when the movable part is positioned at the first position, and the passage forming part is configured to protrude upward from the designated ball entry part when the movable part is positioned at the second position.

As shown in this feature, by forming a discharge passage (bottom) in the second stage section using the passage forming part of the movable part and configuring this passage forming part to protrude upward from the designated ball entry section, it is possible to prevent game balls heading toward the designated ball entry section from landing on the movable part. This makes it possible to preferably avoid shortening the period during which it is difficult for game balls that have reached the second stage to enter the designated ball entry section.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Features A to E to Features F1 to F14 described above.

<Feature Group G>
The following feature group G was made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed through which gaming balls flow. A gaming ball is fired toward the gaming area based on a firing operation by a player, and when the fired gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a privilege such as a payout of gaming balls is given to the player based on that. In such gaming machines in which the granting of privilege depends on the movement of the gaming ball, some gaming machines disperse the flow path of the gaming ball by arranging gaming parts such as nails or windmills in the gaming area, thereby diversifying the movement of the gaming ball and thereby increasing attention to the movement of the gaming ball and, ultimately, attention to the game (for example, see Patent Document 1).""However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in terms of increasing attention to the game through the movement of the gaming ball."

Feature G1. A gaming machine having a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A distribution means (upper crane 856F) that distributes the game balls flowing down the game area to a first flow path (first branch passage portion 864F) and a second flow path (second branch passage portion 865F);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a guide means (non-electric device 858F) that can be switched between a first state (first guiding state) in which a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is guided to a ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) and a second state (second guiding state) in which a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path and the second flow path is guided to the ball entry section.

According to feature G1, when the guiding means is in the first state, the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means are guided to the ball entry section by the guiding means. In other words, in the first state, the ball entry path to the ball entry section is limited to the first flow path. In contrast, when the guiding means is in the second state, not only the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means but also the game balls distributed to the second flow path are guided to the ball entry section by the guiding means. In other words, in the second state, there is room for the game balls distributed to the second flow path to enter the ball entry section, and the frequency of balls entering the ball entry section is higher than in the first state. In this way, by configuring the balls that are apparently missed by the distribution means to have a chance to enter the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's attention to the game balls distributed to the second flow path, and to contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

Feature G2. A gaming machine having a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
A distribution means (upper crane 856F) that distributes game balls flowing down the second predetermined flow path (center route) of the first predetermined flow path (side route) and the second predetermined flow path (center route) formed in the game area to a first special flow path (first branch passage portion 864F) and a second special flow path (second branch passage portion 865F);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a guide means (non-electric device 858F) switchable between a first state (first guiding state) in which a gaming ball flowing down the first special flow path is guided to a ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) and a second state (second guiding state) in which a gaming ball flowing down the first special flow path, the second special flow path and the first specified flow path is guided to the ball entry section.

According to feature G2, when the guiding means is in the first state, the game balls distributed to the first special flow path by the distribution means are guided to the ball entry section by the guiding means. In other words, in the first state, the ball entry path to the ball entry section is limited to the first special flow path. In contrast, when the guiding means is in the second state, not only the game balls distributed to the first special flow path by the distribution means but also the game balls distributed to the second special flow path are guided to the ball entry section by the guiding means. In other words, in the second state, there is a room for the game balls distributed to the second special flow path to enter the ball entry section, and the frequency of balls entering the ball entry section is higher than in the first state. In this way, by configuring the balls that are apparently a miss by the distribution means to have a chance to enter the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's attention to the game balls distributed to the second special flow path, and to contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

Feature G3. A game board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed;
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on a ball entering a starting ball entry section (operation openings 83a, 83b) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (an operating port display section of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended;
A distribution means (upper crane 856F) that distributes game balls flowing down the second predetermined flow path (center route) of the first predetermined flow path (side route) and the second predetermined flow path (center route) formed in the game area to a first special flow path (first branch passage portion 864F) and a second special flow path (second branch passage portion 865F);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a guide means (non-electric device 858F) that can be switched between a first state (first guiding state) in which a gaming ball flowing down the first special flow path is guided to the starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F), and a second state (second guiding state) in which a gaming ball flowing down the first special flow path, the second special flow path, and the first specified flow path is guided to the starting ball entry section.

According to feature G3, when the guiding means is in the first state, the game balls that are distributed to the first special flow path by the distribution means are guided to the start ball entry section by the guiding means. In other words, in the first state, the ball entry path to the start ball entry section is limited to the first special flow path. In contrast, when the guiding means is in the second state, not only the game balls that are distributed to the first special flow path by the distribution means, but also the game balls that are distributed to the second special flow path, and further the game balls that flow down the first predetermined flow path (game balls that did not reach the distribution means) are guided to the start ball entry section by the guiding means. In this way, by configuring the game balls that do not reach the distribution means and are likely to miss, and the game balls that are not distributed by the distribution means to be given the opportunity to enter the start ball entry section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's attention to game balls that flow down paths other than the first special flow path, and to contribute to increasing the attention to the game.

This configuration allows for bias in the frequency of occurrence of the starting ball entry area, so that game-round actions are executed in rapid succession or are not executed at all, enhancing the sharpness of the game progress. This helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature G4. The gaming machine described in Feature G3, characterized in that the first and second predetermined flow paths are formed so that the time required for a gaming ball flowing down the first predetermined flow path to move from the branching position of the first and second predetermined flow paths to the guiding means is different from the time required for a gaming ball flowing down the second predetermined flow path to move from the branching position to the guiding means.

According to feature G4, there is a difference in the predetermined period until the game balls that are split into the first and second predetermined flow paths reach the guiding means. This makes it easier for the density of the balls to change in the ball entry span when both the leading game ball and the trailing game ball are heading toward the starting ball entry section. This makes it possible to preferably exert the effect shown in feature G3.

Feature G5. The gaming machine described in Feature G3, characterized in that the first predetermined flow path is formed so that the time required for a gaming ball flowing down the first predetermined flow path to move from the branching position of the first predetermined flow path and the second predetermined flow path to the sorting means is shorter than the time required for a gaming ball flowing down the second predetermined flow path to move from the branching position to the sorting means.

According to feature G5, the time required for a gaming ball to pass through the second predetermined flow path → guiding means is shorter than the time required for a gaming ball to pass through the first predetermined flow path → sorting means → guiding means. As a result, when a leading gaming ball passes through the first route and a trailing gaming ball passes through the second route, the trailing gaming ball approaches the leading gaming ball, making it easier for consecutive balls to enter the game. This allows the effect shown in feature G3 to be optimally exerted. In particular, it is preferable to increase the time required for a gaming ball to flow down the first predetermined flow path, which is relatively more advantageous, and to shorten the time required for a gaming ball to flow down the second predetermined flow path, which is relatively less advantageous, in order to increase the attention of players.

Feature G6. The gaming machine described in Feature G4 or Feature G5, characterized in that the distribution means has a retention section in which gaming balls can be retained, and an inlet portion of the first special flow path and an inlet portion of the second special flow path through which gaming balls retained in the retention section can flow.

If the distribution means is configured to allow the game balls to remain stationary as shown in feature G6, the period difference shown in feature G5 can be suitably ensured.

Feature G7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features G3 to G6, characterized in that the distribution means is configured to distribute a greater number of gaming balls to the second special flow path than to the first special flow path.

Feature G7 makes it possible to significantly increase the difference in the frequency of goals scored between a case where no goals are scored in the starting goal area and a case where goals are scored in the starting goal area continuously.

Feature G8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features G3 to G7, characterized in that the guiding means is configured to switch to the guiding state when the gaming ball guided by the guiding means to the starting ball entry section reaches a predetermined position between the guiding means and the starting ball entry section.

According to feature G8, when one game ball lands in the starting ball entry area, it becomes easier for subsequent game balls to also land in the starting ball entry area, and balls will continue to land in the starting ball entry area. In this way, if the first ball serves as a priming for balls to continue to land, the technical ideas shown in feature G1 above can be ideally embodied.

The technical ideas shown in Features G3 to G8 may also be applied to Features G1 to G2.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Features A to F to Features G1 to G8.

<Feature H Group>
The following feature group H was made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed through which gaming balls flow. A gaming ball is shot toward the gaming area based on a player's shooting operation, and when the shot gaming ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a privilege such as a payout of gaming balls is given to the player based on that. In such gaming machines in which the granting of privilege depends on the movement of the gaming ball, some gaming machines disperse the flow path of the gaming ball by arranging gaming parts such as nails or windmills in the gaming area, and diversify the movement of the gaming ball, thereby increasing the attention to the movement of the gaming ball and, ultimately, the attention to the game (for example, see Patent Document 1).""However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in terms of increasing the attention to the game through the movement of the gaming ball."

Feature H1. A game board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed,
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on a ball entering the starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (an operating port display section of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended;
The game area is provided with a special flow path (center route) formed so that a game ball that has passed through a predetermined position (non-electric role 858F) in the game area flows into the starting ball entry section,
This gaming machine is characterized by having a guide means (non-electric device 858F and lower crane 857F) that guides other gaming balls following the gaming ball that has passed the specified position to the starting ball entry section when the gaming ball is located in the special flow path.

According to feature H1, a game ball that passes a predetermined position in the game area passes through a special flow path and enters the start entry section. Here, if a game ball heading toward the start entry section is located in the special flow path, other game balls (subsequent game balls) will be guided to the start entry section, making it easier for consecutive balls to enter the start entry section. With this configuration, it is possible to create a bias in the frequency of balls entering the start entry section, and it is also possible to create a bias in the frequency of game-play actions based on balls entering the start entry section. This can prevent the game progress from becoming monotonous and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature H2. The guide means is
A stage part (lower crane 857F) which constitutes the special flow path and has a rolling surface on which the game ball can roll;
A holding section (base body 851F) that holds the stage section so that the stage section can be raised and lowered between a standby position and a lowered position;
a biasing portion that biases the stage portion to the standby position;
A movable body (non-electric device 858F) that is disposed at the predetermined position and can be switched between a first state and a second state in which the game ball is guided so that the game ball flows more easily into the special flow path than in the first state;
a link mechanism that connects the stage portion and the movable body,
The gaming machine described in feature H1, wherein the guiding means is configured so that a gaming ball is placed on the rolling surface of the stage portion and the stage portion descends from the waiting position to the descended position against a biasing force, thereby switching the movable body from the first state to the second state.

According to feature H2, when a game ball passes a predetermined position and lands on the stage section (rolling surface), the stage section is displaced from the standby position to the descending position. As the game ball displaces to the descending position, the movable body switches from the first state to the second state, facilitating the flow of the ball into the special flow path, and the balls continue to enter the starting ball entry section. With this configuration, the technical idea shown in feature H1 can be effectively embodied.

Feature H3. The gaming machine described in Feature H2, characterized in that the stage portion is configured to move from the standby position to the descending position due to the weight of the gaming ball resting on the rolling surface.

As shown in feature H2, the weight of the game ball can be used to link the stage and the movable body. This can prevent the control load related to the game progress from increasing, which can lead to bias in the frequency of balls scoring.

Feature H4. The stage portion is configured to return from the lowered position to the standby position by the biasing force of the biasing portion when the game ball on the rolling surface is separated from the rolling surface,
The gaming machine described in feature H3, wherein the movable body switches from the second state to the first state as the stage portion returns from the standby position to the descended position.

According to feature H4, the movable body is maintained in the second state while the leading game ball is rolling on the rolling surface. In this way, by delaying the timing at which the leading game ball enters the starting ball entry section while waiting for the arrival of the following game ball, the player has time to visually check the state of successive ball entries, and the player's satisfaction can be suitably increased.

Feature H5. The stage portion is configured to return from the lowered position to the standby position by the biasing force of the biasing portion when the game ball on the rolling surface is separated from the rolling surface,
The gaming machine described in feature H3, characterized in that the movable body switches from the second state to the first state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after switching from the first state to the second state.

According to feature H5, the movement of the stage section and the movement of the movable body are not completely linked, and after the movable body enters the second state, it returns to the first state after a predetermined period of time has passed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game balls flowing down the play area from landing on the stage section one after another, and to prevent the movable body from being maintained in the second state for an excessively long time. In other words, by placing a certain limit on the consecutive entries of game balls, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned bias in the frequency of entries from becoming excessive.

Feature H6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features H3 to H5, characterized in that the stage section is configured so that the orientation of the rolling surface when placed in the standby position coincides with the orientation of the rolling surface when placed in the descending position.

When a game ball is placed on the stage section and the stage section descends, the change in the position of the stage section can be avoided, thereby suppressing disturbances in the game ball's behavior. Suppressing disturbances in the game ball's behavior in this way is favorable for increasing attention to the game ball on the stage section.

Feature H7: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information),
A gaming machine described in any one of features H2 to H6, characterized in that the number of special information that can be stored by the acquired information storage means is less than the maximum number of gaming balls that can be positioned on the rolling surface.

As shown in this feature, by making the amount of special information that can be stored smaller than the number of game balls that can be positioned on the stage portion (rolling surface), it is possible to prevent an excessive number of consecutive balls being scored without a transition determination being made, even while earning a high number of consecutive balls. This is preferable in terms of preventing a decrease in the sense of exhilaration that comes from consecutive balls being scored.

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features H3 to H7, characterized in that the stage section is configured so that gaming balls cannot reach the stage section via any route other than the special flow path.

As shown by this feature, by limiting the trigger for consecutive goals to the passing of a specific position, it is possible to prevent consecutive goals from starting at an unintended timing. In this way, by reducing the chances of missing the start of consecutive goals, it is possible to effectively utilize the effect of increasing attention that consecutive goals can have.

Feature H9. The predetermined position is a first predetermined position;
A distribution means (upper crane 856F) is provided for distributing the game balls that have reached the branch position to the first predetermined position and a second predetermined position different from the first predetermined position,
A gaming machine described in any one of Features H2 to H8, characterized in that in the first state, the movable body is configured to guide a gaming ball that has reached the first predetermined position to the special flow path, while not guiding a gaming ball that has reached the second predetermined position to the special flow path, and in the second state, the movable body is configured to guide a gaming ball that has reached the first predetermined position and the second predetermined position to the special flow path.

According to feature H9, the movable body is switched to the second state when the game ball sorted to the first predetermined position by the sorting means flows into the special flow path. As a result, even if the subsequent game ball is sorted to the second predetermined position, it is guided to the special flow path by the movable body. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of an event occurring in which consecutive balls do not score even though the conditions for starting consecutive balls are met.

Feature H10. A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the play area,
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on a shot into a starting shot section provided in the game area;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (an operating port display section of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended;
The starting ball entry section includes a first starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) arranged in a first flow path (left route) in the game area, and a second starting ball entry section (right operating port 883F) arranged in a second flow path (right route) different from the first flow path,
A switching means (electric device 891F) for switching between an acceptance state in which a ball can be scored into the second starting ball scoring section and a non-acceptance state in which a ball can be scored more difficultly or impossiblely than in the acceptance state;
A switching control means for controlling the switching means (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) is provided,
As a switching control mode of the switching means by the switching control means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which a switching manner to the receiving state is more advantageous to a player than the first switching mode are provided,
In the first switching mode, the game ball is launched into the first flow path, which is more advantageous to the player than the game ball is launched into the second flow path, and in the second switching mode, the game ball is launched into the second flow path, which is more advantageous to the player than the game ball is launched into the first flow path,
The first flow path has a special flow path (a lower loop 857F constituting a center route) formed so that a game ball that has passed through a predetermined position (a non-electric device 858F) in the first flow path flows into the first starting ball entry section,
This gaming machine is characterized by having a guide means (non-electric device 858F) that guides other gaming balls following the gaming ball that has passed the specified position to the first starting ball entry section when the gaming ball is located in the special flow path.

According to feature H10, a game ball that passes a predetermined position in the game area passes through a special flow path and enters the first start entry section. Here, if a game ball heading toward the first start entry section is located in the special flow path, other game balls (subsequent game balls) will be guided to the first start entry section, making it easier for consecutive balls to enter the first start entry section even in the first switching mode. With this configuration, it is possible to create a bias in the frequency of balls entering the start entry section in the first switching mode, and it is also possible to create a bias in the frequency of game-play actions based on balls entering the start entry section. This can prevent the game progress from becoming monotonous and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Features A to G to Features H1 to H10 described above.

<Characteristics Group I>
The following feature I group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with regard to the background technology, which is "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2005-074175 A).", and "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing an increase in attention to games."

Feature I1. A starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the play area (play area PE),
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means becomes one game round;
A display unit (a display screen 500aF) having a display unit (a pattern display device 500F),
A game machine equipped with a performance execution means (a function of executing a display performance by a notification/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) capable of executing a performance corresponding to a judgment result by the transition judgment means in the display unit in conjunction with the game operation,
A passage section (effect gate 855F) provided in the game area through which game balls flowing down the game area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passing portion,
The starting ball entry section and the passing section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream portion of a left route) formed in the game area,
The performance execution means includes:
An effect starting means for starting a special effect based on the game ball passing through the passing portion;
A gaming machine characterized by having an effect ending means for ending the special effect started by the effect starting means based on a ball scoring in the starting ball scoring section.

In a type of gaming machine that executes effects linked to game play operations on a specified display unit, the monotony of the game can be suppressed by diversifying the process (display mode) until the result of the judgment by the transition judgment means is notified. In this type of gaming machine, although it is possible to increase the attention to the game, the following inconveniences may occur because the presence or absence of effects depends on the ball entering the starting ball entry section. In other words, if the period during which no effects are performed becomes long, the absence of a ball entering the starting ball entry section becomes noticeable, which may be a factor in reducing the player's motivation to play. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, a special effect is started (pre-started) when the game ball passes through the passing section, and the special effect ends based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section. This prevents the period during which no effects are executed on the specified display unit from becoming excessively long, and prevents a decrease in the attention to the game. This is preferable in terms of preventing a decrease in motivation to play.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the play area (play area PE), an information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in MPU 602 of main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on a ball entering the starting ball entry section, an acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in MPU 602 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a transition determination means (a function of storing reserved information in MPU 602 of main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information). a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information; and a predetermined notification means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for performing the game operation, counting as one game round a game round in which the game operation is ended by a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means. a display unit (500F) having a display unit (display screen 500aF), and a presentation execution unit (a function of executing display presentation by the notification/presentation control device 140 and the display control device 410) capable of executing a presentation corresponding to the judgment result by the transition judgment means in the display unit in conjunction with the game-time operation, the game machine being provided with a passing section (presentation gate 855F) provided in the game area and through which a game ball flowing down the game area passes, and a detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the starting ball entry section, the starting ball entry section and the passing section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting the downstream part of the left route) formed in the game area, and are configured so that the passing section has a higher passing frequency than the starting ball entry section, and the performance execution means has a performance start means for starting a special performance based on the game ball passing through the passing section, and a performance end means for ending the special performance started by the performance start means based on the ball entering the starting ball section.

Feature I2. The gaming machine described in Feature I1, characterized in that the passing section is disposed upstream of the starting ball entry section in the specified flow path, and a gaming ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the starting ball entry section.

According to feature I2, by locating the passing section, which is the trigger for the start of the special effect, upstream of the starting ball entry section, which is the trigger for the end of the special effect, it is possible to effectively suppress the prolongation of the non-effect period.

Feature I3. The gaming machine described in Feature I1 or Feature I2, in which the predetermined flow path is a flow path that connects the passing section and the starting ball entry section, and a gaming ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the starting ball entry section.

According to feature I3, a game ball flowing down a specified flow path can enter the starting ball entry section after passing through the passing section. This can result in a single game ball serving as both the start and end trigger for a special performance.

Feature I4. The effect start means sets an execution period of the special effect when the special effect is started based on the game ball passing through the passing section,
The gaming machine described in any one of Features I1 to I3, characterized in that the effect ending means is configured to delay the end timing of the special effect so that, when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry section during the execution period set by the effect starting means, the special effect continues even after the execution period has elapsed.

According to feature I4, when a special effect starts, an execution period for that special effect is set, and if a ball lands in the starting ball entry area during this execution period, the special effect continues even after the execution period has elapsed, and the end timing of the special effect is delayed. This makes it possible to avoid the special effect being abruptly terminated by a ball lands in the starting ball entry area, and to prevent the appearance of the special effect from deteriorating.

Feature I5. The effect ending means is a first ending means,
The gaming machine described in feature I4 is characterized in that the effect execution means has a second termination means for terminating the special effect after the execution period has elapsed if no ball enters the starting ball entry section during the special effect started by the effect start means.

As shown in feature I4, when a special effect is started based on the game ball passing through the passing section, an execution period for the special effect is set. If the execution period elapses without the ball scoring in the starting ball scoring section, the special effect ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to get the impression that the special effect is completely unrelated to the ball scoring in the starting ball scoring section.

Feature I6. The special effect has a first part and a second part that is executed after the first part in such a way that the player recognizes that the second part is connected to the first part;
The effect starting means starts the special effect by executing the first part,
The gaming machine described in feature I5, wherein the second ending means is configured to end the special effect without transitioning to the second part.

According to feature I6, the special effect transitions from the first part to the second part, thereby increasing anticipation for the transition to the special game state. If the above-mentioned execution period elapses without a ball entering the starting entry section in a special effect triggered by the passing through the passing section, the transition to the second part is avoided, and a high level of anticipation is not displayed even though no judgment has been made by the transition judgment means. In this way, by preventing the player's sense of anticipation from being unnecessarily stirred up, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as a decrease in the player's attention even when a situation is one that requires attention. This is preferable in terms of optimally exerting the attention-increasing effect of the special effect.

Feature I7. The special effect has a first part and a second part that is executed after the first part in such a way that the player recognizes that the second part is connected to the first part;
the effect start means is a first start means for starting the special effect by causing the first part to be executed,
The performance execution means includes:
a first transition means for transitioning the special effect from the first part to the second part based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entry section during the special effect, when the special effect is started by the first start means;
A second starting means for starting the special effect by executing the first part based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entry section under a situation where the special effect is not being executed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features I1 to I6, characterized in that it has a second transition means for transitioning the special effect started by the second starting means from the first part to the second part.

As shown in feature I7, in a special effect that is started based on the passage of the passing section, the first part is executed first, and if a ball enters the start entry section during the first part, the special effect transitions to the second part. On the other hand, if a special effect corresponding to the first part is started based on a ball entering the start entry section while a special effect is not being executed, and then the transition to the second part is made, it is possible to expect a transition to the second part even when a special effect corresponding to the first part is being executed. This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that a special effect corresponding to the first part = no ball entering the start entry section. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the special effects.

Feature I8. The gaming machine described in Feature I7, wherein the first transition means is configured to delay the transition timing of the special effect from the first part to the second part based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entry section during the special effect started by the first start means, from the timing of the ball entering the starting ball entry section.

According to feature I8, when a transition to the second part occurs based on a ball entering the starting ball entry section during a special performance, the timing of the transition can be made difficult or impossible to identify. By making it difficult to identify the timing of the transition to the second part in this way, the transition to the second part can be anticipated at any time during the first part, and the attention-increasing effect described above can be effectively achieved.

Feature I9. The special effect has a first part and a second part that is executed after the first part in such a way that the player recognizes that the second part is connected to the first part;
the effect start means is a first start means for starting the special effect by causing the first part to be executed,
The performance execution means includes:
a first transition means for transitioning the special effect from the first part to the second part based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entry section during the special effect, when the special effect is started by the first start means;
A second starting means for starting the special effect by executing the first part based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entry section under a situation where the special effect is not being executed;
A second transition means for transitioning the special effect started by the second starting means from the first part to the second part;
A gaming machine as described in feature I5 or feature I6, characterized in that after the special effect is started by the first starting means, when the gaming ball reaches a specific position in the specified flow path between the passing section and the start entry section, where the ball is confirmed to enter the start entry section, before the timing at which the special effect is ended by the second ending means, the gaming machine has a delay means for delaying the special effect until the gaming ball that has passed through the specific position enters the start entry section.

According to feature I9, after a special effect is started by the first starting means, the game ball may reach a specific position in a specified flow path before the timing at which the special effect is ended by the second ending means, thereby extending the special effect. With this configuration, it is possible to effectively perform the function of continuing the special effect by the ball entering the starting ball entry section while keeping the execution period set in association with the passage of the passing section as short as possible.

Feature I10. The gaming machine described in Feature I9, wherein the effect execution means has a change means capable of changing the display mode of the special effect from a first mode to a second mode when the special effect is delayed by the delay means and the special effect would end before the ball enters the starting ball entry section if the delay is not executed.

According to feature I10, when a special effect that would normally end before the ball enters the start entry area is continued by the game ball reaching a specific position, this is suggested or indicated by switching the display mode of the special effect from the first mode to the second mode. With this configuration, attention to the start entry area can be encouraged and the chance of missing the ball entering the start entry area can be reduced. As already explained, when the special effect transitions from the first part to the second part due to the ball entering the start entry area, it becomes clear that the timing of the transition may deviate from the timing of the ball entering the start entry area, so that the function of suppressing a decrease in attention during the first part can be optimally exerted.

Feature I11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I10, characterized in that the effect execution means has a means for starting the special effect when a ball lands in the starting ball entry section while the special effect is not being executed, and for ending the special effect when a predetermined execution period has elapsed.

In a configuration in which a special effect is executed when a ball enters the starting ball entry area while a special effect is not being executed, and the special effect is started (pre-started) based on the game ball passing through the passing area before entering the starting ball entry area, the effect of preventing a decrease in attention to the game can be effectively achieved.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Features A to H to Features I1 to I11 described above.

<Characteristics Group J>
The following feature J group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology, which is "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2005-074175 A).", and "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing an increase in attention to games."

Feature J1. A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the play area,
A starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the game area;
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means becomes one game round;
A display unit (a display screen 500aF) having a display unit (a pattern display device 500F),
A display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for controlling the display of the display unit;
A passage section (effect gate 855F) provided in the game area through which game balls flowing down the game area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passing portion,
The starting ball entry section and the passing section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream portion of a left route) formed in the game area,
The display control means executes a predetermined display process when a gaming ball passes through the passing section during the gaming operation, and does not execute the predetermined display process when the gaming ball passes through the passing section when the gaming operation is not in progress.

According to feature J1, when a game ball passes through a passing section located in the same predetermined flow path as the starting ball entry section during a game operation (during a game), a predetermined display process is executed (when the game ball passes through the passing section when the game operation is not in progress, the predetermined process is not executed). In this configuration, when the game ball continues to be launched toward the starting ball entry section even during a game operation, the display content on the display section, etc. can be changed in accordance with the passage of the passing section, and the monotony of the display can be suitably suppressed. This suppresses the monotony of the display and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the play area (play area PE), an information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in MPU 602 of main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on a ball entering the starting ball entry section, an acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in MPU 602 of main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means for storing predetermined transition information (e.g. winning information a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the transition corresponding result (jackpot result) that corresponds to the predetermined transition information as a result of the determination by the transition determination means; A game machine including a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed when the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the row judgment means becomes one game round, and the game machine includes a passing section (performance gate 855F) provided in the game area through which a game ball flowing down the game area passes, and a detection means capable of detecting the game ball passing through the passing section. (ball detection sensor 866F), the starting ball entry section and the passing section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (center route constituting the downstream part of the left route) formed in the game area, and the game machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a display means that executes a predetermined display process when the game ball passes the passing section during the game cycle operation, and the display means is configured not to execute the predetermined display process when the game ball passes the passing section under a situation where the game cycle operation is not in progress.

Feature J2. A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the play area,
A starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the game area;
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means becomes one game round;
A display unit (a display screen 500aF) having a display unit (a pattern display device 500F),
A gaming machine comprising a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for controlling the display of the display means,
A passage section (effect gate 855F) provided in the game area through which game balls flowing down the game area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passing portion,
The starting ball entry section and the passing section are disposed in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream portion of a left route) formed in the game area,
The display control means
A ball-scoring display means for executing a ball-scoring display (a hold display) based on a ball scoring into the starting ball-scoring section on the display unit (a function for executing a process for displaying a hold icon on the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410);
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a change means (a function of executing processing for changing the color of the hold display icon in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that changes the display mode of the score-entry response display (for example, the color of the hold display icon) based on the passage of a game ball through the passing section during the score-entry response display.

According to feature J2, when a ball enters the starting entry area, a ball entry corresponding display is executed based on the ball entry. When a game ball passes through a passage section located in the same predetermined flow path as the starting entry area during the ball entry corresponding display, the display mode of the ball entry corresponding display can be changed by a change means. In this configuration, if the game ball continues to be launched toward the starting entry area even during the ball entry corresponding display, the display mode of the ball entry corresponding display changes, thereby suitably preventing the ball entry corresponding display from becoming monotonous. This prevents the display from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

Feature J3: The scoring corresponding display means has a means for changing the display mode of the scoring corresponding display during the scoring corresponding display process to a predetermined display mode,
The gaming machine described in feature J2 is characterized in that the change means has a lottery means for determining by lottery whether or not to make the change when a gaming ball passes through the passing section while the scoring response display is on, and has a means for changing the display mode of the scoring response display to a predetermined display mode when it is determined by lottery by the lottery means that the change should be made.

As shown in feature J3, by using a common display mode (a predetermined display mode) when the display mode of the scoring corresponding display is changed regardless of the passage of a passing section and when the display mode of the scoring corresponding display is changed based on the passage of a passing section, it is possible to suppress the changes in the display mode from becoming excessively complicated while also achieving the function of suppressing the monotony described above.

Feature J4. The gaming machine described in Feature J3, characterized in that the lottery means performs the lottery based on whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transition information.

According to feature J4, by determining whether or not to change the display mode by referring to the special information, it is possible to provide a correlation between the change in display mode made by the change means and the special information (the result of the transition determination). This is preferable in terms of preventing the change made by the change means from becoming obsolete.

Feature J5: The scoring response display means has a special display means for changing the display mode of the scoring response display to a predetermined display mode through a plurality of different display modes;
The gaming machine described in feature J3 or feature J4 is characterized in that the change means has a special change means which changes the display mode of the scoring corresponding display before it is changed to the specified display mode by the special display means when a gaming ball passes through the passing section before the display mode of the scoring corresponding display is changed to the specified display mode by the special display means and the lottery means decides to make the change.

In a configuration in which the display mode of the ball-entering display is changed to a predetermined display mode (final display mode) in a pre-determined pattern, if the game ball passes through the passing section before the special display means changes to the predetermined display mode and the lottery means decides to make a change, the display mode is changed before the special means changes to the predetermined display mode. In this way, by changing the display mode within a range that takes into consideration the pre-determined pattern, it is possible to make it less likely that the player will feel that the change in display mode is bothersome.

Feature J6. The gaming machine described in Feature J5, characterized in that when the game ball passes through the passing section before the display mode of the ball-entering display is changed to the predetermined display mode by the special display means and the lottery means determines that the change will be made, the special change means changes the display mode of the ball-entering display at an earlier timing than the pattern determined by the special display means, so as to follow the pattern determined by the special display means.

As shown in feature J6, by configuring the change in the display mode of the scoring corresponding display to be accelerated (advanced) when the game ball passes through the passing section during the scoring corresponding display, the above-mentioned effect of suppressing monotony can be achieved while also effectively preventing this from becoming a cause of confusion for the player.

Feature J7: The special display means is configured to change the display mode of the ball-entering corresponding display when a game round is started,
The gaming machine described in feature J6, wherein the special change means has a means for, when a decision to make the change is made during a game round, reserving the change until the start of the next game round.

When a decision is made during a game round to change the display mode of the ball-entering display, the display mode is not necessarily changed at that time, but the change may be reserved until the start of the next game round. With this configuration, even if the display mode does not change immediately after passing through the passing section, the possibility of the display mode being changed remains until the start of the next game round. This makes it easier to maintain the level of attention mentioned above at a high level.

Feature J8: The scoring corresponding display means has a special display means for changing the display mode of the scoring corresponding display to a predetermined display mode through a plurality of different display modes;
A gaming machine described in any one of features J5 to J7, characterized in that after the display mode of the goal-scoring display has been changed to the specified display mode by the special display means, the goal-scoring display cannot be changed by the special change means.

The display mode of the ball scoring display is changed to a predetermined display mode in a pre-determined pattern, and once the display mode has become the predetermined display mode, the ball scoring display is no longer subject to change by the change means. This makes it possible to avoid, for example, a situation in which a display mode with a relatively high expectation level reverts to a display mode with a relatively low expectation level, which could cause a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Feature J9: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information,
The display control means is a hold display control means for displaying a number of hold images (hold icons) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a hold display area provided on the display unit, and for sequentially moving the hold images from the hold display area to a judgment display area provided on the display unit,
The reserved display control means has a normal change means for changing the display mode of the reserved image in the process of moving the reserved image,
A gaming machine described in any one of features J2 to J7, characterized in that the change means is a special change means capable of changing the display mode of the reserved image when the display mode is not changed by the normal change means.

According to feature J9, when a ball enters the starting ball entry area, a pending image is displayed based on the ball entry. If a game ball passes through a passing section located in the same predetermined flow path as the starting ball entry area while the pending image is being displayed, the display mode of the pending image can be changed by a change means. In other words, if the game ball continues to be fired toward the starting ball entry area while the pending image is being displayed, the display mode of the pending image changes, thereby suitably preventing the display corresponding to the ball entry from becoming monotonous. This prevents the display from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

Feature J10. A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the play area,
A starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the game area;
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means becomes one game round;
A display unit (a display screen 500aF) having a display unit (a pattern display device 500F),
A performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means on the display unit (a function for executing a display performance on the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410);
A passage section (effect gate 855F) provided in the game area through which game balls flowing down the game area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passing portion,
The starting ball entry section and the passing section are disposed in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream portion of a left route) formed in the game area,
The effect execution means has a means for changing at least a part of the effect to be executed after the timing of the game ball passing through the passing section while the effect is being executed by the effect execution means.

According to feature J10, when a ball enters the starting entry section, a presentation corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is executed on the display unit. If the game ball passes through the passing section during this presentation, at least a part of the presentation executed thereafter may be changed. In this way, if the presentation can be changed while the game ball is being continuously launched, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and encourage the player to continue the operation of launching the game ball.

The technical ideas shown in features J2 to J9 can also be applied to this feature.

Feature J11. A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the play area,
A starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the game area;
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means becomes one game round;
A display unit (a display screen 500aF) having a display unit (a pattern display device 500F),
A performance execution means (a function of executing display performance in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that executes a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means in the display unit,
A setting value determination means for determining one of a plurality of setting values corresponding to an expected value of acquisition of game balls, the setting values being determined from the plurality of setting values;
a set value changing means that is operated to change the set value determined by the set value determining means,
A first set value and a second set value, the second set value being greater than the first set value, are provided as the set value,
A passage section (effect gate 855F) provided in the game area through which game balls flowing down the game area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passing portion,
The starting ball entry section and the passing section are disposed in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream portion of a left route) formed in the game area,
The effect execution means includes means for suggesting the set value on the display unit based on the game ball passing through the passing section while the effect is being executed.

According to feature J11, when a ball enters the starting entry section, an effect corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means is executed on the display section. If the game ball passes through the passing section during this effect, a set value may be suggested. In this way, if the configuration is such that the set value can be suggested while the game ball is being continuously launched, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and encourage the player to continue the operation of launching the game ball.

The technical ideas shown in features J2 to J9 can also be applied to this feature.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in Features A to I to Features J1 to J11 described in detail above.

<Feature K group>
The following feature K group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology, which is "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2005-074175 A).", and "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature K1. A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the play area,
A starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the game area (game area PE);
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means becomes one game round;
A display unit (a display screen 500aF) having a display unit (a pattern display device 500F),
A performance execution means for executing a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means on the display unit (a function for executing a display performance on the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410);
A passage section (effect gate 855F) provided in the game area through which game balls flowing down the game area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passing portion,
The starting ball entry section and the passing section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream portion of a left route) formed in the game area, and a game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the starting ball entry section.
The performance execution means includes:
A first starting means for starting a first special performance in the predetermined area based on the game ball entering the start ball entry portion;
A second starting means for starting a second special effect in a predetermined area of the display unit based on the game ball passing through the passing portion;
having
A gaming machine characterized in that the first special effect and the second special effect are configured so that at least a portion including the beginning of each special effect is recognized by a player as being the same.

In a type of gaming machine in which a transition to a special gaming state is determined based on a ball entering a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area, it is possible to suppress monotony in the game by executing a performance corresponding to the result of the transition determination on the display unit. However, in such a configuration, if a situation in which no balls enter the starting ball entry section occurs continues, the state in which no performance is performed on the display unit becomes noticeable. This gives the player the impression that no balls enter the starting ball entry section, and there is a concern that this will be a factor that leads to a decrease in motivation to play. Here, according to the configuration shown in this characteristic, not only is a first special performance performed in a predetermined area of the display unit based on a ball entering the starting ball entry section, but a second special performance may be performed in a predetermined area of the display unit based on the game ball passing through a passing section arranged on a flow path (predetermined flow path) toward the starting ball entry section. In this way, if a configuration is adopted in which a special performance is performed not only by a ball entering the starting ball entry section but also by passing through a passing section, it is possible to suitably suppress the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by a long period of time in which the performance is not performed on the display unit. The first and second special effects are configured so that at least a portion of each effect, including the beginning portion, is recognized by the player as being the same. When special effects are performed in a specified area, at least the common portion (the beginning portion) remains capable of scoring in the starting scoring area, which can favorably increase the attention paid to the special effects performed in the specified area.

Feature K2. The gaming machine described in Feature K1, characterized in that the second starting means is configured to start the second special effect in the specified area based on the game ball passing through the passing section when the first special effect is not being executed in the specified area.

According to feature K2, the first special effect based on the ball entering the starting entry section is executed with priority. In this way, the second special effect based on the ball passing through the passing section is positioned as a supplementary effect, which is preferable for smooth game progress with the first special effect as the main focus and for increasing attention to the special effects.

Feature K3. The gaming machine described in Feature K1 or Feature K2, wherein the effect execution means is configured to execute the first special effect of the first special effect and the second special effect when the ball passes through the passing section and the ball enters the starting ball entry section at the same time in a situation where the special effect is not being executed.

According to feature K3, if the passing through the passing section and the ball entering the starting entry section occur at the same time, the special effect based on the ball entering the starting entry section is executed with priority. In this way, positioning the special effect based on the passing through the passing section as auxiliary has the technical significance of being able to avoid unnecessary transitions from the second special effect to the first special effect, etc.

Feature K4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K3, characterized in that the execution period of the second special effect is configured to be shorter than the execution period of the first special effect.

This prevents the first special performance, which is not essentially related to whether or not a transition to a special game state can be made, from becoming drawn out. This allows the effect shown in feature K1 to be optimally exerted.

Feature K5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features K1 to K4, characterized in that the effect execution means has a special effect transition means for transitioning from the second special effect to the first special effect without waiting for the lapse of the execution period of the second special effect when a game ball enters the starting ball entry section during execution of the second special effect.

According to feature K5, if a ball lands in the starting ball entry area while the second special effect is being executed, the first special effect will be activated. Transitioning from the second special effect, which is not substantially related to whether or not a transition to the special game state can be made, to the first special effect, which is related to whether or not a transition to the special game state can be made, is preferable in terms of achieving the effect of increasing attention to the game through the special effect.

Feature K6. The gaming machine described in Feature K5, wherein the special effect transition means transitions from the second special effect to the first special effect in a manner that allows the player to recognize that a series of effects is being performed in the specified area.

The configuration shown in feature K6 makes it difficult to distinguish the connection between the first special effect and the second special effect, strengthening the coordination between the two special effects.

Feature K7: The first special effect has a first part and a second part executed after the first part;
A gaming machine according to feature K6, characterized in that the second special effect is composed of the first part.

Feature K7 can reduce or eliminate the sense of discomfort felt when transitioning from the second special effect to the first special effect.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be "a gaming machine described in feature K6, characterized in that the first special effect has at least the first part of a first part and a second part executed after the first part, and the second special effect is composed of the first part."

Feature K8. After the end of the first special effect, the first start means is configured to be unable to start the first special effect until a predetermined period has elapsed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K7, characterized in that after the first special effect ends, the second special effect cannot be started by the second starting means until a period of the same length as the specified period has elapsed.

Feature K8 makes it possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the second special effect by unifying the behavior after the first special effect ends between the first and second special effects.

Feature K9. The gaming machine described in Feature K8 is configured such that, after the second special effect ends, the second starting means cannot start the second special effect until a period of the same length as the predetermined period has elapsed.

According to feature K9, when the second special effects are consecutive, the sense of incongruity of the second special effects can be reduced by ensuring an interval period (predetermined period) between the two second special effects similar to the case when the first special effect is consecutive, the first special effect.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in features A to J to features K1 to K9 described above.

<Feature L group>
The following group of features L was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a gaming ball passes through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2005-074175 A).", "In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing an increase in attention to games."

Feature L1. A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching game balls into the play area,
A starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the game area;
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result (jackpot result) which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means becomes one game round;
A display unit (a display screen 500aF) having a display unit (a pattern display device 500F),
A first performance execution means (a function of executing display performance in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means on the display unit;
A passage section (effect gate 855F) provided in the game area through which game balls flowing down the game area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passing portion,
The starting ball entry section and the passing section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream portion of a left route) formed in the game area, and a game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the starting ball entry section.
The gaming machine is characterized by having a second effect execution means which, based on the detection of a gaming ball by the detection means, executes a special effect on the display unit whose execution period is longer than the period required for the gaming ball to pass through the passing section and enter the starting entry section.

In a type of gaming machine in which a transition to a special gaming state is determined based on a ball entering a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous by executing a performance corresponding to the result of the transition determination on the display unit. However, in such a configuration, if a situation in which no balls enter the starting ball entry section occurs continues, the state in which no performance is performed on the display unit becomes noticeable. This is likely to give the player the impression that no balls enter the starting ball entry section, and there is a concern that this will lead to a decrease in motivation to play. Here, according to the configuration shown in this characteristic, not only is a performance performed on the display unit based on a ball entering the starting ball entry section, but a special performance may also be performed on the display unit based on the game ball passing through a passing section located on a flow path (a specified flow path) toward the starting ball entry section. In this way, if a configuration is adopted in which a special performance is performed not only by a ball entering the starting ball entry section but also by passing through a passing section, it is possible to suitably prevent the period in which the performance is not performed on the display unit (blank or non-performance period) from becoming longer and the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring. In addition, because the execution period of the special effect is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the passing section and enter the starting ball entry section, it is possible to reduce the chance of a blank period occurring between the special effect and the effect that starts when the ball enters the starting ball entry section. This makes it possible to effectively increase the attention paid to the effects on the display section.

Feature L2. The gaming machine described in Feature L1, wherein the first effect execution means is configured to transition the effect on the display unit from the special effect to an effect corresponding to the result of the determination made by the transition determination means when a ball lands in the starting ball entry section during the special effect.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, if a ball lands in the starting ball entry area during a special performance, the special performance will transition to a performance that corresponds to the result of the determination made by the transition determination means. By applying the technical idea shown in feature L1 to this configuration, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of blank periods between performances.

When transitioning from a special effect to an effect corresponding to the result of the determination made by the transition determination means, it is preferable to minimize the visual gap during the transition so that the player recognizes that the two effects are connected.

Feature L3. A gaming machine according to Feature L1 or Feature L2, characterized in that a distribution means (upper crane 856F) is provided in the section of the predetermined flow path between the passing section and the starting ball entry section, for distributing the game ball to a first flow path (first branched passage section 864F) that allows the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section and a second flow path (second branched passage section 865F) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first flow path.

In a configuration in which game balls that have passed through the passing section are distributed to the first flow path/second flow path by a distribution means, it is easy for a bias to occur in the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section. Therefore, by configuring the special performance to start based on the passing of the passing section, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned blank from becoming large due to a bias in the frequency of balls entering.

Feature L4. The predetermined flow path is formed so that all of the game balls distributed to the first flow path enter the starting ball entry portion,
The gaming machine described in feature L3, wherein the second effect execution means has an extension means for extending the execution period of the special effect when a gaming ball is distributed to the first flow path during the special effect.

In a configuration in which a game ball distributed to the first flow path is guaranteed to land in the starting ball entry area, if the special effect is extended when a game ball is distributed to the first flow path during the special effect, the above-mentioned gap between the special effect and the effect based on the ball entering the starting ball entry area can be reduced. In addition, by providing such an extension function, it is possible to shorten the execution period of the special effect, which is specified in advance, as much as possible, and the prolongation of the special effect can be suppressed.

Feature L5. The gaming machine described in Feature L4, wherein the extension means is configured so that the period extended by the extension means is longer than the period required for the gaming ball to enter the starting ball entry section through the first flow path.

By determining the extension period based on the time required for the ball to enter the starting entry area via the first flow path, it is possible to prevent the extension function described in feature L4 from being poorly performed.

Feature L6. The predetermined flow path is formed so that any game ball that reaches a specific point in the predetermined flow path enters the starting ball entry section;
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L5, characterized in that the second effect execution means has an extension means for extending the execution period of the special effect based on the game ball reaching the specific location during the special effect.

By configuring a game ball that reaches a specific point on a specified flow path to be confirmed as entering the starting ball entry section, and extending the special effect when the game ball reaches that specific point during the special effect, it is possible to effectively reduce the chance of the above-mentioned blank occurring between the special effect and the effect based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section. Furthermore, by providing such an extension function, it is possible to minimize the execution period of the special effect that is specified in advance, and to effectively prevent the special effect from being prolonged.

Feature L7. As the special effects, a first special effect and a second special effect set to have a higher expectation of transitioning to the special game state than the first special effect are provided;
The second effect execution means has a means for executing the first special effect based on the game ball passing through the passing portion,
The extension means is configured to perform the extension when a ball enters the starting ball entry section during the first special performance based on the passage of the passing section, and to execute the second special performance during the extended period,
A gaming machine described in any one of features L4 to L5, characterized in that the second effect execution means is capable of transitioning from the first special effect to the second special effect even if a ball does not enter the starting ball entry section.

After the special performance begins, there are cases where the ball lands in the starting ball entry area and cases where the ball does not. In the latter case, there is a possibility of transitioning to a special game state after a transition judgment, but in the former case, no transition judgment is made and therefore transition to a special game state cannot be expected. Here, there is a possibility of transitioning to a second special performance in both cases where the above-mentioned extension occurs and where it does not occur, and during the special performance, the player's attention will be directed to whether or not there will be a transition to the second special performance. This allows the effect of increasing attention to the game described above to be optimally exerted.

Feature L8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features L1 to L7, characterized in that the second performance execution means ends the special performance if the execution period has elapsed without a ball entering the starting ball entry section during the special performance.

In a configuration in which game balls that pass through the passing section are divided into those that enter the starting entry section and those that do not, an event may occur in which the ball does not enter the starting entry section during a special performance. In such a case, the special performance can be ended when the execution period has elapsed, making it possible to suitably prevent the special performance from dragging on.

Feature L9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features L1 to L8, characterized in that, during the execution of a performance by the first performance execution means, even if the gaming ball passes through the passing section, the special performance is not started based on the passing.

In a configuration where the effects based on the ball entering the starting entry section are directly linked to the transition judgment results, and the special effects based on the ball passing through the passing section are not directly linked to the transition judgment results, it is preferable to have a configuration that prioritizes the former over the latter, as shown in this feature.

Feature L10. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The transition determination means is configured to sequentially determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information,
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L9, characterized in that the number of gaming balls that pass through the passing section among the gaming balls launched into the specified flow path is greater than the number of gaming balls that enter the starting entry section among the gaming balls launched into the specified flow path.

In a configuration in which the number of game balls passing through the passing section is greater than the number of game balls entering the starting ball entry, the occurrence of the above-mentioned blanks can be effectively suppressed by executing a special performance based on the passing through the passing section.

Feature L11: After the performance by the first performance execution means is ended, the performance by the first performance execution means is not started until a predetermined waiting period (determined display time) has elapsed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L10, characterized in that the second effect execution means is configured such that after the special effect ends, the special effect cannot be started until a period of the same length as the specified waiting period has elapsed.

According to feature L11, the behavior after the end of a special effect based on the ball entering the starting entry section and a special effect based on the ball passing through the passing section can be unified, thereby reducing the sense of incongruity felt by the special effect.

Feature L12. A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a play area (play area PE) is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball into the play area,
A starting ball entry section (lower operating port 859F) provided in the game area;
An information acquisition means (a function of acquiring reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the shot into the starting shot section;
An acquired information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a win/lose determination process, etc., in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a predetermined transition information (e.g., winning information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game round control means (a function of executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means becomes one game round;
A display unit (a display screen 500aF) having a display unit (a pattern display device 500F),
A first performance execution means (a function of executing display performance in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means on the display unit;
A passage section (effect gate 855F) is provided in the game area and through which the game balls flowing down the game area pass,
The starting ball entry section and the passing section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream portion of a left route) formed in the game area, and a game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the starting ball entry section.
A second effect execution means for executing a special effect on the display unit based on the game ball passing through the passing section,
The second effect execution means is characterized in that it has a means for setting the execution period of the special effect to a period longer than the period required for a game ball that has passed through the passing section to enter the starting ball entry section.

In a type of gaming machine in which a transition to a special gaming state is determined based on a ball entering a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous by executing a performance corresponding to the result of the transition determination on the display unit. However, in such a configuration, if a situation in which no balls enter the starting ball entry section occurs continues, the state in which no performance is performed on the display unit becomes noticeable. This is likely to give the player the impression that no balls enter the starting ball entry section, and there is a concern that this will lead to a decrease in motivation to play. Here, according to the configuration shown in this characteristic, not only is a performance performed on the display unit based on a ball entering the starting ball entry section, but a special performance may also be performed on the display unit based on the game ball passing through a passing section located on a flow path (a specified flow path) toward the starting ball entry section. In this way, if a configuration is adopted in which a special performance is performed not only by a ball entering the starting ball entry section but also by passing through a passing section, it is possible to suitably prevent the period in which the performance is not performed on the display unit (blank or non-performance period) from becoming longer and the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring. In addition, because the execution period of the special effect is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the passing section and enter the starting ball entry section, it is possible to reduce the chance of a blank period occurring between the special effect and the effect that starts when the ball enters the starting ball entry section. This makes it possible to effectively increase the attention paid to the effects on the display section.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in features L2 to L11 to feature L12.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in features A to K to features L1 to L12 described above.

<Feature M group>
The following group of features M was made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that "some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, give players privileges, such as the payout of gaming balls, when a ball enters an entry part, such as a starting hole, provided in the gaming area, and diversification of the flow paths of the gaming balls is realized by arranging gaming nails in the gaming area (see, for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2002-78904 A).""In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, the state of the gaming nails may change when the gaming area is cleaned, etc., and if the state of the gaming nails changes, problems such as ball clogging may occur. Here, when checking whether the state of the gaming nails has not changed, that is, whether they are in the normal state, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to this check."

Feature M1. A game board (game board unit 80, 80H) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed with a plurality of game nails (game nails 93) protruding from the front side, and a game machine body (inner frame 13, 13H) having a support frame (inner frame base body 50) that supports the game board;
a door body (front door frame 14, 14G) that is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the gaming machine body and that covers the gaming area from the front of the gaming machine when the door body is placed in a closed position;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine body or the door body is provided with at least one of an indicating means for indicating the mounting position of a check sheet (check sheet CS) made of a transparent sheet material with a pattern indicating the position of the head of the gaming nail, where the check sheet overlaps the gaming board when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a holding means for holding the check sheet arranged at the mounting position.

According to feature M1, by positioning the check sheet according to an indication means provided on the gaming machine main body or door body, it is possible to accurately check whether the heads of the gaming nails are in the correct position (whether there is no deformation or other change in the gaming nails) by comparing them with the image indicating their position. Furthermore, since the check sheet is held by the holding means and the operator does not need to hold the check sheet by hand, it is possible to prevent the position of the check sheet from shifting during checking, which would result in a decrease in checking accuracy or a decrease in workability. Therefore, it is possible to ideally check whether the gaming nails are in the correct state.

The configuration shown in feature M1 can also be described as "a gaming machine comprising a gaming board (game board unit 80, H) on which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed with a plurality of gaming nails (game nails 93) arranged so as to protrude to the front side, a gaming machine main body (inner frame 13, 13H) having a support frame (inner frame base body 50) that supports the gaming board, and a door body (front door frame 14, 14G) that is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the gaming machine main body and that covers the gaming area from the front of the gaming machine when placed in the closed position, and the gaming machine main body or the door body is provided with at least one of an indication means capable of indicating an attachment position of a check sheet (check sheet CS) made of a transparent sheet material with a pattern indicating the position of the head of the gaming nail, where the check sheet overlaps the gaming board when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a holding means capable of holding the check sheet arranged at the attachment position."

Feature M2. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed with a plurality of game nails (game nails 93) protruding from the front side, and a game machine body (inner frame 13) having a support frame (inner frame base body 50) that supports the game board;
a door body (front door frame 14G) that is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the gaming machine body and that covers the gaming area from the front of the gaming machine when the door body is placed in a closed position;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine body or the door body is provided with an indication means (glass panel 23G and light-emitting portion 901G) for indicating the attachment position of a check sheet (check sheet CS) made of a transparent sheet material with a pattern indicating the position of the head of the gaming nail, where the check sheet overlaps the gaming board when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

According to feature M2, by positioning the check sheet according to the indication means provided on the gaming machine body or door, it is possible to accurately check whether the heads of the gaming nails are in the correct position (whether there are any deformations or other changes in the gaming nails) by comparing them with the image indicating their position.

Feature M3: A transparent panel (e.g., a glass panel 23G) provided on one of the door body and the gaming machine body, facing the game area when the door body is in the closed position;
a light emitting means (light emitting unit 901G) for supplying light to an end of the transparent panel,
The gaming machine described in feature M2 is characterized in that the indicating means is configured to display the installation position by emitting light from the light-emitting means from a light emitting portion (rear light emitting portion 902G) formed on the transparent panel.

According to feature M3, light is supplied to the edge of the transparent panel covering the play area, and the light is emitted from the light emitting section to display the installation position. In this way, by providing a light guiding function to the transparent panel covering the play area and displaying the installation position of the check sheet as close as possible to the object to be checked, the accuracy of the check can be improved. In this configuration where the installation position is displayed closest to the object to be checked, there is a concern that the light emitting display will interfere with the game performance or checking work, but since it is possible to show or hide the installation position by switching the light emitting means ON/OFF, such concerns can be eliminated.

Feature M4. The indication means and the transparent panel are disposed on the door body,
The gaming machine described in feature M3, wherein the light emitting portion is formed so as to emit light from the rear surface of the transparent panel toward the gaming area.

According to feature M4, the installation position of the check sheet is clearly indicated by illuminating the light emitting means with the door open. After the check sheet is placed and the chuck sheet is fixed using a fixing means such as tape, the light emitting part faces backwards by closing the door, preventing the light from the light emitting means from interfering with the checking work.

Feature M5. The gaming machine described in Feature M4, characterized in that the light emission section is made up of a number of recesses formed forward from the rear plate surface of the transparent panel.

Feature M5 effectively prevents the light-emitting irregularities from getting caught on the check sheet or from lifting up from the transparent panel, causing the check sheet to bend.

Feature M6. The light emitting portion is a first light emitting portion;
A gaming machine described in feature M4 or feature M5, characterized in that the transparent panel is formed with a second light emitting section (front light emitting section 903G) that emits light from the light emitting means from the front surface of the transparent panel to the front of the gaming machine.

As shown in feature M6, if a first light emitting section and a second light emitting section are provided on the transparent panel and light from the light emitting means is emitted forwards and backwards from each light emitting section, for example, when a performance using a transparent panel is performed during play, even if light is emitted from the first light emitting section, the light can be prevented from being directed toward the player, and images drawn on the transparent panel can be prevented from becoming difficult to see. This makes it possible to suitably combine the function of indicating the mounting position shown in feature M5 and the performance function using light-emitting display in a single transparent panel.

Feature M7. Equipped with a light emission control means (announcement/performance control device 140) that controls the light emission of the light emitting means,
The light emission control means
A first control means for causing the light emitting means to emit light when a predetermined game performance is executed;
A gaming machine according to feature M6, characterized in having a second control means for causing the light-emitting means to emit light based on the operation of a predetermined operation unit (performance operation button 35).

According to feature M7, the light-emitting means can be turned on/off by operating a specific operation unit. With this configuration, the light-emitting means can be turned off after the check sheet has been positioned, making it possible to preferably prevent the light from the second light-emitting unit (light for presentation purposes) from interfering with the checking process.

Feature M8. The gaming machine described in Feature M7, wherein the second control means is configured to cause the light emitting means to emit light when the specified operation unit is operated while the door body is open.

If the installation position is displayed based on the operator's operation when the door shown in feature M8 is open, the effect shown in feature M7 can be effectively achieved.

Feature M9. A game board (game board unit 80H) on the front of which a game area (game area PE) is formed with a plurality of game nails (game nails 93) arranged, and a game machine body (inner frame 13H) having a support frame (inner frame base body 50) supporting the game board;
a door body (front door frame 14) that is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the gaming machine body and that covers the gaming area from the front of the gaming machine when the door body is placed in a closed position;
A gaming machine characterized in that one of the gaming machine main body and the door body is provided with a holding means (protrusions 951H, 961H, 971H, 981H, 991H) capable of holding a check sheet (check sheet CS) made of a transparent sheet material with a pattern indicating the position of the head of the gaming nail arranged on it while the check sheet is placed in a predetermined mounting position.

According to feature M9, the check sheet is held by the holding means, so that the worker does not need to hold the check sheet by hand. This makes it possible to prevent the check sheet from shifting position during checking, which could lead to a decrease in checking accuracy or a decrease in workability. Therefore, it is possible to conveniently check whether the game nails are in the correct state.

Feature M10. The gaming machine described in Feature M9, characterized in that the predetermined mounting position is a position where the check sheet faces the play area.

By placing the check sheet opposite the game board with the game area in between, the distance between the check sheet and the game pins can be minimized. This reduces the effect of parallax when checking the position of the heads of the game pins through the check sheet, making the checking process easier.

Feature M11. The game board has a central partition and an outer partition that partition the game area, the central partition and the outer partition are arranged to separate the game area,
The gaming machine described in feature M9 or feature M10 is characterized in that the holding means has a central holding portion provided in the central partition portion and an outer holding portion provided in the outer partition portion, and is configured to hold the check sheet by the central holding portion and the outer holding portion.

As shown in feature M11, by providing holding sections in both the central and outer partitions on either side of the play area, it is possible to reduce positional variation and misalignment of the check sheet, thereby contributing to improved checking accuracy.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be described as "the gaming machine described in feature M9 or feature M10, characterized in that the gaming board has a set of gaming parts that face each other across a predetermined flow path formed in the gaming area, the holding means are respectively disposed on the set of gaming parts, and the check sheet is held by the holding parts."

Feature M12. The gaming machine described in Feature M11, characterized in that the central holding portion and the outer holding portion are arranged in opposing positions across the flow path formed by the multiple gaming nails.

According to feature M12, by configuring the two holding parts to face each other and sandwiching the game pin to be checked, the effect of improving the checking accuracy shown in feature M11 can be optimally achieved.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in features A to L to features M1 to M12 described above.

Any one of the technical ideas shown in each of the above features may be applied to other features, or the technical ideas shown in multiple features may be combined and applied to other features. It is also possible to extract a part of the configuration shown in each feature and apply it to other features.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that includes an operating means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (guide rail 100) that guides the launched game ball to a specified game area, and various game components (nails, etc.) arranged within the game area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section (general winning opening 81, etc.) among the various game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that changes and displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols, and then displays the series of symbols at its final stop; the change in symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the change in symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 80... Game board unit, 80a... Game board, 83a... Upper operating port, 83b... Lower operating port, 85... Central opening, 140... Notification/performance control device, 162... Main control device, 500... Variable display unit, 523... Drum unit, 524... Base body, 525... Rotating body, 526... Motor, 528... Side light, 529... Background display device, 531... Frame, 532... Light guide section, 535... Hub, 536... Rim, 542... Connection section, 551... Outer surface section, 552... Inner surface section, 553... Light emitting section, 554... End surface, 555-557... Light guide panel, 561... Insertion section, 571... Light emitting substrate, 572... Light emitting body, 582... Backlight, 800... Game mechanism, 810... Allocation unit, 8 11...Stage section, 812...First ball entrance, 813...Second ball entrance, 814...Third ball entrance, 821...Movable body, 823-824...Columnar section, 830...Stage unit, 831...Stage section, 834...Stopper, 840...Link, 850F...Ball entrance unit, 851F...Base body, 855F...Performance gate, 856F...Upper crane, 857F...Lower crane Rune, 858F...non-electric device, 859F...lower operating port, 861F...first guide passage section, 862F...second guide passage section, 864F...first branch passage section, 865F...second branch passage section, 866F...ball detection sensor, 868F...position detection sensor, 871F...rolling surface, 873F...first opening, 874F...second opening, 875F...rolling surface, 876F...central opening,
901G...light emitting portion, 902G...front light diffusion portion, 903G...rear light diffusion portion, BP1...boundary portion, CL...rotation center axis, CS...check sheet, CS1 to CS4...sheet material, PE...play area, TL...reference line.

Claims (1)

A game board on which a game area is formed;
A first ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter ;
A second ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means ;
an acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a transition determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information;
a game state transition means for transitioning a game state to a special game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state , based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition corresponding result which corresponds to the predetermined transition information;
a game cycle control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game cycle operation is performed, the game cycle being counted as one game cycle when the game cycle operation is started and the game cycle operation is ended by a notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the transition judgment means;
A gaming machine comprising:
A display means having a display unit;
A first means capable of starting a first special performance in a predetermined area on the display unit based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A second means capable of starting a second special performance in the predetermined area on the display unit based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means;
having
The second means includes a means capable of starting the second special effect in the predetermined area based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means under a situation in which the first special effect is not being executed in the predetermined area,
The second ball entry means can be configured to allow a game ball to enter the ball more easily than the first ball entry means,
The first means is capable of executing a specific effect when starting the first special effect,
The second means is capable of executing the specific effect when the second special effect is started .

Images